UNIGRAPHICS

PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS OF UNIGRAPHICS
STUDENT MANUAL September 2002 MT10050 - Unigraphics NX

EDS Inc.

Proprietary & Restricted Rights Notices

Copyright Proprietary right of Unigraphics Solutions Inc., its subcontractors, or its suppliers are included in this software, in the data, documentation, or firmware related thereto, and in information disclosed therein. Neither this software, regardless of the form in which it exists, nor such data, information, or firmware may be used or disclosed to others for any purpose except as specifically authorized in writing by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. Recipient by accepting this document or utilizing this software agrees that neither this document nor the information disclosed herein nor any part thereof shall be reproduced or transferred to other documents or used or disclosed to others for manufacturing or any other purpose except as specifically authorized in writing by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. E2002 Electronic Data Systems Corporation. All rights reserved. Restricted Rights Legend The commercial computer software and related documentation are provided with restricted rights. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to the protections and restrictions as set forth in the Unigraphics Solutions Inc. commercial license for the software and/or documentation as prescribed in DOD FAR 227-7202-3(a), or for Civilian Agencies, in FAR 27.404(b)(2)(i), and any successor or similar regulation, as applicable. Unigraphics Solutions Inc., 10824 Hope Street, Cypress, CA 90630. Warranties and Liabilities All warranties and limitations thereof given by Unigraphics Solutions Inc. are set forth in the license agreement under which the software and/or documentation were provided. Nothing contained within or implied by the language of this document shall be considered to be a modification of such warranties. The information and the software that are the subject of this document are subject to change without notice and should not be considered commitments by Unigraphics Solutions Inc.. Unigraphics Solutions Inc. assumes no responsibility for any errors that may be contained within this document. The software discussed within this document is furnished under separate license agreement and is subject to use only in accordance with the licensing terms and conditions contained therein. Trademarks EDS, the EDS logo, UNIGRAPHICS SOLUTIONSR, UNIGRAPHICSR, GRIPR , PARASOLIDR, UGR, UG/... R, UG SOLUTIONSR, iMANR are trademarks or registered trademarks of Electronic Data Systems Corporation or its subsidiaries. All other logos or trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners.

Practical Application of Unigraphics Student Manual Publication History: Version 15.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 16.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 17.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version 18.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unigraphics NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . February 1999 January 2000 December 2000 September 2001 September 2002

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Course Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Course Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classroom System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Part File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Part File Naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unigraphics Site Specific Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unigraphics Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Gateway Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cue/Status line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu bar pull down menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Platform Specific Dialog Box Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shared Features of Windows File Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating a New Part file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening Multiple Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Change The Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Open an Existing Part File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse PopĆup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preselection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Selection Candidates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers and Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDS All Rights Reserved

-1 -1 -1 -1 -2 -2 -3 -3 -4 -4 -5 -5 -6 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-9 1-11 1-15 1-15 1-16 1-24 1-25 1-27 1-30 1-30 1-32 1-34 1-34
i

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

Table of Contents

Drafting Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engineering Disciplines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class Selection Filter Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Save Part As (Copying a Part File) . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Closing Part Files and Exiting Unigraphics . Activity 5 - Establish Toolbar Environment in Modeling Introduction to Solid Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate Systems in Unigraphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Absolute Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manipulating the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic WCS Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Points for Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utility Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Manipulating the WCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Origin, Edge Lengths Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Additional Toolbars in Modeling Application Activity 3 - Creating a Primitive Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diameter, Height Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating a Primitive Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Placement Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Horizontal and Vertical Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feature Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Horizontal, Vertical and Angular Positioning Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hole Creation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating Hole Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-34 1-34 1-35 1-36 1-37 1-39 1-41 1-43 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-8 2-10 2-17 2-18 2-19 2-20 2-23 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-28 3-1 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-8 3-14 3-14 3-16 3-21
Unigraphics NX

EDS All Rights Reserved

Table of Contents

Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Creating Slot Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangular Pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Creating Pocket Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . Boss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Creating Boss Form Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangular Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 5 - Creating and Positioning a Pad . . . . . . . . . . . Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Editing Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Information"Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used by . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Getting Familiar with Expressions . . . . . . . . . Face Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hollow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Thickness Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Performing a Hollow Operation . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Hollow and Selection Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Creating a Hollow Feature with an Offset . . . Edge Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edge Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edge Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edge Blends Using Dynamic Input Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Creating Edge Blends with Dynamic Input Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Performing a Chamfer Operation . . . . . . . . . Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visually Inspect the Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDS All Rights Reserved

3-22 3-24 3-30 3-30 3-31 3-33 3-34 3-38 3-38 3-39 4-1 4-2 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-5 5-7 5-9 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-6 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-12 6-13 7-1 7-2
iii

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

Table of Contents

Inspect the Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information"Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information"Expression"List All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information"Expression"List All by Reference . . . . . . . . . Playback & Suppress/Unsuppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expression Used by option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analysis Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Model Construction Query . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definitions and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SubĆAssembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Assembly Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TopĆDown Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BottomĆUp Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combining Both Approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designing in Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottom Up Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fully Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partially Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unloaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Displayed Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Work Part icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Repositioning Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dragging Components Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LeftĆRight UpĆDown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

7-2 7-3 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 8-1 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-8 8-8 8-8 8-9 8-9 8-10 8-13 8-13 8-15 8-16 8-16 8-17 8-18 8-20 8-20
Unigraphics NX

EDS All Rights Reserved

Table of Contents

Dragging along an axis of the coordinate system . . . . . . . . Rotation about an axis of the coordinate system . . . . . . . . Point to Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate About a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate About a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving the Work Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Adding and Repositioning a Component . . . .

8-20 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-22 8-23 8-24 8-25

The Master Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 The Assembly Modeler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 The Master Model Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Master Model Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Master Model Drawing Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Activity 1 - Exploring a Master Model Assembly . . . . . . . 9-6 Activity 2 - Creating a Master Model Assembly . . . . . . . . 9-12 Introduction to Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uses of the Drafting Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Editing a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a View to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Views From a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Adding a View to a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the View Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Button Specific Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Option Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 3 - Setting View Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . Creating Utility Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Associativity of Utility Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Utility Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Cylindrical Centerline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Creating a Cylindrical Centerline . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vector Definition for Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . Line and Point Definition for Cylindrical Dimensions . . . Dimension Local Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appended Text Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDS All Rights Reserved

10-1 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-5 10-7 10-10 10-10 10-11 10-14 10-15 10-15 10-18 10-19 10-20 10-20 10-20 10-21 10-22 10-29 10-30 10-31 10-32 10-33 10-34
v

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

Table of Contents

Precision Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance Type and Tolerance Value Options . . . . . . . . . . Tolerance Value Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placement Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrow Line and Extension Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leader Direction Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Justification Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 5 - Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating text Without a Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Text with a Leader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Existing Dimension Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 6 - Using the Annotation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-35 10-36 10-37 10-39 10-40 10-41 10-42 10-44 10-48 10-49 10-50 10-50 10-51 10-52 10-52 10-53

Datum Plane Reference Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Reference Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Relative Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Creating Datum Planes by Inferred Selection . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Datum Plane User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Dual Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Datum Plane Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Offset Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Center Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Datum Plane Through Cylindrical Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Datum Plane at an Angle Through a Cylindrical Axis . . . 11-9 Datum Plane at an Angle to a Face or Datum Plane Through an Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 Datum Plane Tangent to a Cylindrical Face . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Datum Plane Through Three Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Datum Plane Defined by Point and Direction . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 Activity 1 - Creating Relative Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 Selecting and Using Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 Editing Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 Deleting Datum Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 Activity 2 - Cylindrical Faces and Datum Planes . . . . . . . 11-21 Activity 3 - Feature on a Relative Datum Plane . . . . . . . . 11-27 Activity 4 - Creating a Hole Corner to Corner . . . . . . . . . 11-33 Datum Axis Reference Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Datum Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
vi
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Table of Contents

User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relative Datum Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Axis Through Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Axis Through an Edge or Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Axis Through a Cylindrical face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Datum Axis Through the Intersection of two Faces . . . . . Editing Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Constraining Locations using Datums . . . . . Activity 2 - Relative Datum Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6 12-7 12-8 12-9 12-9 12-10 12-19

Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 What is a sketch? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Why sketch? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 When should a sketch be used? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Sketches and the Model Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Sketches and Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Creating a New Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 The Sketch Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Sketch to Define the Base Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Sketch Associative to Existing Base Feature . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Defining the Reference Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Naming a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 The Active Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Sketch Creation Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Sketch for a Base Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Sketch on an Existing Face or Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 Activity 1 - Sketch Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Sketch Curve Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Sketch Curve Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Infer Constraints Setting Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Locking a Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 Snap Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 The Infer Point Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23 Alignment Lines While Creating Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24 Profile Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24 Creating Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26 Creating Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27 Creating Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28 Activity 2- Using the Sketch Profile Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30 Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

vii

Table of Contents

Quick Trim and Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40 Quick Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40 Quick Extend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42 Activity 3 - Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43 Activity 4 - Sketching a Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48 Activity 5 - Using Quick Trim and Quick Extend . . . . . . 13-55 Sketch Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59 DegreeĆofĆFreedom Arrows (DOF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59 Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61 Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61 The Sketch Constraints Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61 Creating Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-61 Text Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64 Dimensional Constraint Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-64 Editing Dimensional Constraints` . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-67 Delay Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68 Evaluate Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68 Update Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-68 Creating Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-69 Displaying Constraint Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-70 Show/Remove Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-73 Constraint Interrogation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74 Constraint Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-74 Constraint Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75 Listing Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75 Removing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-75 Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76 Dragging Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76 Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-76 Constraining Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-78 Activity 6 - Constraining a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-80 Activity 7 - Constraining the Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-89 Convert To/From Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-100 Activity 8 - Constraint Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-101 Swept Features and Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Swept Features from Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extrude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rules for Extruding Section String Objects . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

14-1 14-2 14-3 14-4 14-4
Unigraphics NX

EDS All Rights Reserved

Table of Contents

Extrusion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Activity 1 - Swept Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Defining Target and Tool Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 Unite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9 Swept Feature Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 Rules for Extruding With Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 Extruding With Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12 Activity 2 - Extruding with Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13 Sweep along Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-19 Rules for Sweeping Section String Objects Along a Guide 14-19 Guide Strings Containing Sharp Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20 Activity 3 - Sweeping Along a Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-21 Defining a Sweep Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23 Activity 4 - Defining a Sweep Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24 Revolve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 Rules for Revolving Section String Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 Body of Revolution Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-26 Activity 5 - Creating a Body of Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-27 Activity 6 - Adding a Body of Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32 Trimming Face Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34 Activity 7 - Revolving and Trimming to a Face . . . . . . . . . 14-35 Activity 8 - Extruding to a Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-39 Editing the Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Features of the Edit PullĆDown Menu . . . . . . . . . . Edit Feature Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delayed Update on Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Feature Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Feature PullĆDown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unsuppress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delta X, Y, Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate Between Two Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CSYS to CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDS All Rights Reserved

15-1 15-2 15-2 15-3 15-3 15-5 15-5 15-5 15-6 15-6 15-7 15-8 15-8 15-8 15-8
ix

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

Table of Contents

Deleting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Playback, Move & Delete Features . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Dimension Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 2 - Edit Features and Positioning Dimensions . . Activity 3 - Using the Update Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show/Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Make Current Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suppress and Unsuppress Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reorder Before/After . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Object Dependency Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 - Reordering with the Model Navigator . . . . . . Reattaching a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Reattach Menu dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reattach Menu dialog box Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 5 - Reattaching a Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instance Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 1 - Rectangular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

15-9 15-10 15-11 15-15 15-17 15-27 15-28 15-29 15-30 15-30 15-30 15-31 15-35 15-38 15-39 15-40 15-40 15-40 15-41 15-41 15-41 15-41 15-41 15-42 15-42 15-42 15-42 15-42 15-43 15-44 15-46 15-46 15-48 15-50 16-1 16-2 16-3 16-4 16-5 16-6
Unigraphics NX

EDS All Rights Reserved

Table of Contents

Activity 2 - Circular Instance Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11 Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11 Additional Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point Constructor Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Points vs. Specifying Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Icon Methods To Specify a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inferred Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cursor Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Existing Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intersection Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle on Arc/Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quadrant Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing a Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectangular Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cylindrical Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spherical Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vector Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDS All Rights Reserved

A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-6 A-9 A-10 A-12 A-14 A-16 A-18 A-20 A-22 A-24 A-26 A-28 A-30 A-32 A-34 B-1 B-1 B-2 B-2 B-3 B-3 B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-10 B-10 B-11 B-12 B-13 B-14 B-14
xi

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

Table of Contents

Offset Along Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15 Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformation Options Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate About a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirror Through a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate About a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Transformations for Symmetrical Geometry . . . . . . C-1 C-2 C-3 C-6 C-7 C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13

Curve Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 Explicit Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 The Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 Basic Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 The Dialog Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 PreĆSelection Highlighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 Control Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 Inferred Point Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 Status Line Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 Inferred Selection Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7 General Curve Creation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8 Point Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8 String Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9 Line Creation Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 Between Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 Through a Point and Horizontal or Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10 Through a Point and at an Angle to the XC Axis . . . . . . . D-11 Through a Point and Parallel, Perpendicular, or at an Angle to an Existing Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12 Parallel to An Existing Line at a Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13 Through a Point and Tangent or Perpendicular to a Curve D-14 Tangent to a Curve and Tangent or Perpendicular to Another Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15 Tangent to a Curve and Parallel, Perpendicular, or at an Angle to an Existing Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16 Line Creation Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17 Activity 1 - Creating Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-18 Creating Arcs and Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-26 Creating Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27 Creation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27
xii
Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Creating Arcs and Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Points for Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arc/Circle Creation Chart . . Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Trimming Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point on Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GL-1 Index . . . Activity 3 . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Curve Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Curve Parameters . . . . WCS Options . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Curves . . . . Using Parameters Mode . . . . . . . . . . Simple Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing an Arc or Circle . . . . . . . . . Fillet Creation Methods Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activity 4 . . . . . Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27 D-28 D-28 D-29 D-32 D-33 D-34 D-35 D-36 D-37 D-40 D-41 D-45 D-46 D-46 D-47 D-47 D-47 D-48 D-49 D-49 D-50 E-1 E-1 F-1 Glossary . . . . Activity 2 . . . . . . . . . . Using Dragging Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Curve Fillet . . IN-1 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual xiii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center Point. . . . . . . Creating Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Table of Contents Dialog Bar Fields . . . . . . . . . Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving an Arc or Circle to a New Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table of Contents (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) xiv Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Course Objectives After successfully completing this course. Demonstrate knowledge of CAD/CAM theory. NC programmers. the student should be able to: D D D D D D D Apply the standards used in class. Modify existing geometry. engineers. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual -1 . Create and modify basic assembly structures. Open and examine models. CAD/CAM managers. Prerequisites There are no prerequisites for this class. Create and edit parametric solid models. and system managers who have a need for understanding and using Unigraphics software.Course Overview Course Overview Intended Audience This course is suited for designers. manufacturing engineers. Create and modify simple drawings. application programmers.

the action boxes will seem redundant as the step text becomes all that is needed to accomplish a given task. As your knowledge of Unigraphics increases. select File Choose Open. Below each step are action boxes which emphasize the individual actions that must be taken to accomplish the step. The format of the activities is consistent throughout this manual. Classroom System Information Your instructor will provide you with the following items for working in the classroom: Student Login: Username: Password: Home Directory: Parts Directory: Instructor: Date: -2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Double-click on the parts sub-directory. Steps are labeled and specify what will be accomplished at any given point in the activity. - From the menu bar. If necessary. Step 1 Open part file pau_topic_1. you can always refer to any previous activity where a method or technique was originally taught. Select the file pau_topic_1 and choose OK.Course Overview How to Use This Manual It is important that you use the Student Manual in the sequence presented because later lessons assume you have learned concepts and techniques taught in an earlier lesson.

the user community must establish standard names for the various files associated with the part definition. All work should be performed in accordance with these standards. About Part File Naming In order to facilitate the identification of design models without requiring the user to open a part file. Standardization allows users to work with and predict the organization of parts created by others . The following is a sample usage of a filenaming standard: part name (25 characters) revision (4 characters) xxx_xxxxxxxxxxxx_xxxx_xxxx•prt identifier (3 characters) configuration (4 characters) extension (4 characters) TIP Currently up to 128 characters are valid for file names.Course Overview Class Standards The following standards will be used in this class.prt) is automatically added to define the file type. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual -3 . This means the maximum number of user defined characters for the file name is actually 124. A four character extension (.

and surname replace the course identifier pau" in the new filename with the remainder of the filename matching the original. Expression files that are valid for importing carry the file extension of . The total number of characters allowed in an expression is 132.5 dia=.5 h=1 l=1 out_r=.exp.Course Overview Class Part File Naming This course utilizes the following filenaming standard: underscore delimiter part name unique identifier number pau_ x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x _ x • p r t course identifier (3 characters) underscore delimiter extension (4 characters) Where the student is requested to save a part file for later use. -4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . the initials of the student's given name.25 thk=. middle name.06 w=1 Intended Use identifies bend radius for sheet metal parts identifies diameter identifies height identifies length identifies the outside radius for sheet metal parts identifies Radius identifies thickness identifies width These expressions could be entered by the user in each file or could be a standard expression file that could be imported into the part file by the user.625 rad=. Expressions The student will notice that there is a standard set of expressions resident in each of the part files as follows: Expression Name bend_r=.

These files incorporate the standards described above.Course Overview Colors The following colors are preset to indicate different object types: Object Bodies Solid Sheet Generating Curves (nonĆsketch) Lines and Arcs Conics and Splines Sketches Sketch Curves Reference Curves Datum Features Points and Coordinate Systems System Display Color Valid colors Green Yellow Orange Blue Cyan Gray Aquamarine White Red Seed Part Seed parts are an effective tool for establishing customer defaults or any settings that are partĆdependent (saved with the part file). This may include nonĆgeometric data such as: D D D D D Preferences Commonly used expressions Layer categories UserĆdefined views and layouts Part attributes Once a seed part is established. it should be writeĆprotected to avoid accidental modification of the seed part. pau_seedpart_in for inch parts and pau_seedpart_mm for metric parts. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual -5 . TIP Two seed part files are available for use in this course. and include the TFRĆTRI view as the default view.

Examples include the diameter and depth of a hole. from a set of design rules applied to the geometry defining the model as constraints.Course Overview Definition of Terms Explicit Modeling Explicit modeling is modeling that is not parametric. These constraints might be dimensional constraints (such as sketch dimensions or positioning dimensions) or geometric constraints (such as parallelism or tangency). ConstraintĆbased Modeling A constraint-based model is one in which the geometry of the model is driven. Hybrid Modeling Hybrid modeling refers to the selectively combined use of the three types of modeling described above. The Unigraphics hybrid modeler supports traditional explicit geometric modeling along with constraintĆbased sketching and parametric feature modeling. Parameters may reference each other to establish relationships between the various features of the model. Parametric Modeling A parametric model is one in which the values (parameters) used for the definition of the model are stored with the model for future editing. All tools are integrated so they can be used in combination. where the designer intends for that tangent condition to be maintained even though the angle of the line may change. The designer's intent may be that the hole is always as deep as the pad is high. Examples include a line tangent to an arc. This is not easily accomplished with an explicit model. Linking these parameters together may achieve the desired results. or creating an arc through three existing points. or the length. without requiring that the entire model be constrained before proceeding. If one of the existing points were moved. Changes to one or more objects do not necessarily affect other objects or the finished model. or solved. the line/arc would not change. Hybrid modelers allow designers to use parametric modeling where needed. and height of a rectangular pad. Objects are created relative to model space. not each other. or a perpendicular condition being maintained as angles are modified. width. Examples of explicit modeling include creating a line between two existing points. designers have more flexibility in modeling techniques. -6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Because of this.

you will be able to: D D D D D D D D D Start Unigraphics. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-1 . Close a Part File and Exit Unigraphics. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. Open a Part File. Subsequent lessons will reinforce and extend the student's understanding.Getting Started Getting Started Lesson 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ PURPOSE This lesson is a fundamental introduction to the Unigraphics User Interface. Work with Layers Copy a Part File. Dock and Undock Toolbars. Create a New Part File. Execute Menu Bar Pull Down Menus. Locate the Cue/Status line.

Because this procedure varies from company to company. consult the system administrator for a site specific procedure to follow. The Unigraphics NX Activity Menu shown below will not be displayed on Windows workstations.Getting Started ÉÉÉ Starting Unigraphics ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ The first step in working in Unigraphics is to log on to a workstation and start a ÉÉÉ Unigraphics process. and may or may not be displayed at Unix workstations. and platform to platform. It is shown here to describe the options available in case this is the normal start dialog box at your site. Unigraphics Site Specific Startup Unigraphics NX Activity Menu Version Select xwi" to enable the display of curve widths Select Starbase" to enable rotatable shaded images Select once to start Unigraphics 1-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

open an existing part or create a new part in which to work.Getting Started Unigraphics Windows No Part The graphic below shows the No Part" Unigraphics interface. This interface only allows the user to adjust default options. Menu bar:Ă Use the first mouse button to select an option from the pullĆdown menu Minimize Help Internet Explorer & History ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Cue line Status line EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-3 .

Work and displayed part names Graphics Window Restore Down Resource Bars Graphics area Cue line: displays user prompts Status line: Displays informational messages 1-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ The Gateway Application Upon opening an existing part or creating a new part in Unigraphics the Gateway application is entered. To create or edit objects within a file. Gateway allows the review of existing part files and the ability to get information on those files. one of the other applications such as Modeling must be entered.

Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 The Cue/Status line appears at the bottom of the main application window. Arrows to the right of the pullĆdown listing indicate that further cascading options are available. These options have pullĆdown menus associated with them that allow access to areas of functionality. Holding the first mouse button down over a Menu Bar option causes the pullĆdown menu to display. The ÉÉÉ purpose of the Cue line is to prompt for user interaction. Menu bar pull down menus The Menu Bar offers a number of options from which to choose. Cue/Status line NOTE: In a Windows environment the Cue line can be relocated to the top of the user interface. The purpose of the ÉÉÉ Status line is to give the user feedback about system activity. Menu Bar Cascade Menu PullĆDown Menu EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-5 .

etc. 1-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Platform Specific Dialog Box Variance Most interaction with dialog boxes is the same on the Windows platform and the Unix platform. The appearance of some of the controls is slightly different as shown in the example below.. some of the dialog boxes at your classroom workstation may differ slightly from those shown. check boxes. option menus. UNIX Windows 2000 Graphics shown in this text are from a Windows workstation. Notice the variance in the display of the slider bars.

button works with the Look in: option menu to The Up One Level traverse back up through the directory hierarchy. and Save Part File As dialog boxes have some very useful common features.prt extension. The Look in: option menu shows the name of the current selected drive or directory. Unigraphics part files have the .Getting Started Shared Features of Windows File Dialog Boxes The New Part File. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Choosing anywhere away from the list of the available folders and drives will dismiss the listing without selecting another folder or drive. Selecting the arrow on the right side of the box (or anywhere within the box) will list a hierarchy of the available folders and drives. Open Part File. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-7 . The list in the window below the Look In: box shows the available folders and files in the currently selected directory. The folder symbol represents a subĆdirectory.

button allows new subĆfolders to be created in The View Menu pulldown button allows the appearance of the listing in the window to be modified. Selecting the Details button will display a more detailed listing of the files and folders including Name. Type. Small Icons and Thumbnails. Size. Other options include. last Modified date and time. Properties can be accessed by selected mouse button three while in the Details" view mode The ? button at the top right of the dialog box changes the cursor to and allows selection of any of the controls in the dialog box for a short description of its function. The default listing is that of a List. Large Icons. 1-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ The Create New Folder the current directory. and any Attributes that may apply to the file.

Getting Started Activity 1 . The New Part File dialog box appears as shown.Creating a New Part file This activity demonstrates how to create a new part file. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-9 . ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ - Choose the New icon. Shaded radio" button indicates selected option Current directory path and file extension Step 2 Specify the units of measure for the new part file. - Choose the Millimeters radio button. Step 1 Create a new part file.

On Windows workstations the dialog box shown below will be displayed while the processing takes place. where *** represent your initials. The system processes the information and the part file is created and is loaded" into the current Unigraphics session. - Choose the Save icon. Ensure the directory is set to your home" directory. Step 4 Save the part. standards set up by the company or project will affect naming conventions. click in the File name field. 1-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . which means they may modify the file and save the changes. In addition.Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Step 3 Enter a new part file name. Any part that you create should be saved in a directory that you have permissions to. - With mouse button 1. File names are governed by the naming conventions established for the operating system of the computer. This will be a standard practice for this class to insure that the user at each workstation will be able to save his or her own part files. - - The creator of a file has read and write access. Choose OK. This will also be a standard practice for this class. Contact the system administrator for specific information on the number and types of characters for a valid file name. Key in ***_new_1.

In turn. Each application has a set of toolbars which support functions within that application.Getting Started Toolbars The Unigraphics user interface supports the use of Toolbars to allow quick access to most of the available functionality via logical groupings of common functionality displayed as Icons. The first is undocked where they are free floating on the screen. but may be located outside the window depending on screen setup. These toolbars are shown within the Unigraphics window. the state of the Toolbars is saved. This is controlled by the Save layout at exit option under the General tab in the Preferences→User Interface dialog box.g. Drafting) NOTE: When the Unigraphics session is exited. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Undocked Toolbars EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-11 . Modeling vs. Toolbars may be in one of two states. each application can also have toolbars and icons displayed which allow access to functions which are most commonly accessed for the specific application (e. The graphic below shows three toolbars in an undocked state. this will be the state displayed when the same user restarts Unigraphics. located randomly by the user on the screen.

1-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . either horizontally or vertically. Docked toolbars are always within the Unigraphics window. The graphic below shows several toolbars. Docked Toolbar (Vertical) Docked Toolbars (Horizontal) Control of Toolbar display may be accessed from one of 3 places: D D D Choose Tools"Customize from the main menu. Use the Third Mouse Button within the Unigraphics window. View and Layer toolbars are docked horizontally just below the Menu Bar. while some Modeling application toolbars are docked vertically on the right and left side of the Unigraphics window. where they anchor to the main Unigraphics window. outside the Graphics window. The Standard. Choose View"Toolbars from the main menu.Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ The second state that Toolbars may be in is docked.

is user customizable. To turn ON or OFF the display of a toolbar choose Tools"Customize or click MB3 in the toolbar area and select Customize. Placing a check in the box next to the toolbar name will instantly display the toolbar in the graphics area. as well as each element of each toolbar.Getting Started The display of each toolbar. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-13 .

Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ To turn ON or OFF the display of a toolbar element choose the Commands tab. 1-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Removing the check turns off the display. Placing a check in the box next to the toolbar command will instantly display the command in the appropriate toolbar.

These parts may have been loaded explicitly or implicitly. The Window option works in two ways: In the first method. This displays the Change Displayed Part dialog box and lists all parts being referenced in the current session. excluding the current displayed part.The part file is displayed in the graphics area. This means that several ÉÉÉ parts may be worked on interchangeably. To change the displayed part to any of the parts in the list simply select its name from the list. an option for More Parts is selected. There are two designations for loaded ÉÉÉ part files: Opening Multiple Parts D D Displayed .Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 More than one part file may be loaded at any time. This listing will include all components in an assembly structure as well as any loaded parts not contained in a loaded assembly. This list contains the latest displayed part at the top (excluding the currently displayed part) and then each previous part in the order that they were displayed until a total of ten are listed. To Change The Displayed Part Unigraphics allows multiple part files to be open in the same session. In most cases the displayed part and the work part are the same. In the second method. There are times when working in an assembly when it is advantageous that the work part be other than the displayed part. Work . a list of up to ten previously displayed parts is generated as the displayed part is changed. as a result of being referenced by a loaded assembly. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-15 .The part file is accessible for creation and editing operations.

Continue with the previous part file ***_new_1. Step 1 Display the Standard toolbar in the Gateway Application.Open an Existing Part File ÉÉÉ This activity will demonstrate working with toolbars to establish an efficient 1 ÉÉÉ environment in the Gateway application for this course as well as how ÉÉÉ working to load an existing part file into the work session. Click MB3 within toolbar area.Getting Started ÉÉÉ Activity 2 . 1-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Click Mouse Button 3 (MB3) in the toolbar area and choose Customize.

- Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box. The Standard toolbar should be displayed on the screen docked in the upper left corner under the Menu bar. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ - Verify that the Standard toolbar is checked ON.Getting Started The Customize Dialog box appears and shows the current toolbars which are displayed. Step 2 Open the part file pau_intro_1. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-17 . - Choose the Open icon.

Part Preview window Directory List Box File List Box 1-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . If necessary.Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ The Open Part File dialog box appears. - Check the current directory displayed in the Look in field. choose the proper directory from the option menu.

Notice the Status Line. meaning that changes may not be saved in this file. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Select pau_intro_1 in the file list box and choose OK.prt] and that its status is Read Only. A part file's units can be converted using a program called ug_convert outside of the active Unigraphics session. Any new work that you do is not permanent until the part file is saved on disk. The graphics area is now active. D It is important to keep in mind that a loaded part file is only a copy of what is stored on disk. as well as other information pertaining to the operation being performed. showing the model in the condition in which it was last saved. The title bar of the Unigraphics window displays the current work part in brackets [pau_intro_1. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-19 . It displays useful information as to what the system is doing while the part file is retrieved. The units of the file were determined prior to creation and may not be changed within an active Unigraphics session. - Choose OK in the Warning dialog box to dismiss the Read Only message. Once the part is open the following actions occur: D D Options for viewing the contents of the file are available on the menu bar.Getting Started Notice that there are no radio buttons for Inches and Millimeters in the Open Part File dialog box. which opens the file (or doubleĆclick on the file name).

View Selection Utility NOTE: Icons may vary for each toolbar Step 4 Undock and Dock the Utility toolbar. - Place the cursor on the handle portion of the Utility toolbar and press and hold down mouse button 1 (MB1). Locate the toolbars. NOTE: This portion of the activity is simply meant to show how to undock and dock toolbars.Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Step 3 Display the View. - Click MB3 in the toolbar area and verify the View. Selection and Utility toolbars are checked ON. The toolbars are displayed on the screen in an Docked state. Remember that toolbars may be docked horizontally on the top or bottom and vertically on the left or right. Selection and Utility toolbars. Select on the Handle 1-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Whether toolbars are in docked or undocked conditions the process for moving them is very similar.

note that the ghosted display of the outside of the window changes in size as the cursor leaves the graphics window. note that the ghosted display of the outside of the window changes in size. Select Here - Drag the toolbar such that the header portion falls within the main menu bar as shown below.Getting Started - Drag the toolbar onto the graphics window. The Utility toolbar is docked to the Unigraphics window. Locate Here - Release MB1. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-21 . Release MB1. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Notice the toolbar in an undocked condition displays a header with the name of the toolbar. - Place the cursor on the header portion of the Utility toolbar and press and hold down MB1.

Select Here - Drag the toolbar such that it is aligned under the Standard toolbar completely to the left side of the window. Release MB1. - The Utility toolbar remains docked to the Unigraphics window in the proper position. - Place the cursor on the handle portion of the Utility toolbar and press and hold down MB1. - Select the View toolbar on the handle and drag the toolbar such that it is aligned to the right of the Standard toolbar. Locate Here 1-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Step 5 Move a docked toolbar.

it will be used again in a later activity. Locate Here ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Step 6 Leave the part open.Getting Started - Select the Selection toolbar on the handle and drag the toolbar such that it is aligned to the right of the Utility toolbar. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-23 .

Displays either the icon or option label. Apply. Cancel. or third mouse buttons. Hold down Shift+MB2 to Pan and hold down Ctrl+MB2 to Zoom In/Out.) 3-BUTTON MOUSE 2-BUTTON MOUSE Both buttons together execute the second mouse button action 1 2 3 1 3 The mouse may be used to perform various actions as shown in this chart. (This order can be reversed. Mouse Button First Mouse Button (left only) MB1 Action Selects or drags objects Second Mouse Button (center OK while in an operation. 1-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Pan. starting from left to right. Also displays action information for objects selected with MB1. etc. Press and hold or both buttons) MB2 down while in the graphics area to Rotate the view. The mouse buttons are referred to as the first. in most terminal control panels. for users who prefer that orientation. Third Mouse Button in graphics area MB3 Mouse arrow over icons or option menu in a dialog box Displays popĆup menu for Back.Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Mouse Navigation The mouse may be used as well as the keyboard to make selections. second. Examples of two different mouse devices are shown.

the mouse may be used to perform various kinds of actions depending upon placement and position in the steps of the process. When the cursor is in the graphics area and the third mouse button is depressed. Refresh Fit Zoom Zoom Rotate In/Out Pan Wireframe Settings Shaded Settings Wireframe View Orientation EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-25 . the Quick View PopĆUp menu shown in the graphic below is displayed. The popĆup menu provides a shortcut to many of the functions that are frequently used in Unigraphics.Getting Started Mouse PopĆup Menu As mentioned in the previous chart. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ NOTE: The View toolbar may also be used to perform many of the view manipulation functions found in the View Pop-Up Menu.

rotate. Terminates the current operation. Erases temporary display entities. Replaces the current view with one of the canned views. Option Apply Back Cancel Refresh Fit Description Performs operation displayed in the current dialog box. Any operation or edit performed prior to the last one will not be affected by undo. The original visualization settings and view modifications are retained. Changes the view scale via a user specified rectangle. This is a toggle. Goes back to a previous dialog box. Active only in a modeling view. Changes the view scale via specification of a reference point and dragging the size using the mouse. Utilizes the fit percentage found on the Preferences→Visualization→Screen dialog box. Refreshes the entire graphics window.Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ The following table gives a brief summary of some of the options in the popĆup menu. Rotates the model using the XĆY method. Zoom Zoom In/Out Rotate Pan Update Display Restore Display Mode Hidden Edges Expand Orient View Replace View Undo 1-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Redisplays the current view in a canned view orientation. Pans the view in the direction you pull the mouse. The affected view becomes the work view and remains the work view until the expand is turned off. pan. Specifies the method of display of hidden edges in the graphics window. Expands a drawing's member view to the full graphics area. Fits the entire part to the view. Specifies the shading method in which the solid model is displayed. Active only in a modeling view. Reverses the effect of the last single operation performed. Restores the original view that was in effect before one of the following operations was performed: zoom. Generally used in a modeling view. Performs a Refresh operation as well as redisplaying silhouette curves of faces and hidden edges of solids.

Getting Started Selection Toolbar The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of an object for modification or the extraction of data is required. There are three major categories of objects that a user may focus on: General Objects. Features. and Components. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Components General Objects Features EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-27 .

the Type Filter may be used to narrow the band of selectable objects. Color Layer Reset Deselect All Class Selection Select All Name Selection Once an object has been selected. General Objects Features Components The remaining options of the toolbar may be used to further discriminate in the selection of objects. 1-28 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object.Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Depending on which category the user has selected.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-29 .Getting Started NOTE: When depressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the selected object for the shown pop-up dialogs to appear. General Objects Operations Components Operations ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Features Operations NOTE: Options may vary based upon application and object selected.

and lasts only through the current session. Preselection also applies to highlighting objects that are being deselected. Preselection by default is ON in Unigraphics. The state of the Preselection setting is not saved with the part.) indicating that there is more than one selectable object at this position.Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Preselection Preselection allows highlighting of objects that are selectable for various operations as the selection ball is moved over them.) to appear can be adjusted by choosing Preferences"Selection and adjusting the Confirmation slider. Selecting during this preĆhighlighting phase causes the highlighted object to be chosen for the action to be performed. During selection the act of moving the selection ball over a selectable object causes the object to preĆhighlight in the preselection color. the appearance of the cursor changes to a cross followed by an ellipsis (+. Selection after the cursor changes display will result in the presentation of the QuickPick dialog box shown below.. Should there be more than one selectable object at the selection ball location and the cursor lingers for a short period of time. Preselection may be controlled by choosing Preferences"Selection from the menu bar... NOTE: The amount of time the cursor must be stationary for the ellipsis (+.. Multiple Selection Candidates During the graphics area selection process it is common to have more than one selectable object contained in the selection ball. 1-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . usually through use of <Shift> first mouse button. QuickPick is a selection confirmation interface that allows immediate selection of a single object or an easy method for browsing through multiple selection candidates. The color of the highlighting is specified in the Color option menu.

As shown in the previous graphic. This will also progress the highlighted number in the Quick Pick dialog box and give feedback in the Status line displaying the type of object being highlighted. Moving the cursor over the number highlights the object in the graphics area and displays the type of object in the Status area. Placing the cursor in the area outside the truncation causes the buttons to scroll in the direction indicated. when there are more than six objects in the selection list. Mouse Button 1 can also be used anywhere on the graphics screen to progress through the multiple candidates. The desired object may be selected by selecting its numbered button. NOTE: When the Quick Pick dialog box is presented upon selection of an object. the end button is shown truncated. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-31 . The maximum number of buttons displayed at once is six.Getting Started Each selectable object beneath the cursor is represented by a number.

Getting Started

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

Layer Control
Unigraphics offers users the control of visibility and selectability of objects by the use of layers. A layer is a systemĆdefined attribute that all objects in Unigraphics must have. Some other required attributes are color, font, and width. A layer may be thought of as a partition in the part file that objects reside in, or on for the purpose of organization. There are 256 usable layers in Unigraphics, one of which is always the Work Layer. Any of the 256 layers can be assigned to one of four classifications of status:
D D D D

Work Selectable Visible Only Invisible

The Work Layer is the layer that objects are created on and is always visible and selectable while it remains the Work Layer. Layer 1 is the default Work Layer when starting a new part file. When the Work Layer is changed to another, the previous Work Layer automatically becomes Selectable and could then be assigned a status of Visible Only or Invisible. The number of objects on one layer is not limited. Each user has the freedom to choose which layers they will create objects on and what the status will be. However, it should be mentioned that the use of company standards in regards to layers would be beneficial. To assign a status to a layer or layers, choose Format→Layer Settings or select the Layer Settings icon, which may be turned ON in the Utility toolbar as shown below.

Work Layer can also be changed here

Layer Settings

1-32

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started

The following dialog box appears:

Work Layer Text Box

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

Select a layer from the Layer/Status listing and choose one of the four buttons below the listing.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-33

Getting Started

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

Layers and Categories
The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.

Model Geometry
Object Type Solid Geometry InterĆpart Modeling Sketch Geometry Curve Geometry Reference Geometry Sheet Bodies Layer Assignment 1-20 15-20 21-40 41-60 61-80 81-100 Category Name SOLIDS LINKED_OBJECTS SKETCHES CURVES DATUMS SHEETS

Drafting Objects
Object Type Drawing Borders Layer Assignment 101-110 Category Name FORMATS

Engineering Disciplines
Object Type Mechanism Tools Finite Element Meshes and Engr. Tools Manufacturing Quality Tools Layer Assignment 121-130 131-150 151-180 181-190 Category Name MECH CAE MFG QA

1-34

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started

Moving Layers
In the process of creating a model, there are times when it is necessary to move an object to a different layer. This option is available using Format→Move to Layer. The objects which need to be moved are then selected using the Class Selection menu. Once all of the objects to be moved are selected, the Layer Move dialog box appears.

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

To complete the process, the destination layer may be entered in the Destination Layer or Category field, or the layer may be selected from the list. Choose OK or Apply to move the object(s). If Apply is chosen, more objects may be selected to move by choosing the Select New Objects button.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-35

Getting Started

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

Class Selection
The Class Selection dialog box is used to filter for certain types of objects during graphics area selection. Normally direct selection using the selection ball in the graphics area is enough to get the desired object. There are times when filtering using the Class Selection options is necessary or very helpful to ensure that only desired object/types are selected. This often occurs in complex parts.

Name filter

Filter methods

Area filters

1-36

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started

Class Selection Filter Types
D

The Name filter allows selection by object(s) by entering an assigned name attribute. Filter Methods allows control of the selection of objects according to attributes such as features, type, color, and layer.
D

D

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

Features allows features (e.g. block, hole, datum, sketch) to be selected for various operations (e.g. delete or information). Once this option has been selected and features have been identified, choosing OK will perform the operation which introduced the Class Selection dialog. This option is not available for all operations (e.g. edit object display and Move to Layer). Type allows the object types (e.g. curve, edge, body, datums) to be included or excluded from the selection process. Color allows objects to be included or excluded from the selection process based on their color. All colors are initially selectable as the default. Layer is used to specify the layer(s) on which to allow selection. Valid layer selection may include a single layer, an existing category, or a layer range. Other is used to filter for font (line type), width, and userĆdefined attributes. Reset is used to return all fields to the default state.

D

D

D

D

D

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-37

Getting Started

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

D

Rectangle/Polygon Method is an option menu used to specify how objects are selected relative to an area defined by a rectangle or a polygon as discussed below. The rectangle or polygon is oriented in the current view plane and may be used in any view. A rectangle may be used by selecting a cursor location and dragging the cursor to another cursor location. The Polygon button must be selected prior to specifying the boundary with rubberĆbanding line segments in the graphics area.
D D

Inside - Objects completely inside the rectangle/polygon are selected. Outside -Objects completely outside the rectangle/polygon are selected. Crossing - Objects crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon are selected. Inside/Crossing - All objects inside the rectangle/polygon as well as those crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon. This is the default method. Outside/Crossing - All objects outside the rectangle/polygon as well as those crossing the boundary of the rectangle/polygon.

D

D

D

D

Up One Level allows selection of the next level component or group if components or groups are enabled for that operation. This is useful in assemblies work. Select All selects all objects in the work view by current filter methods settings. All but Selected selects all objects in the work view except for those currently highlighted by selection. Chain allows the selection of a sequence of contiguous curves or solid edges. Polygon allows the selection of objects using a polygon that is specified in the graphics area. (See Rectangle/Polygon Method above.)

D

D

D

D

1-38

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started

Activity 3 - Save Part As (Copying a Part File)
This activity shows how to make a copy of an existing part file by saving it using a different name. Continue with the previous part file pau_intro_1. Step 1 Create a copy of a part file.
-

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

Choose File→Save As...

The Save Part File As dialog box appears.
Directory where part is to be saved Up One Level

Enter new filename here

Step 2 Save a copy of the file in the desired directory.
-

In the Save Part File As dialog, use the Save in: option menu to navigate to the proper directory to save the part file. (HINT: should be one level up from the parts folder)

Step 3 Enter a new part file name.
-

Click in the File name field.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-39

Getting Started

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

-

Key in ***_intro_1 as the new part file name where *** represent your initials.

Type filename here

-

Choose OK.

The Status Line states that the part file is being saved. When the save is complete, the message Part file saved" displays. Work in Unigraphics may be resumed. Step 4 Save the work.

-

Choose the Save icon.

Once again, Unigraphics informs you in the Status Line that it is saving the part file. When the save is complete, the message Part file saved" is displayed.

TIP

You can save your work and exit Unigraphics all at once by choosing File"Close"Save All and Exit.

1-40

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started

Activity 4 - Closing Part Files and Exiting Unigraphics
This activity shows how to close a part file and exit Unigraphics. Continue with the previous part file ***_intro_1. Use File→Close→Selected Parts to close one or more of the loaded parts. Close All may be used to close all parts loaded in the current session from the Close Part dialog box. Step 1 Close the part file.
-

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

Choose File→Close→Selected Parts.

The Close Part dialog box appears showing a list of all open part files, which currently are ***_intro_1 and ***_new_1 part files.

List of open part files

***_intro_1 ***_new_1

-

Select the ***_intro_1 part file and choose MB2.

Since the part was not changed since it was last saved, it is immediately closed.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-41

Getting Started

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

If the part had been changed, the system displays a warning message letting you know that the part has been modified since it was last saved.

***_intro_1

Closing the part file does not save the part, it only clears the part file from the local memory in the workstation. Changes that have been made to the part file will be lost if the close operation is continued. Step 2 Learn how to end the Unigraphics work session.
-

Choose File→Exit. A dialog box displays.

If part file(s) are still open and have been modified, a message displays:

To end Unigraphics, from either Exit message window, you would choose OK.
-

Choose Cancel to dismiss the message and keep the session open. Do not Exit Unigraphics at this time.

1-42

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started

Activity 5 - Establish Toolbar Environment in Modeling
This activity will establish an efficient toolbar working environment in the Modeling application for this course. Other toolbars can be added as needed. Step 1 Change the displayed part to ***_new_1 (HINT: Window from the menu bar) Step 2 Display the Application toolbar in the Gateway Application.
-

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

Click MB3 in the toolbar area and check ON the Application toolbar.

Click MB3 within toolbar area.

Locate the Application toolbar in the Unigraphics window, it may be docked or undocked.

NOTE: Icons may vary.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-43

Getting Started

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

Step 3 Customize the Application toolbar.
-

Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize.

-

Select the Commands tab and highlight Application in the Toolbars column.

Select these options

A listing with the commands for the Application toolbar is displayed. The commands displayed on the toolbar are checked in the Commands column.

1-44

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Getting Started -

Scroll down to see all of the options in the Commands column. Turn ON the Modeling, Drafting and Assemblies commands and turn OFF all others options. Also, turn ON the Separator above the Assemblies command.

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ

Scroll down here

Note that the display of the toolbar changes immediately upon selection of commands.
-

Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box. Locate the Application toolbar as shown below.
Locate here

These toolbar settings will be retained for the Gateway application for the rest of the course.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

1-45

The toolbars that were established in the Gateway application may move and have different commands in them. View. Step 5 Display the common toolbars from the Gateway application. Turn OFF all other toolbars. - Entering a different application will introduce a new set of toolbars.Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Step 4 Enter the Modeling Application. 1-46 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Utility and Application toolbars are checked ON. Select the Modeling icon in the Application toolbar. - Click MB3 in the toolbar area and verify that the Standard. Other toolbars will be turned ON throughout the course as they are needed. Selection.

- Choose File"Close"All Parts. Step 6 Customize the toolbars.Getting Started - Dock the toolbars in similar locations as defined in the Gateway application. do not save. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 1-47 . - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize. Step 7 Close the part file. Choose OK in the Question window. Select the Commands tab and adjust the toolbars to match the commands in the table below. View Refresh Fit Zoom Selection Utility Application Select Work Drafting General Layer Objects Select Layer Assemblies Features Settings Select Separator Gateway Components Separator WCS Dynamics Type Filter Orient WCS Reset Separator Select All Toolbars Standard New Open Save Separator Zoom In/Out Delete Rotate Commands Undo Pan Separator Separator Information Wireframe Settings Shaded Deselect All Settings Wireframe Separator View Up One Orientation Level - Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box.

Activated toolbars and adjusted the commands within them. and saved parts. Exited Unigraphics. retrieved.Getting Started ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ SUMMARY In this lesson you: D Started Unigraphics and were made aware that the user interface appearance may be slightly different on UNIX and NT platforms. Copied a Part File. Were introduced to the layer system in Unigraphics. and saw how this convention aids in part file organization. D D D D D D D 1-48 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Executed Menu Bar Pull Down Menus and saw how these tools can save time. Closed a Part File. By performing these functions you were made aware of that parts are only loaded into memory and are not saved until performing a save" or save as" operation. Created.

OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. Create and Edit a Primitive Block. Define Points for Locations. Create a primitive cylinder. you will be able to: D D D D D D D ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Define the Absolute Coordinate System (ABS). Define the Work Coordinate System (WCS). Create a direction vector. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-1 . Subsequent lessons will reinforce and extend the student's understanding.Introduction to Solid Modeling Introduction to Solid Modeling Lesson 2 PURPOSE This lesson is a fundamental introduction to the Unigraphics Modeling application. Manipulate the WCS.

each axis has a positive direction and a negative direction. +Z -X -Y -Z +Y +X Origin This manual will primarily discuss the following different coordinate system types used in Unigraphics modeling. The figure below illustrates that.Introduction to Solid Modeling Coordinate Systems in Unigraphics Before any portions of the solid model may be defined. starting at the origin. Y. and Z axes. Cartesian coordinate systems. Y=0. all are rightĆhand. made up of a set of X. D D D Absolute Coordinate System (ABS) Work Coordinate System (WCS) Feature Coordinate System (Discussed in Form Features Lesson) 2-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . A threeĆaxis symbol is used to identify a coordinate system." There are many coordinate systems in Unigraphics. 90° apart from each other. Since solid modeling takes place in a 3Ćdimensional environment. model space is defined as the infinite extension of a 3Ćdimensional field represented in the views of your graphics area. it is important to understand the options Unigraphics offers for location and orientation of objects. The intersection of the axes is called the origin of the coordinate system. and Z=0. The origin has the coordinate values of X=0. ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Start here and go this direction.

Work Coordinate System Since the ABS is not mobile. not relative to positions and directions in model space. and Z=1 in one part file is the exact same absolute position in any other part file. In those cases. However. Unigraphics uses the Work Coordinate System (WCS) to establish a mobile coordinate system to facilitate geometry construction in different orientations. Unigraphics part files. certain functions are dependent on the WCS. and require the WCS to be positioned prior to performing the operation. The WCS is not a selectable entity.Introduction to Solid Modeling Absolute Coordinate System The Absolute Coordinate System (ABS) is not mobile. or even a Unigraphics part file to any other CAE system. since features are added to a model relative to existing geometry of the model. ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-3 . The Absolute Coordinate System is necessary to relate location or orientation between any two objects. The WCS can be located and oriented manually anywhere in model space. solid models. It defines a fixed point and orientation in model space. Curve and Primitive creation are two functions dependent on the WCS. Y=1. the WCS is handled automatically by Unigraphics. Most solid modeling operations in Unigraphics do not require manipulation of the WCS. An object positioned at Absolute X= 1.

the WCS displays with handles. In general. rotation.Introduction to Solid Modeling Manipulating the WCS The WCS options are accessed by choosing WCS on the menu bar or from the Utility toolbar (a part file must be displayed). If there is another object coincident with the WCS the temporary display of rotation planes may not appear. When the cursor is placed directly over the WCS there will be a temporary display of rotation planes shown to indicate that the WCS can be directly selected. Handles Point Constructor NOTE: WCS Dynamics may also be accessed by double-clicking directly on the WCS on the graphics screen. WCS Dynamics will be the focus in this lesson. ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ WCS Dynamics: Provides a dynamic interface to control the location and orientation of the WCS by entering values or dragging handles of the WCS in the graphics screen. In cases where the WCS cannot be double-clicked. WCS Dynamics can be accessed from the Menu bar or the Utility toolbar (as shown below). there are four ways to manipulate the WCS. orientation and dynamics. The Point Constructor icon also appears in the upper left hand corner of the graphics window. After choosing WCS Dynamics. They are origin. WCS Dynamics 2-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

cursor position. ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Vertex Handle EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-5 . arc center. when selected this option will bring the Point Constructor dialog box up. etc. option is also available on the graphics window to The Point Constructor position the WCS. control point. This handle will also allow the coordinate system to be dragged in any direction.Introduction to Solid Modeling Dynamic WCS Handles Vertex Handle: If the square handle is selected the WCS can be relocated to any point on the graphics screen (e.g.) and help indicators will display next to an object to help you predict where the WCS will relocate to.

etc. Unigraphics offers a standard dialog box that provides multiple point methods to define location. and is a common function in any CAE system. Axis Handle: If one of the three axis handles is selected a Dynamic Input Field appears on the graphics window next to the WCS. endpoints. start points. based on existing geometry or coordinate values. which allows input of specific distances or snap increments. 2-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . This handle will also allow the coordinate system to be dragged along its axis. Using the Point Constructor dialog box. see Appendix B. Primitives or any other geometry.Introduction to Solid Modeling Defining Points for Location To determine the location of the WCS. you can define origin points. ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Existing Point Cursor Location Inferred Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Angle on Arc/Ellipse Quadrant Point End Point Control Point Intersection Point Point on Surface Point on Curve/Edge None Rectangular Cylindrical Restores Base Point values to zero and Offset to none Spherical Vector Along Curve NOTE: For more information on Point types. the definition of specific points in space is necessary.

Snap (Angle/Distance): Using a Rotation handle. The default value for a tolerance is 45°. if the Snap (angle) tolerance is set to 5° and you rotate the WCS anywhere between 40 and 50° from its original position. it will snap to 45°. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-7 . This handle will also allow the coordinate system to be rotated about the axis. The default value for a Snap (distance) is 0 (zero). you can snap the WCS 45 degrees when you rotate within the Snap (angle) tolerance. you can snap the WCS incremental distances when you drag the handle. The Angle field will update to the angle moved as the handle is dragged.Introduction to Solid Modeling Rotation Handle: If one of the three rotation handles is selected a Dynamic Input Field also appears next to the WCS. You can also use these fields to directly enter a distance or rotation angle. Using an Axis handle. Finished Moving: Use the middle mouse button (MB2) to confirm the location or orientation of the WCS and exit WCS Dynamics. The Distance field will update to the distance moved as the handle is dragged. which allows input of specific angles or snap increments. but you can change the Snap field to adjust the tolerance. For example. but you can change the Snap field to adjust the tolerance. Rotation Handle Dynamic Input Field Axis Handle ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Distance/Angle: When the Dynamic Input Field appears next to the WCS the Distance/Angle fields display the offset distance or rotation that results from a dragging operation.

Utility Toolbar The WCS options may also be accessed through the Utility toolbar. ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ WCS Dynamics Orient WCS Display WCS Save WCS 2-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Introduction to Solid Modeling NOTE: Undo is available and can be used during WCS movement to restore the WCS to a previous location or orientation.

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Before Using the XĆaxis. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-9 . The menu shown below contains the various options to accomplish WCS orientation. YĆaxis option to change origin and rotation in the same step.Introduction to Solid Modeling Orient WCS: Allows the location and the rotation of the WCS to be altered in one step. XĆaxis YĆaxis After NOTE: The Orient option is commonly used to move the WCS back to the Absolute origin and orientation.

the WCS location and orientation in a new part file coincides with the Absolute Coordinate System. ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 1 Open part file pau_wcs_1 and start the Modeling Application. from the Utility 2-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . so it is helpful to learn how to manipulate the WCS. the WCS will be moved to different positions on a model.Manipulating the WCS In this activity. Unigraphics usually manages the WCS automatically. - Choose the WCS Dynamics icon toolbar. some construction and Info functions depend on the WCS. However. By default.Introduction to Solid Modeling Activity 1 . During model construction. Step 2 Change the Work Coordinate System origin.

or Ellipse Ctr.Introduction to Solid Modeling - Select the various points shown. Do not select any of the WCS handles. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-11 .) Select this elliptical edge (Quadrant Pt. therefore you can simply pick points in the graphics window to move the WCS.) Select here (End Pt.) Select here (End Pt. - Choose MB2 when finished moving the WCS to exit WCS Dynamics. The relocated WCS has the same XC. - Choose the WCS Dynamics icon. ZC directions as the prior WCS location. YC. or Ellipse Ctr.) The vertex is selected by default when entering WCS Dynamics.) Select this circular edge (Quadrant Pt.) ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select here (End Pt. Select this elliptical edge (Quadrant Pt. or Arc Ctr. Step 3 Change the direction of the Work Coordinate System axes.

2-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select this circular edge when the center is high lighted. Select this handle The Dynamic Input Field appears allowing an angle or snap (angle) to be entered.Introduction to Solid Modeling - Move the WCS to the arc center shown below. ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Select the Rotation Handle shown below.

Introduction to Solid Modeling -

Enter -905 in the Angle text entry field and press Enter.
After
The origin of the WCS is unchanged, the coordinate system is rotated about the XC axis, from the ZC axis toward the YC axis 90_

Before

The direction of rotation is based on the Right Hand Rule.
-

Choose MB2 when finished rotating the WCS.

Step 4 Change the orientation of the WCS. The image below has be rotated for clarity. Feel free to shade and rotate the view for better viewing of the part.

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

-

Choose the WCS Dynamics icon. Move the WCS to the location shown below.

Select this corner

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-13

Introduction to Solid Modeling -

Select the XC Axis Handle as shown below.

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
-

Select this Handle

Orient the XC Axis Handle to the edge shown below.

Arrow should point in this direction

Select here

2-14

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Introduction to Solid Modeling -

Select the YC Axis Handle.

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select this Handle -

Orient the YC Axis Handle to the edge shown below.

Arrow should point in this direction Select here

-

Choose MB2 when finished orienting the WCS.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-15

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Step 5 Move the WCS back to the Absolute CSYS.
-

Choose the Orient WCS icon as shown below.
Orient WCS

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

The following menu appears, listing the various ways to specify a new location and orientation for the WCS.

-

Choose the Absolute CSYS icon.

-

Choose OK.

Step 6 Choose File"Close"All Parts and choose OK in the Question dialog.

2-16

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Primitives
A Primitive is a solid object that is analytic in nature. A Primitive may be thought of as raw stock", to which material will be added or removed to achieve the finished part. There are multiple ways of defining each of the four Primitive types. Primitives may be used as the basic shape at the start of the solid modeling process. Using one of the Primitive types as the base feature eliminates the need to create and sweep curve geometry. When a Primitive is created, its type and its size must be specified as well as its location and orientation in model space. The four types of Primitives are:
D D D D

Block Cylinder Cone Sphere

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

NOTE: Although Unigraphics continues to allow the use of multiple Primitives in one solid body, the practice is not recommended because of the advantages and associativity of other solid modeling functionality. If a Primitive is used in a part file, the Primitive should be used as the initial solid feature. NOTE: Primitives are positioned explicitly. Their origins are set by a specified point in model space. However, they can be moved manually by either Transforming or, preferably, using Move Feature. A primitive's creation parameter values may be edited and made associative to each other. This lesson will concentrate on the Block feature. Another type of Primitive will be discussed later.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-17

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Block
A Primitive block may be created by specifying the size and location of the block in model space. The orientation will be implied from the orientation of the WCS. There are three different methods that may be used to create a block. The middle portion of the dialog and the Selection Steps change depending on the type of block creation method you choose. This manual will discuss the first method, Origin, Edge Lengths.
Two Points, Height Origin, Edge Lengths

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Two Diagonal Points

2-18

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Origin, Edge Lengths Method
D D D D

Choose the Block icon.

(Insert→Form Feature →Block)

Choose the creation method of Origin, Edge Lengths Define the length for each edge. Define the Point Method for the corner's origin.

NOTE: When no solid exists, no selection will place the corner at Absolute 0,0,0. The corner used for the origin is the vertex of the edges used to define the size of the block.
D

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Choose the desired boolean operation (Although Unigraphics continues to allow the use of multiple Primitives in one solid body, the practice is not recommended because of the advantages and associativity of other solid modeling functionality. If a Primitive is used in a part file, the Primitive should be used as the initial solid feature.).

NOTE: All of the X, Y, and Z values of the edge lengths are measured relative to the WCS, and must be positive values since they are used as the length, width, and height parameters of the block.
D

Choose OK or Apply.

Once the block has been created, its size may be changed by editing the values that were used for edge lengths during creation.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-19

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Activity 2 - Additional Toolbars in Modeling Application
This activity will establish additional toolbars in the Modeling application for this lesson and future lessons. Step 1 Create a new inch part file and name it ***_prim_exp_1 and choose the Modeling icon.

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Step 2 Display additional toolbars in the Modeling application.
-

Click MB3 in the toolbar area and turn ON the Form Feature, Feature Operation, Edit Feature and Modeling Toggles toolbars.

Form Feature

Feature Operation

Edit Feature

Modeling Toggles

NOTE: Icons may vary for each toolbar

2-20

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Introduction to Solid Modeling -

Dock the toolbars horizontally or vertically in the locations defined below.
Edit Feature Modeling Toggles

Feature Operation

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Form Feature

Step 3 Customize the toolbars.
-

Click MB3 in the toolbar area and choose Customize. Select the Commands tab and adjust the toolbars to match the commands in the following table.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-21

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Toolbars

Form Feature Sketch Extruded Body

Feature Operation Taper Edge Blend Edge Chamfer Hollow Instance Feature Offset Face Separator Unite Subtract Intersect

Edit Feature Edit Feature Parameters Edit Positioning Move Feature Separator Suppress Feature Unsuppress Feature Separator Delay Update on Edit Update Separator Feature Playback

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Commands

Revolved Body Sweep along Guide Separator Hole Boss Pocket Pad Slot Groove Separator Datum Plane Datum Axis Datum CSYS Separator Block Cylinder
-

Modeling Toggles Form Feature Toolbar Feature Operation Toolbar Edit Feature Toolbar

Choose Close to dismiss the Customize dialog box.

Step 4 Continue to the next activity.

2-22

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Activity 3 - Creating a Primitive Block
In this activity, a Primitive Block will be created using the Origin, Edge Lengths method. Only numerical values will be used for the size of the block. Continue with the previous part file ***_prim_exp_1. Step 1 Orient the WCS.

-

Choose the Trimetric icon

from the View toolbar.

Place the cursor over the WCS and double-click on it to enter WCS Dynamics. Select the YC-ZC Rotation Handle and drag the WCS to to orientation shown below.

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

-

Select this handle

-

Choose MB2 when finished rotating the WCS.

Step 2 Create a Block.

-

Choose the Block icon.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-23

Introduction to Solid Modeling

-

If necessary, choose the Origin, Edge Lengths icon. Key in the following parameters: Length (XC) = Length (YC) = 8 (Tab) 6 (Tab) 6/2 (an example of algebraic entry)

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Length (ZC) =
-

Choose MB2.

-

Choose the Fit icon

from the View toolbar.

Step 3 Move the WCS back to the Absolute CSYS orientation. Choose Orient WCS icon .

-

-

Choose the Absolute CSYS icon. Choose MB2.

Notice the WCS rotated back to the absolute orientation but the block stays in the same orientation. The WCS is only referenced when creating primitives and is not created associative to it. Step 4 Change the size of the block. Ensure the Select Features icon Selection toolbar. is ON in the

-

-

Place the cursor over the block an double-click on it to enter Edit Parameters.

2-24

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Introduction to Solid Modeling -

Select the parameter shown below to edit.

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
Select this parameter

-

Change the parameter value to 4 and choose MB2 twice.

Step 5 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

2-25

Introduction to Solid Modeling

Defining Vectors
Some of the primitives require a direction vector to define in what direction the primitive will be created. The direction, reference, and destination vectors may be defined using the Vector Constructor dialog box shown below.
At Angle Edge/Curve Vector On Curve Vector Face Normal

ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Between Two Points Inferred Vector

Datum Plane Normal

ZC Axis

Datum Axis XC Axis YC Axis

NOTE: The XC, YC, and ZC Axis options are sufficient for the purpose of this course.

2-26

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

The location and axis direction vector must also be specified. The methods to create cylinders are shown in the next figure. Height Method This method is used to create a cylinder by specifying the diameter and height values. size and location of the cylinder. the direction vector is the ZC Axis. After choosing this method: D D D ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Define the cylinder axis vector using the Vector Constructor. Enter the diameter and height.Introduction to Solid Modeling Cylinder A Primitive cylinder may be created by specifying the orientation. Define the cylinder origin using the Point Constructor. The origin is shown with the cylinder being created at the specified height in the direction of the vector. In the example below. Direction vector Origin ZC YC XC EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-27 . Diameter.

Step 1 Open the part pau_seedpart_mm. Height method. Choose the Diameter.Creating a Primitive Cylinder In this activity. Enter the following Values: Diameter = 75 Height = 200 - - - Choose OK. Step 3 Create the Cylinder. - ZC YC XC 2-28 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose Fit from the third mouse button PopĆUp Menu. Choose Reset in the Point Constructor menu if needed and choose OK. YC=0. ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 2 Choose Modeling. ZC=0. Choose the YC Axis direction icon from the Vector Constructor. Locate the cylinder at XC=0. Choose the Cylinder icon. Choose OK. Choose Cancel. a primitive cylinder will be created utilizing the direction vector menu.Introduction to Solid Modeling Activity 1 .

Introduction to Solid Modeling Step 4 Edit the size of the cylinder. do not save the part. ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose File"Close"All Parts. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 2-29 . Choose Feature Dialog. - Place the cursor over the cylinder and double-click on it to enter Edit Parameters. Change the values as follows: Diameter = Height = 15 150 - - Choose MB2 twice.

Introduction to Solid Modeling SUMMARY ÏÏÏ 2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ In this lesson you: D Were taught that the Absolute Coordinate System is a stationary coordinate system that defines a fixed point in model space. Created a Block. Relocated. Created a Primitive Cylinder. rotated. Changed the size of a Primitive after creation. Edited a Primitive Cylinder Reviewed the Vector Constructor dialog. and reoriented the WCS. You were also taught that if using a Primitive feature. D D D D D D D 2-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Were taught that the Work Coordinate System is a mobile coordinate system that may be moved and reoriented as necessary to support other Unigraphics functions. it should be the base feature and that Primitives should be limited to one in a part file because they cannot be associatively positioned.

you will be able to: D D D Create Boss. Hole. Position Boss. Hole. Pocket. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-1 . OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. and Slot Form Features. Create a Rectangular Pad.Form Features Form Features Lesson 3 PURPOSE To introduce Form Features. and Slot Form Features . Pocket.

the placement face must be cylindrical or conical. For a groove. slots. 3-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Form Features Form Features Form features are used to add detail to the model during creation. pockets and grooves. The Placement Face ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ All form features require a placement face. the placement face must be planar. pads. These features include holes. Datum Plane used as Planar Placement Face for Hole feature through cylindrical face of boss. bosses. This planar placement face defines the XĆY plane of the coordinate system for the feature being created. A datum plane may be used as the planar placement face. The creation and use of datum planes is covered in a later lesson. Form features are fully associative to the geometry and parameter values used to create them. Features are created normal to the placement face. For all other form features.

Any linear edge. datum axis. If no edge in a true horizontal direction is available the user can specify a vertical reference from which the system will infer horizontal as perpendicular to the selected vertical direction. rectangular pocket and pad). Feature Coordinate System During creation of features of a Unigraphics model. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-3 . X+ Vector ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ The Horizontal Reference is also required to define horizontal or vertical types of positioning dimensions for features that do not initially require a Horizontal Reference (holes bosses. planar face. The Horizontal Reference is required to define the length direction of form features having a Length parameter (slot. the system will manipulate the WCS automatically to facilitate creation of the feature specified based on the user input provided. and cylindrical pockets). The manipulated coordinate system is called a Feature Coordinate System (FCS) and is stored as part of the feature definition. or datum plane that may be projected onto the planar placement face may be selected to define the horizontal direction. Unigraphics will manipulate the WCS back to the FCS orientation during subsequent feature editing.Form Features The Horizontal and Vertical Reference The Horizontal Reference defines the X axis of the feature coordinate system.

3-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . that the geometry must obey. These dimensions should be considered as constraints. or rules. as shown below. It is not necessary to add positioning dimensions to form features.Form Features Positioning Form Features Positioning Dimensions are distance values measured along the planar placement face. only applicable dimension types will be displayed. There are nine different positioning methods available on the Positioning dialog box. but it is recommended that positioning dimensions be added at the time of creation for ease of later editing. They may be used to place the form feature at the proper location on the placement face. Vertical Horizontal Angular Parallel Perpendicular Parallel at a Distance ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Point onto Point Point onto Line Line onto Line NOTE: When positioning a form feature.

Slot. In the context of a Form Feature it is the representation of the Hole.Form Features Positioning Terminology D Fully Specified -The feature is uniquely located by the positioning dimensions specified.The feature is not yet uniquely located. Pocket. or a Boss or Pad will unite with. In the context of a Form Feature it is the solid body that the Hole. Tool Solid -The solid representation of the feature being defined by the current operation. Boss. Pocket or Groove will subtract from.The feature has had more positioning dimensions applied to it than are necessary. or Groove that will be subtracted from or united with the Target Solid. D D D D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-5 . Slot.The solid body that a Boolean operation acts upon. Target Solid . Pad. Overspecified . Underspecified .

Horizontal is measured along the XĆaxis of the feature coordinate system (i. the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).50 Tool edge Horizontal positioning dimension 3-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . As edges are selected. one point on the target solid and the other point on the tool solid.e. Feature Coordinate System ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Target edge Horizontal reference (datum plane) 1.Specifies the horizontal distance between two points. the Horizontal Reference).Form Features Positioning Methods Horizontal .

Specifies the vertical distance between two points. Feature Coordinate System Vertical positioning dimension 1.Form Features Vertical .50 Target edge (arc center) Tool edge (arc center) Horizontal reference Angular . from the ends of the edges nearest to where they are selected. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Feature Coordinate System Tool edge (center line) 30 Angular positioning dimension Horizontal reference Target edge EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-7 . perpendicular to the Horizontal Reference).Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be at a given angle to each other. one point on the target solid and the other point on the tool solid. the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).e. The angle is measured in a counterĆclockwise direction (with respect to the feature coordinate system). Vertical is measured along the YĆaxis of the feature coordinate system (i. As edges are selected.

Form Features Examples of Horizontal. Vertical and Angular Positioning Dimensions Fully Specified by Horizontal. and Cylindrical Pockets the Tool Edge is automatically selected and defined as the arc center.00 Tool edge (arc center) Target edge for Horizontal and Vertical Dimension (arc center) 1. Vertical and Angular Positioning Dimensions 15 .00 Horizontal reference NOTE: When positioning Holes.500 Target edge for Horizontal and Vertical Dimension . Bosses. 3-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .500 Tool edge for Horizontal and Vertical Dimension Horizontal reference ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Fully Specified by Horizontal and Vertical Positioning Dimensions 1.

00 In the above example the feature (hole) can be fully specified with two Perpendicular dimensions. one point on the target solid and the other point on the tool solid. Tool edge (arc center) 1.Specifies the shortest distance between two points.50 Perpendicular positioning dimension Feature Coordinate System ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Tool edge (arc center) 2. The linear target edge is always the first pick. As edges are selected. Features with length. will require an additional positioning dimension to control rotation. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-9 .Form Features Parallel . the nearest valid point is selected (midpoints are not selectable).Specifies the shortest (normal) distance between a linear edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid. pocket and pad. such as slot. TIP Using Perpendicular positioning instead of Horizontal or Vertical can save time since no horizontal or vertical reference is needed.375 Parallel positioning dimension Target edge (arc center) Feature Coordinate System Perpendicular . Target edges 1.

Form Features Parallel at a Distance . This is typically used for features with length (slot. Feature Coordinate System Parallel positioning dimension 2. Horizontal. Perpendicular.e. rotational and distance in one direction. pocket or pad).Specifies that a linear edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid must be parallel and at a given distance. To fully specify the feature in the above example an additional positioning dimension is required to solve the final degree of freedom (i. 3-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Adding another Parallel at a Distance or Line onto Line dimension would overspecify the location of the feature. or Point onto Line).00 Tool edge (center line) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Target edge Horizontal reference These two edges are constrained parallel Using Parallel at a Distance will solve two of the three degrees of freedom necessary to fully specify a feature with length.

This is most commonly used to align arc centers of cylindrical or conical features and fully constrain their location since rotation is not a degree of freedom for cylindrical or conical features. This zero value can be edited to a non-zero value through the Edit→Feature →Positioning dialog.Form Features Point onto Point .Specifies that the distance between a point on the target solid and a point on the tool solid is zero. Point on tool solid Point on target solid Point onto Point is the same as the Parallel positioning dimension only the value is automatically set to zero. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-11 .

This zero value can be edited to a non-zero value through the Edit→Feature →Positioning dialog.Specifies that the distance between an edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a point on the tool solid is zero.Form Features Point onto Line . Point onto Line positioning dimensions ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Target edges (Datum Planes) 0 0 Feature Coordinate System Tool edge (arc center) Point onto Line is the same as the Perpendicular positioning dimension only the value is automatically set to zero. 3-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Form Features Line onto Line . To fully specify the feature in the above example an additional positioning dimension is required to solve the final degree of freedom (i. Adding another Line onto Line or Parallel at a Distance dimension would overspecify the location of the feature. Point onto Line positioning dimensions Horizontal reference 0 Feature Coordinate System Target edge (Datum Plane) Tool edge (center line of slot) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Using Line onto Line will solve two of the three degrees of freedom necessary to fully specify a feature of length. Horizontal.Specifies that the distance between a linear edge on the target solid (also datum planes or axis) and a linear edge on the tool solid is zero and they are constrained parallel to each other. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-13 . Line onto Line is the same as the Parallel at a Distance positioning dimension only the value is automatically set to zero.e. Perpendicular. This is typically used for features with length (slot. pocket or pad). or Point onto Line). This zero value can be edited to a non-zero value through the Edit→Feature →Positioning dialog. rotational and translation in one direction.

The middle portion of the dialog window changes depending on the hole type that is selected. and countersink holes in an existing solid. Choose OK or Apply. counterbore.) Choose the hole type. If a datum plane is selected choose the Reverse Side button as required. Select the placement face. D D D D 3-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Key in the required values (or statements).Form Features Hole This option is used to create simple. Create positional dimensions as required. Select the thru face if applicable. Simple Placement face Counterbore Thru face Countersink ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Hole Creation Method D D D Choose Insert→Form Feature →Hole (or the Hole icon.

Form Features Simple Hole Depth Hole Diameter Counterbored CĆBore Diameter Hole Depth CĆBore Depth Tip Angle ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Countersunk CĆSink Angle CĆSink Diameter Hole Depth EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-15 .

choose the Origin. Simple Thru Hole Diameter = 1. Ensure that the Modeling Application is active. Choose the Block icon. - - If necessary. - Step 2 Create a Block.Form Features Activity 1 . Key in the following parameters: Length (XC) = Length (YC) = Length (ZC) = 10 (Tab) 4 (Tab) 2 - Choose MB2.50 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 1 Open the part file pau_seedpart_in. 3-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Creating Hole Form Features This activity will show the creation of a thru hole feature. Edge Lengths icon.

Confirm the selection if necessary. - Choose the Hole icon. Select top face here ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ If incorrect geometry is selected. - again Select the bottom face as the Thru Face. - Ensure the Simple hole icon is selected. select the Placement Face icon and then reselect the correct geometry. Select the top face of the block as shown below. Select thru face with one pick in this region or select and confirm ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-17 . Step 3 Create a simple thru hole.Form Features - Choose the Fit icon from the View toolbar.

Form Features - Enter 1. The hole is temporarily represented as a long tool solid that extends beyond the thru face. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ The Positioning dialog box is displayed. and Select this edge as the Target Edge 3-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Step 4 Position the hole feature.5 for the diameter and choose OK. - The system defaults to the Perpendicular icon the Cue line prompts you to select a Target Edge. as shown in the figure below.

NOTE: The system applied expression names may be accepted. it is a good practice to give expressions a meaningful name. however. doing so will make interrogation of the part easier. Select the left edge of the top face as shown in the figure below. - Choose the Perpendicular icon. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select this edge as the Target Edge EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-19 .Form Features - Key in the name of the expression (dim_1) and the value (2) as shown below.

The part now looks like the following figure. Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts. - Choose OK. it is moved to the new position and the Boolean operation is performed. 3-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Since the location of the hole is completely specified.Form Features - Key in the name of the expression and the value as shown below.

The system prompts for all necessary slot parameters. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-21 . the shape of the imaginary cutting tool corresponds to the slot type and dimensions. The slot feature will be created so that the axis of the imaginary cutter tool is normal to the face or datum plane selected.Form Features Slot This option allows you to create a slot in a solid body as if cut by a milling machine tool. In each case. specified by the user. The slot types are shown in the dialog box illustrated below. The path of the slot will be parallel to the horizontal reference selected. depending upon the specific type of slot feature chosen. the Thru slot option extends the slot length along the placement face in the direction of the horizontal reference through the faces. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ For all slot types.

from the origin point of the slot to the bottom of the slot. Depth values must be positive. The depth of the slot is measured in a parallel orientation to the tool axis. The length is measured parallel to the horizontal reference (X in the feature coordinate system). 3-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Instead.Form Features Rectangular This option allows creation of a slot in an existing solid body using a tool that has cylindrical end faces and will leave sharp edges along the bottom of the slot. it prompts for selection of the two thru faces. as shown below. Rectangular slot parameters are Slot Width. NOTE: The system will not prompt for slot length if the Thru option has been toggled on. Slot Length. Length values must be positive. ZC YC XC Width Length Depth ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ The width of the rectangular slot represents the diameter of the cylindrical cutting tool. Slot Depth.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-23 . Depth Width Depth Ball Diameter BallĆEnd Slot Corner Radius UĆSlot ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Top Width Bottom Depth Top Depth Width Angle Bottom Width TĆSlot Dovetail Slot NOTE: The value of the corner radius of the U-Slot must be less than 1/2 the width of the slot. Placement Face Second Thru face Centerline First Thru face The four other available slot profiles are illustrated below.Form Features The figure below illustrates a T-slot using the Thru option.

Select top face here 3-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Ensure that the Modeling Application is active. you will create two different types of slots in the top of a solid.Form Features Activity 2 . The Cue line prompts you to select the planar placement face.Creating Slot Form Features In this activity. - Select the top of the block at the approximate position shown in the figure below.00 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose the Slot icon. Rectangular slot width = 2. The top edges change to the system color. Step 1 Open the part file pau_slot_1.00 depth = 0. Step 2 Create a rectangular slot.50 length = 3. Use the information provided in the figure below for your work. Then choose the Rectangular option.

The Cue line asks for a horizontal reference. If the wrong face is highlighted. solid face. select the Back button in the active dialog box. a vertical reference could be specified instead using any of the fore mentioned objects. - Select the bottom front edge of the block. choose the correct number from the QuickPick dialog box. Select this edge as the horizontal reference A conehead displays the direction of the length of the slot. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-25 . The object selected can be a linear edge. datum plane. as shown in the following figure. The horizontal direction selected will determine the direction in which the slot length will be placed in the part. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Enter the parameters for the rectangular slot: Width= 2 Depth= . datum axis. Or. and the top edges are highlighted.5 Length= 3 - Choose OK.Form Features - If the Cue line asks for a selection confirmation. or any edge parallel to it.

Select the target edge as shown below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Select the slot's centerline that is parallel to the selected edge. Key in 2 and choose OK. - Select the slot's centerline that is parallel to the selected edge.Form Features The rectangular slot will appear and be placed at the location of the screen pick on the top of the block. Select this edge. Select the target edge as shown below. - - Choose the Perpendicular icon. Select this edge. - 3-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Key in 3.5 and choose OK. - Choose the Parallel at a Distance icon.

Select top face here ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Select the horizontal reference. Select this edge EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-27 . Step 3 Create a TĆslot.Form Features The Boolean operation is performed. Choose the T-Slot option. Select the planar placement face as shown. Toggle the Thru option ON. The finished rectangular slot should now look like this. - Select Back.

5 . Select this edge.Form Features - Select the thru faces for the T-slot. - Choose the Parallel at a Distance icon.5 Bottom width = .5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose OK. Key in 2 and choose OK. - Select the slot's centerline that is parallel to the selected edge. 3-28 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Since thru faces have been defined the slot does not need to be positioned along its length.75 Bottom depth = . Starting thru face - Ending thru face Enter the following values for the parameters: Top width = Top depth = . Select the target edge as shown below.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-29 . Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts. a dovetail Thru slot.Form Features - Choose OK. that intersects both of the other slots. Your part should look like the following figure. Step 4 Optional: Add a third slot.

or from the centerlines provided for this purpose. having either straight or tapered sides. with or without a floor and/or corner radius. 3-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . There are three types of pockets: D D D Cylindrical Rectangular General The Rectangular Pocket will be discussed in this lesson. The following parameters may be specified: X Length Positioning Centerlines Origin point Y Length Horizontal Reference Corner Radius Taper Angle Z Length Floor Radius Pocket features may be positioned from a tool edge. Rectangular Pocket ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ This option allows a rectangular pocket to be defined to a specified depth.Form Features Pocket The pocket feature is used to create a cavity in a solid body.

- Ensure that the Modeling Application is active. Choose Rectangular. Step 2 Create a rectangular pocket. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-31 .Creating Pocket Form Features In this activity. Step 1 Open the part file pau_pocket_1.Form Features Activity 3 . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select placement face here Select this face as horizontal reference - Select the horizontal reference as shown in the same figure. The finished part will look like the figure below. a rectangular pocket will be created on the block. Select the placement face as shown in the figure below. - Choose the Pocket icon.

The rectangular pocket appears at the location where the planar placement face was selected. Step 4 Choose File"Close"All Parts.5 . and parametric values. 3-32 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .25 0 - Choose OK.5 1 .Form Features - Enter the parameter values as follows: X Length = Y Length = Z Length = Corner Radius = Floor Radius = Taper Angle = 3 1. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Fully position the pocket using your own methods. Step 3 Use a similar method to create the second pocket shown at the beginning of the activity.

The parameters of the boss are diameter. Diameter Height Z Y Tapered boss Z Y X X ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Diameter is the distance across the required boss.Form Features Boss The Boss feature allows the addition of a cylindrical shape to a specified height. Height is measured from the placement face. A positive or negative value may be entered depending on which way the wall is to incline. height and taper angle. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-33 . Taper angle is the angle at which the cylinder wall of the boss inclines. A zero value results in a vertical cylinder wall. having either straight or tapered sides.

Select pau_coverplate_1.075 After ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 1 Open the part file. NOTE: The dimensions shown are from the outside of the part.Creating Boss Form Features In this activity. be sure to select the proper edges to dimension from. Step 2 Create a boss feature. - Save the part as ***_coverplate_1 where *** represent your initials. two bosses will be created and positioned on a cover plate for a modular telephone jack as shown below. 3-34 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose File→Open.20 Boss height=0.Form Features Activity 4 . Before Boss diameter=0. - Ensure that the Modeling Application is active.

Select and accept the planar placement face as shown below. and EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-35 . - The system defaults to the Perpendicular icon the Cue line prompts you to select a Target Edge. Step 3 Position the boss.Form Features - Choose the Boss icon. The Positioning dialog box is displayed.075 Taper Angle = 0 - Choose Apply. Select top inside face approximately here - Enter the parameters for the boss: Diameter = Height = . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ The boss is temporarily placed on the face where you selected it.2 .

5 for the new value. Select a front edge on the outside of the part for the target edge for the second perpendicular dimension. A temporary display appears that shows the distance from the center of the boss to the target edge. The boss is moved into the correct location and the Boolean operation is performed. Target edge - Enter 1 for the new value and choose OK. - Enter 1. 3-36 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose the Perpendicular icon again. as shown below. as shown below. Front Select either of the right outside edges as the target edge.Form Features - Select a right side edge on the outside of the part for a target edge for the perpendicular dimension.

this time use the back. outside edge to locate the boss.Form Features Step 4 Create the second boss and position it. Step 5 Choose File"Save. Do not close the part. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-37 . Use the same positioning values. - Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 for the second boss.

with or without taper and corner radii. and Height values of the Pad feature relate directly to the displayed vector indicating the Horizontal direction.Form Features Pad This option allows a raised pad on a solid body to be created. A zero radius results in sharp corners on the pad feature. and must be positive or equal to zero. Y. corner radius. and Height is measured normal to the Placement face. This number may be positive or zero. and taper. Width is measured perpendicular to the displayed vector. A zero value results in vertical walls. The Corner Radius specifies the blend radius for the vertical edges of the pad feature (along the Height). Width. and Z lengths. The Taper Angle is the angle at which the four walls of the pad feature incline inward. Length is measured along the displayed vector. The two types of pads are: D D Rectangular General (Not covered in this course) Rectangular Pad The Length. The parameter values of the pad feature are X. Tapered Pad Positioning Centerlines Width ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Length Height Corner Radius Horizontal reference 3-38 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Select the top surface at a location which approximates the position shown.Form Features Activity 5 . - Choose the Pad icon. Rectangular pad length 2. two pads will be centered with respect to the two existing bosses. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-39 . This determines the direction of the Length parameter of the pad as well as the direction for a horizontal Positioning Dimension.1 height 0. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Location for pad It is now necessary to define the horizontal reference.Creating and Positioning a Pad In this activity. When complete. Step 1 Continue working with ***_coverplate_1.0375 Step 2 Create the first rectangular pad.9 width 0. Choose Rectangular from the dialog box. the part should appear as shown below.

Choose the Line onto Line icon Method dialog box.Form Features - Select one of the edges or faces shown below to establish the horizontal direction of the feature coordinate system.9 . Step 3 Position the pad.1 . - If the vector is not pointing in the desired direction. on the Positioning - 3-40 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Enter the parameters for the pad: Length = Width = Height = Corner Radius = Taper Angle = 2.0375 0 0 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - - Choose OK. choose Back and respecify the horizontal reference. The pad is temporarily positioned at the location selected for the placement face. Select back edges or face for Horizontal Reference Select front edge or face for Horizontal Reference A vector arrow displays the horizontal direction of the pad.

another positioning dimension is required to fully specify the feature's location. Tool edge Target edge - Select a tool edge (the small edge at the top end of the pad) The position is specified in one direction. - Choose the Vertical icon. Select the target edge (circular edge of the boss) as shown in the figure below. Select the pad's horizontal center line as the Tool Edge. Choose OK. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Target edge - Choose Arc Center.Form Features - Select the target edge (an inside edge as shown below). EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-41 . Enter a new value of 0.

When completed the part should look like the figure shown below. The part should look as shown below: Step 4 Create the second pad and position it in the same way to the other boss. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 5 Save and close the part file.Form Features The pad moves into position and the Boolean operation is performed. 3-42 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Form features are fully associative to the geometry and parameter values used to create them. Created Boss Form Features Created a Rectangular Pad. Created Pocket Form Features. Identified a Horizontal Reference. Form features are used to add detail to the model during creation.Form Features SUMMARY In this lesson you were introduced to Form Features. Identified Target and Tool Solids Applied Positioning dimensions to a form feature. Created Slot Form Features. The different form features are: Hole Boss Pocket Pad Slot Groove This lesson you: D D D D D D D D D Identified a Placement Face. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 3-43 . Created a Hole Form Feature.

Form Features (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 3-44 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 4-1 . you will be able to: D D Create Expressions. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. Edit Expressions.Expressions Expressions Lesson 4 PURPOSE This lesson is a fundamental introduction to Expressions.

Expressions are case sensitive. and comments in an expression is 132. The statement may be a numeral or an algebraic function and may contain preĆexisting expression names. a statement. and a value. The value is the result of the evaluation of the statement portion of the equation within the expression. 4-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . equal sign. Unigraphics automatically creates expressions when: D D D a feature is created. statement.Expressions Expressions Expressions are algebraic or arithmetic statements used to control the characteristics of a part. NOTE: The total number of characters allowed for the name.5 ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Name Statement Value Length is the name of the expression and represents the value 1. Expressions define the dimensions and relationships of a model. Expression names are alphanumeric strings of text that begin with a letter. Example of an Expression Length=. a feature or sketch is positioned. Understanding Expressions All expressions have a name.5+2*cos(60) 1. The name is the portion of the expression on the left side of the equal sign. a sketch is dimensioned. The statement is the portion displayed on the right side of the equal sign.5.

choose Tools→Expression.Expressions Creating and Editing Expressions To work with expressions. The Name Filter Name Creation order Reverse creation Expression List Expressions editor and calculator Used By ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Saving changes to the expressions EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 4-3 .

modify the statement (right side of the equal sign).00). and selecting the feature(s) in question. By choosing Information→Feature. Choose Apply or OK to save the expression. The expression is then added to the Expression List.Expressions Creating Expressions There are three methods to create expressions: D D D System generated expressions (p#).60. In the expression editor field. a listing window will show information about the selected feature(s). Press the <Enter> key. user created expressions (Thk=0. User defined expressions created during text input (Rad=5. a new expression will be created. D D ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Using Information→Feature Many times there is a need to determine what expressions control what features in the model. 4-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Press the <Enter> key. Click in the expression editor field and key in the entire expression (for example: rad=1. Choose Apply or OK to save the expression. Thk used as a text entry in a parameter field). It is displayed in the expression editor field. Procedure: D D D Editing Expressions Procedure: D D Choose the expression to modify from the expression list. Predefined. Used by The Used by option provides a means of finding out if an expression is referenced in another expression and what feature(s) use the expression. select the expression and then choose the Used by icon. To use this option.5). If the name (left side of the equal sign) is modified. choose Tools→Expression.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 4-5 . Step 3 Delete the Block. - Choose the Tools→Expression option.Expressions Activity 1 . Start the Modeling application. Notice the p0. These are default expression names given to the block. p1. ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Select the block in the graphic window and choose OK. The same block will then be created with the same dimensional values. However. Step 2 Examine the Expressions for the Block created in the previous activity.Getting Familiar with Expressions This activity will demonstrate how expressions were created when the block was created in the previous activity. this time logical names for the expressions will be used. and p2 expressions. Step 1 Open the part file pau_prim_exp_1 and save as ***_prim_exp_1. Choose the Delete icon from the Standard toolbar. The Edit Expression dialog box shown above lists all of the expressions in the part file.

These expressions were created during the creation of the block. Key in the following expressions: Length (XC) = Length (YC) = Length (ZC) = Length=8 (Tab) Width=6 (Tab) Height=6/2 - Choose OK. Step 5 Examine the Expressions for the newly created Block. ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 4-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose the Tools→Expression option. The display on the Edit Expression dialog box should be similar to the one shown below. and Width. Notice the expressions Height. - Choose the Block icon. Length.Expressions Step 4 Create a new Block. - Choose Origin. Edge Lengths.

Select the Height expression from the Expressions window. The expression is displayed in the expression text editor field. This relationship could not be established upon creation as the Width expression was not in existence. - Close the Information window. Notice that the Height is tied to the numeric value 6/2.Expressions Step 6 Find information about the newly created Block. The true intent is that the Height grows proportionally with the Width. ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 4-7 . This is not the true intent of the design. at the bottom of the The graphic shows the listing window with the information about the feature selected. Step 7 Change the expression. - Choose the Information→Expression→List All option or select the Information icon Expressions dialog window.

Any time that the Width changes the value will change accordingly. replace it with 4 and press Enter.Expressions - Place the cursor in the text editor field just to the right of the numeral 6 in the 6/2 expression field. Backspace once to delete the numeral 6. - Select the Width expression. Text Editor Field - Backspace once to delete the numeral 6 and replace it with Width and press Enter. ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 8 Change the Width value. 4-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The value for the expression Height is now changed to Width/2.

ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 4-9 . Step 9 Save and Close the part.Expressions - Choose OK.

Retrieved information through Information→Expression. ÏÏÏ 4 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 4-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and a value. In this lesson you: D D D Created Expressions. a statement.Expressions SUMMARY Expressions are algebraic or arithmetic statements used to control the characteristics of a part. Expressions define the dimensions and relationships of a model. All expressions have a name. a sketch is dimensioned. a feature or sketch is positioned. Edited Expressions. Expressions are created when: a feature is created.

Face Operations Face Operations Lesson 5 PURPOSE To introduce the Hollow face operation. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. you will be able to: D Hollow a solid body. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 5-1 .

The Face Operations are Taper. Hollow. and Offset Face .Face Operations Face Operations Face Operations are available to provide additional definition to the faces of a model. In this lesson. the Hollow operation will be discussed. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

The entire solid body is hollowed during this operation. Face to be pierced Thickness Before After Wall Thickness Value Positive or negative values may be used as follows: D Positive values will hollow the existing solid so that the wall thickness is measured inward from the original faces of the solid. In the figure below. Negative values for the wall thickness will result in a hollow that forms a shell of the specified value around the original solid. based upon a specified thickness. the top face has been selected as the face to be pierced.Face Operations Hollow The Hollow operation creates a cavity inside. or a shell around an existing solid. D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 5-3 .

any changes in the region are automatically reflected in the hollow. Since a region of the body is pierced rather than individual faces. The "Region" button may be selected to quickly select a region of faces to be pierced. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-4 A unique thickness may be assigned for each face with the Offset Face option. Using variable thickness hollows reduces the number of features in the part. When Offset Face is selected the Alternate Thickness text box becomes active. The "Body" button may be selected to create a void region in a body without piercing any faces.Face Operations Choosing Insert"Feature Operation"Hollow from the main menu will display the following dialog box for hollow creation. as the offset features are not required. and results in more compact models that are easier to comprehend. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Region Face Body Pierced face Type Filter Offset face Default Thickness Alternate Thickness A hollow may be created in three different ways: D D D The "Face" button may be chosen to select pierced faces individually.

Right Step 2 Inspect the Part.Performing a Hollow Operation In this activity the Hollow operation will be used to take material away from the model of a plastic molded part. Step 1 Open the Part File. The figure below illustrates the solid that will be hollowed. - Set the display mode back to Wireframe the view (third mouse button).Face Operations Activity 1 . and start the Modeling application. and Restore ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 5-5 . Step 3 Hollow the solid and pierce the proper faces. - Open the part file pau_hair_dryer_1. - Set the Display Mode to Shaded and Rotate the part to verify that the solid requires hollowing.

from the Feature Operation - Enter a Default Thickness of 2.Face Operations - Choose the Hollow icon toolbar. After both of the desired faces are selected to be pierced. choose OK twice. Select the right. The finished part is shown below. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-6 Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts. - Set the Display Mode to Shaded and Rotate the part (third mouse button). and back side faces to pierce. Back side face Right face Step 4 Inspect the Part.

12. and bottom. Choose the Hollow icon.Face Operations Activity 2 . - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 5-7 . and start the Modeling application. Enter a Default Thickness of .Hollow and Selection Practice In this activity the Hollow operation will be used to create a sheet metal part. - Open the part file pau_hollow_1. back. Step 1 Open the Part File. right. Select the 5 following faces to pierce: front. left. Front Step 2 Create a hollow feature. The figure below illustrates the solid that will be hollowed.

Face Operations - After all the desired faces are selected to be pierced. choose OK twice. Step 3 Choose File"Close"All Parts. Repeat the operation with a thickness of -. The finished part is shown below. - Choose Edit→Undo List→Hollow.12 and examine the result. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Key in an Alternate Thickness of 8. Enter a Default Thickness of 4. Step 1 Open the Part File. - Open the part file pau_hollow_2. - Choose the Offset Face icon. Select the 3 faces that are NOT shaded. - Choose the Hollow icon. Step 2 Hollow the solid. and start the Modeling application.Creating a Hollow Feature with an Offset This simple activity will demonstrate the application of a hollow feature with an offset face.Face Operations Activity 3 . Select the faces to pierce as shown below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-9 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual .

Select this face to offset. Step 3 Close the part. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Face Operations - Select the face to offset as shown below. do not save. - Choose OK.

Created a Hollow Feature. based upon a specified thickness. In this lesson you: D D D D D Specified a Default Thickness. Specified Faces to be Offset.Face Operations SUMMARY The Hollow operation creates a cavity inside. Specified Faces to be Pierced. In addition. or a shell around an existing solid. selected faces may be assigned various offset thickness. Specified a Alternate Thickness. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 5-11 .

Face Operations (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 5-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Edge Operations Edge Operations Lesson 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ PURPOSE To introduce Blend and Chamfer edge operations. you will be able to: D D Create Blends. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 6-1 . Create Chamfers.

Edge Operations

ÏÏÏ Edge Operations ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ Operations are available to provide additional definition to the edges of a ÏÏÏ Edge model. The Edge Operations are Edge Blend and Chamfer.

6-2

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations

Edge Blend
This option creates cylindrical or conical faces in place of an edge on a solid body. The system adds or subtracts material depending on the topology of the solid body and shortens the faces intersecting at the edge selected.
Blend radius

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Selected edge

Blend radius

Shortened faces

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-3

Edge Operations

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Edge Blends Using Dynamic Input Field
With the cursor selection set to General Objects, an edge may be blended by first selecting the edge(s) in the graphics window, then the third mouse button is used to access a pop-up menu. From this menu, the Blend operation is chosen and a Radius value may be input directly on the graphics screen. The edge blend is automatically created as a preview.

When you achieve the desired radius value, choose the checkmark in the upper left corner of the graphics screen.

6-4

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations

You can also access the full Blend Dialog by choosing the Blend Dialog icon at the upper left corner of the graphics screen. By choosing the Blend Dialog, you may make changes to the Blend default settings.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-5

Edge Operations

ÏÏÏ Activity 1 - Creating Edge Blends with Dynamic Input Fields ÏÏÏ In this activity you will create Edge Blends using the MB3 pop-up menu and 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ onĆscreen Dynamic Input Fields.
Step 1 Open the part pau_edge_blend_1 and choose the Modeling application. You will create Edge Blends using the new functionality.

Step 2 Create the first Edge Blend. Ensure the Select General Objects icon Selection toolbar. is ON in the

-

-

Choose the edge shown above, click MB3 and choose the Blend option.

6-6

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations -

Highlight the Dynamic Input Field and enter .75. Watch the previewed radius to make sure it looks as desired.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

.75

-

Choose the Checkmark at the upper left corner of the graphics window to apply the radius.

Step 3 Create the second Edge Blend.
-

Choose the edge shown below , click MB3 and choose the Blend option.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-7

Edge Operations

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

-

Highlight the Dynamic Input Field and enter .5 . Watch the previewed radius to make sure it looks as desired.

Notice that the tangent edges were automatically selected. That is because the Add Tangent Edges toggle is on in the Blend dialog.

.5

If you chose OK at this point, only part of the edge would be blended. Instead you would like to blend the entire left side of the part. To do this, you must manually select the additional edges. Note: At this point, if you wanted to make changes to the Edge Blend default settings, you could choose the Blend Dialog icon from the upper left corner of the graphics screen and make the desired changes.

6-8

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations -

Select the two additional edges at the left side of the part. If Enable Blend Preview is toggled ON in the dialog, you will see a preview of each blend as the edge is selected. If Blend Preview does not display, you can choose the Blend Dialog icon in the upper left corner of the graphics screen and toggle Enable Blend Preview ON.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

-

Choose the Checkmark icon

to apply the blends.

Step 4 Close the part without saving.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-9

Edge Operations

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Chamfer
This option bevels the edges of a solid body by defining the desired chamfer dimensions. There are five methods of creating a chamfer:
D D D D D

Single Offset Double Offset Offset Angle Freeform Single Offset (Outside scope of class) Freeform Double Offset (Outside scope of class)

The system adds or subtracts material depending on the topology of the solid body and shortens the faces intersecting at the edge selected. Outside Chamfer Inside Chamfer

Shortened faces Selected edge Selected edge

Chamfer Shortened faces

Chamfer

Removes Material

Adds material

6-10

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations

Single Offset
This option allows a chamfer to be placed with an offset that is the same along both faces, as shown in the figure below (offset 1 and offset 2 have the same value). This value must be a positive value.
Selected edge Offset 1

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Face 2 Offset 2

Face 1

The single offset shown below is measured along the path of the curved face and is not necessarily a linear distance.
Offset

Selected edge

Face 2

Chamfer Face 1

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-11

Edge Operations

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Double Offset
This option allows different offsets to be placed along the faces. Both of the offset values must be positive and applied as shown below.
Second offset Face 1 First offset

Selected edge

Chamfer

Face 2

Offset Angle
This option allows an offset value and the chamfer angle to be entered. Note that the chamfer angle is measured from the second face selected. NOTE: The option of flipping the chamfer is available if the display is not what is desired.

Angle

Selected edge

Face 1 Offset Chamfer

Face 2

6-12

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations

Activity 2 - Performing a Chamfer Operation
In this activity, a chamfer will be placed on different edges of the model. Step 1 Open the part file.
-

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Open pau_chamfer_1 and make sure you're in the Modeling application.

Step 2 Create a chamfer using offset and angle.

-

Choose the Chamfer icon. Choose Offset Angle option. Select Edge 1 as shown below.

Edge 1

-

Choose OK. Key in the following parameters: Offset = 1.75 Angle = 30

-

Choose OK.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-13

Edge Operations

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

The model should appear as shown below.

Edge 2

Step 3 Create a double offset chamfer.
-

Choose the Double Offset option. Select Edge 2 as shown above. Choose OK. Key in the following parameters: First Offset = .25

Second Offset = .5
-

Choose OK and note the option to Flip Last Chamfer.

Step 4 Choose File"Close"All Parts.

6-14

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Edge Operations

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ
SUMMARY The Edge Blend and Chamfer Operations are available to provide additional definition to the edges of a model. In this lesson you:
D D D D D

Blended different edges. Chamfered edges using Offset Angle Chamfered edges using Double Offset. Became aware of the Flip Last Chamfer option. Became aware that all blended edges or chamfered edges created in a single operation are considered one feature.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

6-15

Edge Operations ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 6 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 6-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Playback the model construction. Retrieve Expression Information. Querying a part file is useful in that a user may gain an understanding of the part's design intent and how the part was created. Measure the distance between objects. Retrieve Feature Information. Suppress & Unsuppress Features. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-1 .Model Construction Query Model Construction Query Lesson 7 PURPOSE To demonstrate different methods available to query a part file. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. you will be able to: D D D D D D D D ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Retrieve Layer Information. Identify where expressions are used. Open and close the Model Navigator.

Category Names: Unigraphics offers the ability to name layers or groups of layers using Categories. The model may be rotated by using the middle mouse button or the Rotate icon in the View toolbar. this may be done with the model shaded or displayed as wireframe. These display modes may also be controlled using the View toolbar. Layers with Objects. Layer Listing: There is a filtering option menu at the bottom of the dialog box that allows the Layer/Status listing window to display All Objects. or All Selectable Layers.Model Construction Query Visually Inspect the Part Visual inspection of the solid model may be accomplished by rotating the model to view the different features. D D 7-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Refresh Fit Zoom Zoom Rotate In/Out Pan Wireframe Settings Shaded Settings Wireframe View Orientation Inspect the Layers Layers are used to organize a part file. At times this is very beneficial in order to see clearly what is displayed on the screen. The Category Names are listed in the Category listing window on the Layer Settings dialog box as well as in the Layer/Status listing window next to assigned layers when Show Category Names is enabled. Things to look for: D Object Count: Enabling Show Object Count using the checkbox will change the display in the Layer/Status listing window to a Layer/Status/Count listing window that shows the number of objects contained on each layer. They work like invisible containers to house the different objects used to create a Unigraphics solid model. Depending upon the graphics driver being used.

ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ UNIX: Icon from Navigator toolbar Windows : Icon from Resource Bar EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-3 . The Model Navigator also allows various editing functions to be performed from a central location. Holding down the third mouse button causes a feature specific popĆup menu to be displayed offering pertinent editing options. When a check is displayed in the box.Model Construction Query Model Navigator The Model Navigator may be used to identify the different features of the model. by default. Conversely. Both. To access the Model Navigator in UNIX use the Navigator toolbar and to access the Model Navigator in Windows use the Resource bar. Selecting a feature from the Model Navigator window will highlight the selected feature in the graphics area and will also highlight the parent and/or child features of the selected feature in different colors. selecting a feature from the graphics area will highlight the selected feature and its parents/children in the Model Navigator window. the feature is displayed in the graphics area. The Model Navigator allows the display of features to be temporarily removed (suppressed) from the graphics screen by selecting the check box associated with the feature name. are located vertically on the right side of the Unigraphics window.

Information→Expression→List All by Reference Information→Expression →List All by Reference allows expressions that reference other expressions to be identified. Playback does allow editing of features during update. TIP When using Information→Feature. the Playback and Suppress/Unsuppress functions (found under Edit→Feature from the Menu Bar or in the Edit Feature toolbar) will allow the user to reconstruct the model and watch the progress graphically. Information→Expression→List All Examining the expressions may reveal associativity that is built between features or the expressions associated to them. 7-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . where Suppress/Unsuppress does not. Playback & Suppress/Unsuppress In regards to investigating how a model was created.Model Construction Query Information The Information pull down from the main menu offers a number of options for obtaining information about the model. Some of the most useful menu options when trying to interrogate a model are listed below with a brief description of what they do. The feature will then be highlighted in the Feature Browser window. as well as identifying to what features these expressions belong. the feature may also be selected in the graphics window. However. users will have to weigh the invested time vs. the amount of information that can be learned to determine if it is an acceptable practice for a particular model. In addition. On very large models. expressions that control the feature may be displayed in the graphic screen by toggling Display Dimensions on. The main differences between these two methods is that Playback does not suppress reference features or sketches. Information→Feature ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Information→Feature may be used to identify Parent/Child relationships between the selected feature and the other features in the model. The Edit→Find option within the Information Window allows easy navigation through the listing. Choose OK or Apply to bring up the Information window which will display the relative expressions.

To use: D D Choose Tools→Expressions Select the expression.Model Construction Query Expression Used by option Features may be identified that have an association to a particular expression by using the Used by" option found in the Expressions dialog window. D An Information window pops up identifying the features that are using the selected expression. Choose the Used by icon. ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Identified feature Used by EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-5 .

YC plane. Once the Information window has displayed the results. planes. You can change the units of measure in the Information window using Analysis→Units. You can continue verifying distances between one of the selected objects and any other object as long as you specify the new unselected object first. 7-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and then choosing OK. curves. The system calculates the three-dimensional distance and the two-dimensional distance relative to the XC. edges. bodies. The graphics window will indicate the distance measured by a temporary line. you can verify the distance between one of the selected objects and a new object. The new distance is then displayed in the Information window. and/or faces. In addition.Model Construction Query Analysis Distance The Analysis→Distance function obtains the minimum distance between any two Unigraphics objects such as points. Just select a new first object. and then select one of the previously selected objects. it returns the closest point on each object and the delta distances in absolute and work coordinate systems. ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ All data in the Information window is converted to the current units.

as shown below. you want to specify the minimum distance between point A and a certain area of spline B. the system may indicate the minimum distance here. the system knows which minimum distance you are looking for. Use Start Point toggles from No to Yes. ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ In this case. For example. if there exists more than one pair of points that are normal to both objects. which allows you to select the desired start point for the curve or face.Model Construction Query Start Points In cases where multiple closest points exist. When you set the toggle to Yes and select a curve or face. Use this option to distinguish between multiple points on an object when the selection of more than one is possible. the system displays the Point Subfunction menu. Use Start Point lets you indicate a start point for a selected curve or face object. Point A But if you specify a start point as shown. If no start point is specified. you may wish to specify a point to indicate the region of the selected object in which you'd like the system to calculate the distance. the system may not produce the desired results unless you indicate a start point to use. Spline B : Specified start point EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-7 .

Viewing the layers may help gain an understanding of how complex a model may be. If there is only 1 object on a solids layer and just a few objects on a curves layer. As the part is rotated. Inspect the model. the model may be a simple extrusion. ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Step 2 Visually Inspect the Model. Although detailed instructions are supplied. 7-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . it may be beneficial to attempt to navigate through the interface without using them. try to identify different features and the possible methods used to create them. Rotate the model (MB2). Step 1 Open pau_arm_1 and start the Modeling application.Model Construction Query Activity 1 . - Choose the Shaded icon.Model Construction Query This activity deals with identifying different feature relationships and design intent. Step 3 Inspect the Layers. - Rotate the model (hold down MB2 and drag in graphics window). (View toolbar) Orient the view back to trimetric using the Trimetric icon in the View toolbar.

and 61 selectable so that the construction aids may be seen. if required to better view - ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ - Make layers 1. 21. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-9 . (Utility toolbar) Toggle ON the Show Category Names options. Either option should be located vertically on the Right side of the graphics window. 8 objects on a Sketches layer and 3 objects on a Datums layer. Notice that there is 1 object on a Solids layer. Step 4 Identify the Different Features using the Model Navigator. - - Choose the Fit icon in the View toolbar. - Choose the Model Navigator icon from the Navigator toolbar (UNIX) or from the Resource Bar (Windows) and size as required. Choose OK in the Layer Settings dialog box. Review the listing for category names and object count.Model Construction Query - Choose the Layer Settings icon. Choose the Wireframe icon interior features (View toolbar).

The corresponding feature will be highlighted in the graphic window as well as the parent (pau_arm_1) and its children (S21_SKETCH(3)). from the Edit Feature Playback 7-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Step 5 Review the model construction using Playback. Continue through all features to see which is which.Model Construction Query - Windows ONLY: Choose the tack icon in the upper left hand corner to permanently display the Model Navigator. Starting at the top of the Model Navigator feature list. - Choose the Feature Playback icon Feature toolbar. select the first feature with MB1. This will also adjust the graphics window to fit the part within the viewing area.

- Continue to Step through until the model has been completely updated. The next feature. this is the base feature of the model. FIXED_DATUM_AXIS(1). is updated.Model Construction Query All of the solid features are suppressed except the reference features and the sketch. is updated. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-11 . The Edit during Update dialog box informs you that the FIXED_DATUM_PLANE(0) feature has been updated. FIXED_DATUM_AXIS(2). ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ - Choose the Step icon. The next feature . You may have to move the slider to read the entire message displayed in the Edit during Update dialog box. - Choose the Step icon again.

- Suppress the two Fixed Datum Axis by selecting the checkboxes to remove the checkmark. 7-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Click MB3 here Notice that all of the features in the list. except for two fixed datum axes. - Starting at the top of the Model Navigator feature list. This is due to all of the other features in the model sharing some sort of associativity with these reference features. The Quick Look option shows the parent/child relationships in a tree structure format. become suppressed. Before unsuppressing the features we will change the listing method back to Timestamp Order. select the checkbox in front of the first feature with MB1 to suppress the feature. ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Note that all of the features in the list. - Place the cursor over the Feature Name header in the Model Navigator. branch out under the first feature in the list. select MB3 and choose the Quick Look option from the drop-down list. This will give us a true creation order listing and will show what features where created from first to last. To get a better idea about direct associativity to features we will change the listing method of the Model Navigator.Model Construction Query Step 6 Review the model construction using Suppress/Unsuppress. except for the two fixed datum axis.

125 and . by selecting on each of the empty checkboxes with MB1. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-13 . these expressions control the start and end distances from the generator geometry for the extrusion. Step 8 Identify the Expression that Controls the Distance from the Large Hole Center to the Small Hole Center.125 produce a web thickness of . select MB3 and choose the Timestamp Order option from the drop-down list.25. - ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ In the Model Navigator. place the cursor on WEB_EXTRUSION(4).Model Construction Query - Place the cursor over the Feature Name header in the Model Navigator. Continue down the list and unsuppress the remaining features. Note that the Parent of this feature is the sketch S21:SKETCH (3). Starting at the top of the Model Navigator feature list. - The expressions p8 and p9 are identified as limits 1 and 2. Since the web feature was generated from the sketch geometry. The values of -. - Close the Information window. Step 7 Find the values that control the Thickness of the Web Extrusion. one at a time. select the empty" checkbox in front of the first feature with MB1 to unsuppress the feature. the obvious place to look for the expression that controls the hole to hole distance is in the sketch. Scroll through the Information window to see the various parameters and controlling expressions. press MB3 and select Information. - - TIP You can also use the Shift and CTRL keys to select multiple features from the Model Navigator and then use MB3 one any of the selected features to Suppress/Unsuppress them together.

which can take more time when trying to identify a specific feature. 7-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose Cancel in the Edit Sketch Dimensions dialog box. Orient the view to the Front using the View toolbar. place the cursor on S21:SKETCH(3). arm_length=8. To find the answer to this question. Step 9 Close the Model Navigator. Click here and select the Front icon - ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ The expression in question can clearly be identified. Step 10 Determine how the Large Hole Feature is located. Choose the Model Navigator icon again (UNIX) to - close the Model Navigator or select the tack icon again (Windows) and drag the cursor off the Model Navigator to collapse it. you will select a feature directly from the graphics screen rather than from a list.5 - Orient the view back to the Trimetric using the View toolbar.Model Construction Query - In the Model Navigator. press MB3 and select Edit Parameters.

- The information window pops up. It can be seen that p17 is a parallel positioning dimension with a value of 0 (zero). - Cancel the Edit Positioning dialog box. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-15 . - ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Close the Information window. - Choose the Used by icon. Step 11 Identify where an expression is used. You can zoom. small_dia=1.25. Select the expression. This finding can be further confirmed by the following actions. rotate the part. - Choose Tools→Expression. The p17 expression appears at the arc center of the extrusion and hole. Select the Large Thru Hole feature in the graphic window and accept it if necessary. from the Edit - Select LARGE_THRU_HOLE(7) and choose MB2.Model Construction Query - Choose Information→Feature. - Choose the Edit Positioning icon Feature toolbar. If you don't see the expression. Choose MB2. The logical assumption can be made that the hole is located Point to Point relative to the Large Knuckle extrusion. The information window appears and the expression is identified as one used on an object A2 in the S21:SKETCH(3) feature. pan or rotate the part to get a better look at the feature.

make layer 21 the work 7-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Model Construction Query - Close the Information window and cancel the Expression dialog box. Select S21:SKETCH(3). The arc is highlighted in the graphic window. Choose the Object Dependency Browser button. notice that A2 is present. Step 12 Measure a distance. Choose Information→Feature. ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ - Select ArcĆA2. . The expression's associated feature and object has now been identified. - Using the Layer Settings icon layer and all other layers invisible. - The child objects of the sketch are listed. - Cancel the Object Dependency Browser dialog box.

The Information window appears and the 3ĆD and 2ĆD distances should report a value of 10.625. - Choose the Quadrant Point icon. Select the arc here. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 7-17 . ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Select the arc here. Step 13 Choose File"Close"All Parts. Select the arc as shown below. Choose the Point Constructor button.Model Construction Query - Choose Analysis"Distance. The Quadrant Point is still selected. - Choose the Point Constructor button again. - Select the other arc as shown below.

Identified Expressions. 7-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Identified where an expression was used. In this lesson.Model Construction Query SUMMARY ÉÉÉ 7 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ In this lesson you were instructed on how to query a model to determine creation method and design intent. you: D D D D D D Opened the Model Navigator. These skills are important because of the need to review part files that have been created by other users. Reviewed the model construction using Suppress & Unsuppress. Measured a distance. Reviewed the model construction using Playback.

you will be able to: D D D D Activate the Assemblies application. Add Components to an assembly.Introduction to Assemblies Introduction to Assemblies Lesson 8 PURPOSE To introduce the Unigraphics Assembly Modeling application. Set your Load Options. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-1 . Reposition Components in an assembly. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson.

It is a collection of pointers to piece parts and/or subĆassemblies. 8-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The figure below shows the subĆassembly of the Integrated Circuit board for the toy laser gun. In the figure below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ SubĆAssembly A subĆassembly is an assembly used as a component within a higher level assembly. A subĆassembly has components of its own.Introduction to Assemblies Definitions and Descriptions Assembly An assembly is a part file which contains component objects. the toy laser gun is an assembly consisting of many components.

A component object can also be a subĆassembly made up of other component parts and/or component objects. Shown below are component objects of the sub-assembly. Component Object Component Objects ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-3 . Every piece of the Integrated Circuit board is a separate component object.Introduction to Assemblies Component Objects A component object is the entity that contains the pointer that links the assembly back to the master component part.

Top level assembly component piece part component piece part ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ SubĆassembly This is a component part of the top level assembly. by the assembly. The term piece part is used to refer to master geometry as it exists outside of an assembly. component piece part component piece part component piece part Component parts of the subĆassembly 8-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Introduction to Assemblies Component Parts A component part is a part file pointed to by a component object within an assembly. The actual geometry is stored in the component part and is referenced. not copied.

For example. D D TopĆDown Modeling BottomĆUp Modeling (Demonstrated in this manual) TopĆDown Modeling As the name suggests.e. All new geometry that is created is added to the work part. If a component exists several times in the assembly (i. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-5 . creating subĆassemblies and components. Combining Both Approaches It may be more practical for the methods to be combined.Introduction to Assemblies General Assembly Concepts There are two basic ways to define an assembly model. Component parts and subĆassemblies are created as the process moves up the assembly level hierarchy. new subassemblies and piece parts may be defined in a top down mode as the design progresses. purchased or existing hardware for the assembly may be added using the bottomĆup method. a fastener). ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Designing in Context The ability to make a component of an assembly the work part while leaving the assembly itself as the displayed part allows the assembly to be designed in context. any change to the component while it is the work part will affect all the other occurrences as well. Edits can be made to the features and expressions residing within the work part. an assembly is created at the top level hierarchy and parts are filed down the hierarchy. and finally existing fasteners may be added in a bottom up mode from a standard parts library. BottomĆUp Modeling A BottomĆUp assembly modeling approach starts by identifying the lowest level piece parts that will make up the assembly.

If hole features are added to the solid in a component part they will be seen in all occurrences of the components in the assembly when it is opened. the pin is created in a separate part file outside the assembly. Then. the pin is added to the assembly as a component.Introduction to Assemblies Bottom Up Design In the BottomĆUp approach. This approach applies to purchased parts or existing parts. First.prt ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ All assemblies are automatically updated. 8-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . component parts are designed separate from the assembly and later added to the assembly. when opened. to reflect changes made to the component parts. locator_pin.

The Load Options dialog box is accessed by choosing File→Options→Load Options. the system must find and load any component parts that are referenced by that assembly.Introduction to Assemblies Introduction to Load Options When an assembly part file is opened using File→Open. Load Options establish how and from where the system loads the component parts. Where to look for component parts Which components will be loaded Controls whether components are fully or partially loaded Controls what to do if a component is not found ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-7 .

partially loaded. All components can be fully loaded by changing the Load Components option to All Components and toggling Use Partial Loading to off before opening the assembly. The Search Directories method looks for each component in directories specified in a userĆdefined list. These are referred to as load states. Components will be partially loaded if Partial Loading is toggled on when the assembly is opened.Introduction to Assemblies Load Method The Load Method determines where the system will search for the component parts when an assembly is opened. Partially Loaded When a part is partially loaded. or unloaded when an assembly is opened. the system pulls only the data required to display the part into memory. D The As Saved method looks for each component part in the same directory it was in when the assembly was last saved. There are three possible settings. D D Load States The Load Options also controls whether component parts will be fully loaded. This is beneficial when working with large assemblies. The From Directory method looks for each component in the same directory as the assembly part. Partially loading components reduces the memory requirements and improves performance. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Fully Loaded A part is fully loaded if all of its data is loaded into system memory. 8-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

This will drastically reduce the amount of memory required and improve system performance but no component geometry will be seen. the system will not load any parts unless all of the components are found. the system will open the assembly and load any of the components that it can find. Those components that are not found will be listed in an Open Warning window and left unloaded. D When toggled On. Individual components or subassemblies may be opened as desired to work on them using File→Open. When toggled Off. The first component it is unable to find will be listed in an Open Error window.Introduction to Assemblies Unloaded A component part is unloaded if it is not loaded when the assembly is opened. D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-9 . Load Failure The Abort Load on Failure option controls how the system behaves if a component part is not found based on the current load method. Component parts may be refrained from loading by changing the Load Components option to No Components before opening the assembly.

Introduction to Assemblies Component Editing A component part may be added to an assembly by choosing the Add Existing Component icon from the Assemblies toolbar or the Add Existing button in the Components PullĆDown menu under Assemblies. Turn ON the Assemblies application to access the Assemblies toolbar or the Components PullĆDown menu. 1 3 4 5 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 2 or 1 2 8-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . This toolbar/menu contains most of the functions that affect the hierarchical structure of the assembly and the relationships between components. The Assemblies toolbar and the Components PullĆDown menu will be available as long as the Assemblies application is turned ON.

Select an existing component in the Assembly Navigator display. Enter the name of a previously loaded part. Select a previously loaded part from the list. Select an existing component in the graphics window. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-11 . There are several ways to identify the part in this dialog box: D D D D D Select the Choose Part File button to retrieve an unopened part.Introduction to Assemblies The component part to add is specified in the Select Part dialog box.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Reference Set Ć Allows you to control the amount of data that is loaded from each component and viewed in the context of an assembly. Empty and Entire Part. the Add Existing Part dialog box appears so that it may be established how the existing part will be added as a component object to the assembly and what information is stored with it. Assemblies_ModelReferenceSet: BODY Layer Options .Places all objects from the component on the layer specified in the Specified Layer entry field. As Specified . the only change from defaults will be the placement of the part on the Original layers.Places all objects from the component part on the current work layer. Reference sets may be manually created or automatically created. Original . NOTE: In order for a BODY" reference set to be created automatically the following line must be set in the ug_english. D D Default reference sets are.def and ug_mectric. D D D Work .Introduction to Assemblies After the part is identified.Places each object from the component part on the same layer in which it resides in the component part file. At this time. 8-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .def environment files.Defines which layer the objects in the new component will be added to in the current work part.

The part file. that is currently displayed in the graphics window.Introduction to Assemblies The Displayed Part Unigraphics allows multiple part files to be open at the same time either implicitly as a result of being referenced by a loaded assembly or explicitly through the use of File→Open. The Displayed Part can be changed by: D D D D Using the Selection toolbar and the Select Components option. which contains up to the last ten loaded parts for selection to be the displayed part. the Type Filter may be used to narrow the band of selectable objects. is called the Displayed Part. This method of editing uses an Object/Action approach. where the object needing editing is selected first from the graphic window and then the necessary action is defined. Components EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-13 . (this will not be covered in this manual) Selection Toolbar The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of a component for modification or the extraction of data is required. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select Components Depending on which category the user has selected. This lesson will focus on the use of the Select Components option. Choosing Window→More Parts (Change Displayed Part dialog box) Choosing the Window Loaded Part List. whether it be an assembly or component. Using the Assembly Navigator pop-up menu.

NOTE: When depressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the selected object for the pop-up dialog to appear. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Introduction to Assemblies The remaining options of the toolbar may be used to further discriminate in the selection of objects. mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object. Reset All icons not shown Select All Deselect All Up One Level Once an object has been selected from the graphic window.

Entering the name in the Part Name entry field. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-15 . Selecting geometry from the graphics area (if the current displayed part is an assembly). a part may be selected by: D D D Choosing it from the list of loaded parts. listing all loaded parts except the one currently displayed. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ When this dialog box is active.Introduction to Assemblies Window Choosing Window→More Parts will activate the Change Displayed Part dialog box.

Choosing the Make Work Part icon on the Assemblies tool bar.Introduction to Assemblies The Work Part The part in which geometry is created and edited is termed the Work Part. In a case where the displayed part is not the work part. the component's reference set is changed to Entire Part. (not covered in this manual). D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D Choosing Assemblies→Context Control→Set Work Part. the work part will be displayed in color and the other component parts will be deĆemphasized. The displayed part and the work part do not need to be the same. Selection Toolbar Select Components Once an object has been selected from the graphic window. NOTE: When a component is made the work part. mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object. the reference set is returned to its original condition. When a part file is opened. Using the Assembly Navigator popĆup menu. When the component is no longer the work part. it will initially be both the displayed and the work part. The Work Part can be changed by: D Using the Selection toolbar and the Select Components option. 8-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The Work Part may be the displayed part or any component part which is contained in the displayed assembly part.

Introduction to Assemblies NOTE: When depressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the selected object for the pop-up dialog to appear. Make Work Part icon Choosing the Make Work Part icon dialog box. will activate the Set Work Part ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-17 .

Selecting geometry from the graphics screen. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . a part may be identified by: D D D Choosing it from the list of loaded parts. the Assemblies application must first be turned ON. The Reposition Components dialog can be accessed by: D D Choosing Reposition Component icon on the Assemblies tool bar. Entering the part name in the Part Name entry field. Choosing Assemblies→Components→Reposition Component. This makes the displayed part and the work part the same. Repositioning Components To access the Reposition Components dialog.Introduction to Assemblies When this dialog is active. Choosing the Displayed Part button changes the work part back to the whole assembly.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-19 .Introduction to Assemblies After Reposition Component is chosen and a component object is selected the repositioning dialog appears and a dynamic repositioning coordinate system appears in the graphic window. Rotate About A Line Rotate About A Point Rotate Between Two Axes Translate Point to Point Reposition Rotation Handle Vertex Handle Axis Handle ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Dynamic Repositioning Coordinate System Component objects may be repositioned by using the six options at the top of the dialog window or interactively dragged using the dynamic coordinate system.

rotate the part using your spaceball or MB3 Rotate (F7). The Snap Increment option may be toggled off and on as desired. If one of the coordinate system's axis or rotation handles is currently selected. it may be dragged left or right and up or down. 8-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The Snap Increment value acts as a detent. it may be dragged along an axis of the coordinate system by selecting on one of the axis handles.Introduction to Assemblies Dragging Components Objects Component objects may be dragged three different ways: D D D LeftĆRight UpĆDown Along an Axis of the coordinate system Rotated about an axis of the coordinate system. Axis Handle Distance field Snap Increment field Snap Increment toggle Keying in a positive or negative value in the distance text field and pressing return will cause the object to be moved that distance value along the selected axis. In addition the Distance and Snap Increment text fields become active. exit the rotation mode and continue to drag the object. while the object is selected. you must first select the vertex handle to deselect the other handles. LeftĆRight UpĆDown After the component object has been selected. To move the component in the third dimension. simply by placing the cursor any where in the graphic window and holding MB1 down. which causes the object to snap to the incremental value as the object is dragged along the axis. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Dragging along an axis of the coordinate system After a component object has been selected.

Rotation Handle Angle field Snap Increment field Snap Increment toggle Keying in a positive or negative value in the angle text field and pressing return will cause the object to be rotated that value about the respective axis. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Point to Point Point to Point allows a component to be translated by indicating a first point and a second point. The Snap Increment value acts as a detent. it may be dragged about an axis of the coordinate system by selecting on one of the rotation handles.Introduction to Assemblies Rotation about an axis of the coordinate system After a component object has been selected. which causes the object to snap to the incremental value as the object is dragged about the axis. Second Point (arc center) First Point (arc center) EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-21 . In addition the Angle and Snap Increment text fields become active. The orientation of the translated component with respect to the second point will be identical to that of the original component with respect to the first point. The Snap Increment option may be toggled off and on as desired.

A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Rotate About a Point This option may be used to rotate components about a vector parallel to the ZC axis and passing through a specified reference point.Introduction to Assemblies Translate Translate provides a means to move a component a delta value with respect to the reposition coordinate system. Component being repositioned Axis of Rotation Reference Point ZC YC XC Angle = 90 degrees ZC YC XC 8-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Translated components maintain the original orientation relative to other parts. as shown below.

To use this method: D D D D Define a point that the vector is to pass through. Key in the desired value of rotation. Choose Apply.Introduction to Assemblies Rotate About a Line This option allows components to be rotated about a defined vector which is not necessarily parallel to the ZC axis. A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise relative to the defined vector. Define the vector using the Vector constructor. Component being repositioned Defined vector ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Axis of Rotation Angle=90 degrees EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-23 .

8-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . D If the work part is a piece part (lowest level component). Higher level assemblies will not be saved even if they were modified. only that part will be saved. The File→Save option allows the saving of the work part without saving all of the parts in the displayed assembly. File"Save All saves all loaded parts in the session that have been modified regardless of the work part designation. any modified component parts below it are also saved. the work part must be saved to keep the modifications.Introduction to Assemblies Saving the Work Part After editing. D TIP ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ TIP Open files for which the user does not have write privilege may not be saved. If the work part is an assembly or subassembly.

- Choose File→Options→Load Options. Step 2 Open the test stand assembly. Save the part as ***_test_assm_1 where *** represent your initials. Ensure Use Partial Loading is turned ON. open the part pau_test_assm_1. Choose OK.Introduction to Assemblies Activity 1 . From the laser_gun subdirectory. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-25 . Choose the Open icon. These components will then be repositioned to the proper locations. Ensure Load Method is set to From Directory.Adding and Repositioning a Component In this activity components will be added to an assembly. The Load Options must be set properly before loading the assembly. Step 1 Set the Load Options. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - - Choose the Modeling icon.

The next step will direct you through the repositioning of the mounting block. 8-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Step 3 Add the test stand to the assembly. Choose the Add Existing Components icon Assemblies toolbar. The test stand is the part that the circuit board fits in for assembly and circuitry testing. Choose Cancel in the Select Part dialog box.Introduction to Assemblies - Choose the Assemblies icon. from the - - - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - - The illustration below shows how the mounting block is to be oriented to the circuit board. Choose Reset and OK. select pau_mounting_block. Fit the view. Choose Choose Part File. From the laser_gun subdirectory. Choose BODY from the Reference Set pull down and choose OK.

- Choose the Reposition Component icon.Introduction to Assemblies Step 4 Reposition the mounting block. Select the mounting block and choose MB2. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-27 . Ensure that Snap Increment is toggled ON. Drag the selected rotation handle with MB1 until the angle text field indicates -90. - Change the Snap Increment to 15. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose the Point to Point icon. Select this rotation handle. Select the rotation handle shown below.

- Choose OK.Introduction to Assemblies - Select the first and second points as directed by the CUE line and shown below. 8-28 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Second point ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ First point The mounting block moves to the new position.

Choose the Add Existing Component icon.Introduction to Assemblies Step 5 Add a new component to the subassembly. - In the graphic window. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose OK to acknowledge the Read Only warning. select the pau_ic_board_13 as shown below and confirm if necessary. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-29 . (Verify the component name in the Status line) Select here - Place the cursor over the component and select MB3. Choose Make Work Part from the Pop-Up menu.

followed by OK to locate the part at Zero. Select the part pau_c2_13 and choose MB2. Press Reset in the Point Constructor dialog box. - - Fit the view. Choose BODY from the Reference Set pull down and choose OK. Change the Positioning method to Reposition.Introduction to Assemblies - Choose Choose Part File. - Choose the Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center icon. - Choose the Point to Point icon. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Newly added component. 8-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

so this step is not necessary. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-31 . Since you do not presently have write access to the subassembly you will perform a saveĆas on it. You already own this part file. In your home directory save the circuit board assembly by keying in ***_ic_board_13 and choose OK. Select this arc center as the Second point Select this arc center as the First point The component moves to the new position. Step 6 Save the subassembly. Choose Cancel. - Choose File→Save As.Introduction to Assemblies - Reposition the component as shown below. It may be necessary to rotate and zoom in on the view so that the proper arc centers are selected (Remember: Holding down MB2 and dragging the cursor on the graphic window rotates the view). The system now prompts you to perform a saveĆas on the top level assembly.

Choose the Make Work Part icon toolbar. A warning message appears. Choose Displayed Part. Choose OK to acknowledge the SaveĆAs Report. 8-32 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Currently the load options are set to look for the component parts in the same directory as the assembly part file. Close the Information window. Choose OK to continue the SaveĆAs. - Choose File→Close→Save All and Close. Choose File→Close→All Parts. from the Assemblies - - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 8 Save and close the assembly. Choose OK. Your assembly file is saved in your home directory while the component parts are stored in the course parts directory. This step will demonstrate the importance of Load Options.Introduction to Assemblies - Choose Cancel. Choose OK to confirm the close. - Choose File→Recently Opened Parts→***_test_assm_1. - Choose OK to accept the warning. Step 9 Reopen the saved assembly. Step 7 Make the Work Part the Displayed Part.

- Choose File→Options→Load Options. - Choose File→Recently Opened Parts→***_test_assm_1.Introduction to Assemblies Step 10 Set the Load Options. Step 12 Choose File"Close"All Parts. This time all of the components are opened. Choose OK. Step 11 Reopen the saved assembly. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 8-33 . Toggle the As Saved option ON.

Assemblies may be created using the TopĆDown. BottomĆUp. Assemblies provides the ability to design in context. or a combination of the two methods. Set your Load Options. It is a collection of pointers to piece parts and/or subĆassemblies. Added and repositioned a component in an assembly. 8-34 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ In this lesson you: D D D Activated the Assemblies application.Introduction to Assemblies SUMMARY An assembly is a part file which contains component objects.

The Master Model The Master Model Lesson 9 PURPOSE To introduce the Master Model concept. you will be able to: D D Review an existing Master Model. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-1 . Create a new Master Model.

Therefore. degree of display. ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Because the application information in the assembly or non-master file is referencing the original master model part. but only read privileges to the model. etc. permissions. origin. The person responsible for the design of a part is not the same person responsible for all of the downstream applications performed on the part. A component object stores information about the piece part such as its location. The Master Model Concept Applying the Master Model Concept in a Drafting situation is simply the creation of an assembly consisting of one component part. The geometry that defines the piece parts of the assembly resides in the original part file only. These downstream applications may include drafting. but the downstream user will not have the ability to change it. edits to the master model will be updated in the non-master part file. The downstream user will have write privileges to the assembly file. The Master Model Concept is also valuable in protecting the design intent of the part from inadvertent corruption by a downstream user. and its relationship to other parts. the entire part creation process becomes more efficient allowing many disciplines to work at the same time and allowing master model edits to be automatically updated in non-master parts. attributes. manufacturing. analysis. 9-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . It is valuable as a means of promoting concurrent engineering. there is no duplication in the assembly file. A link in the assembly file is referred to as a component object. Implementing Master Model theory allows diverse yet dependent design processes to access the same master geometry during development. The solid model is referenced for the application work. orientation.The Master Model The Assembly Modeler The Unigraphics assembly is a file containing stored links to the part files that are pieces of the assembly.

The Master Model The power of implementing a Master Model is that the independent design processes are dependent on the same master geometry during development. Drafting Assembly Master Model Analysis N/C Each application uses a separate assembly file. ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-3 . The design intent of the various design applications can be maintained through protection of the Master Model. the other applications will automatically update with minimal or no associativity loss. When the Master Model is revised.

define machining operations.prt Contains manufacturing data and a component object which references master model part ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ (owned by designer) abcd1234. and designate cutter tools and save this data in their models.The Master Model Master Model Example Manufacturing engineers have the need to design fixture devices. they can then generate their application specific geometry or data in a separate part file which references the master geometry: D D This avoids duplication of model geometry Different users can work in separate files simultaneously (owned by manufacturing engineer) abcd1234_mfg. By creating a manufacturing assembly" and adding a component to it. 9-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .prt Contains master model geometry The manufacturing engineer has ownership of the assembly file without necessarily having write access to the master model which is owned by the designer.

per view (PREFERENCES →VIEW DISPLAY) 12. edit entire object. Adjust the views. and GD&T's (INSERT→ANNOTATION) D D D D D ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D D EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-5 . revision block. Adjust the View Display Preferences. isometric. Clean up individual views with view dependent edits. intersection symbols (INSERT→UTILITY SYMBOL) 14. auxiliary. size. hidden line removal. typically top or front (DRAWING→ADD VIEW→IMPORT VIEW) 9. Create the 'drawing' file (Open seedpart_mm or seedpart_in. Add the notes. edit object segment (EDIT→VIEW DEPENDENT EDIT) 13. Adjust the paper. scale. border. xxxxxxx_dwg) 2. orthographic. detail.The Master Model Master Model Drawing Guidelines D D D D D D D 1. Change to the Drafting Application (APPLICATION→DRAFTING) 5. FILE→SAVE AS. Add the part to be detailed as a component (ASSEMBLIES →COMPONENTS→ADD EXISTING) 4. align. Add the drawing formats. name. Set View Display Preferences. target symbols. units. erase object. standard notes (Site dependent) 7. exploded (DRAWING→ADD VIEW→ORTHOGRAPHIC VIEW) 10. threads (PREFERENCES →VIEW DISPLAY) 8. Start the Assemblies application (APPLICATION→ASSEMBLIES) 3. Add the Utility Symbols. title block. Add more views. move. Add the first 'Imported' view. labels. centerlines. Add the dimensions (INSERT→DIMENSION) 15. projection angle (DRAWING→EDIT) 6. section backgrounds. remove (DRAWING→EDIT VIEW) 11. section.

Exploring a Master Model Assembly This activity will demonstrate the advantages of a Master Model Assembly. Step 4 Inspect the drawing for dimensional values. Step 2 Open the part file pau_tapedisp_dwg.The Master Model Activity 1 . Step 3 Choose Drafting. - Zoom in on section view A-A and note the slot width of . Make sure that you are selecting pau_tapedisp_dwg.12. Step 1 Choose File"Options"Load Options and ensure that the Load Method is From Directory. Slot Width ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Corner Radius 9-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .88 and the corner radius of . Both dimensions have been rounded from the model dimensions to two decimal places.

SH1. Step 5 Investigate the model.The Master Model - Restore the view and note the drawing name. - - An information window appears showing the assembly file structure for the file pau_tapedisp_dwg and indicates that there is one component named pau_tapedisp. Choose Information→Feature and note that there are no features. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-7 . Choose Assemblies→Reports→List Components. This part contains the Master Model definition. - Choose Modeling. at the lower left corner. ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Close the information window. Choose Tools→Expression and note that there are no expressions.

When the cursor changes to the cross with the ellipsis (+.75 - Choose Tools→Expression. Pass the cursor over the numbers in the QuickPick window until the solid body is highlighted.The Master Model Step 6 Examine the display. Place the cursor over the solid body. - Choose Information→Object. - Dismiss the information window. - An information window appears with information regarding the solid.) select once.. then select it. and confirmation that it is a component. its owning part. - Choose Open. Choose OK. 9-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .. Choose pau_tapedisp from the list box. ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 7 Retrieve the Master Model file. Step 8 Edit the expression for Roll_width to .

- Replace the .875 value with . - Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters. The opening for the tape roll changes in width to accommodate the modified dimension. Step 9 Edit the blend on the inside of the spool cavity.The Master Model - Select the Roll_width expression.75 and choose OK. ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-9 .

- Choose Drafting. ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Step 10 Change Displayed Part to pau_tapedisp_dwg. Confirm the selection with OK. Choose OK. key in a new value of . - Choose OK. 9-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose Window→pau_tapedisp_dwg to change the Displayed Part.06. Notice the drawing name now shows (OUT-OF-DATE) to remind you the views are not updated. - In the Radius Dynamic Input Field.The Master Model - Select the Blend(21) feature at the bottom of the list.

Choose All in the Update Views dialog box and choose OK. Step 12 Zoom in on section A-A again to see the changes to the master model reflected on the drawing Slot Width Corner Radius Step 13 Choose File"Close"All Parts.The Master Model Step 11 Update the drawing. ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-11 . - Choose Drawing→Update Views.

- Check to see the Assemblies application is toggled on (Choose Application→Assemblies. Choose BODY from the Reference Set pull down and choose OK.The Master Model Activity 2 . Step 1 Open the part file pau_seedpart_in. Choose the Add Existing Component icon. then OK. Choose pau_dwg_1 from the parts directory. Choose the Choose Part File button. - - ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 4 Choose Save. Step 3 Add the part pau_dwg_1 to the discipline specific assembly file. if it is not on). followed by OK to locate the part at Zero. Step 2 Save the part as ***_dwg_1 where *** represent your initials. Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts. Press Reset in the Point Constructor dialog box. Change the Positioning option to Absolute. 9-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Creating a Master Model Assembly This activity will demonstrate creation of a Master Model Assembly.

whenever they want with full confidence that no data or revision work can be lost without active confirmation by the users. If these two files were readĆprotected by different departments. ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 9-13 .The Master Model SUMMARY This Master Model approach offers many benefits to Unigraphics customers. Users can access whatever they want. distinct responsibilities would be enforced by the protection and yet all of the appropriate model data is shared by each of the departments concerned.

The Master Model (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÏÏÏ 9 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 9-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Create Dimensions. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. you will be able to: D D D D D D Edit drawings. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-1 . Modify Preferences. Create Utility Symbols.Introduction to Drafting Introduction to Drafting Lesson 10 PURPOSE This lesson will introduce the fundamentals of the Unigraphics Drafting application. Create Annotations. Add Views to Drawings.

Drafting annotations (dimensions. Every view is fully associated with the solid. Drafting annotations are fully associative to the geometry selected and will update automatically to changes in the solid part. In this mode objects are displayed in the color that they appear in the modeling application and the background is the color set by the Preferences"Visualization"Color Pallet"Edit Background dialog. Monochrome Display provides a means for a drawing to appear more like an actual drawing (black-on-white). As orthographic views are added.Introduction to Drafting Uses of the Drafting Application The Drafting application can be used to rapidly create drawings of solid parts. Monochrome is toggle on or off by choosing Preferences"Visualization"Color Pallet"Color Settings and then toggling Monochrome Display. If the solid is updated. labels. Fully associative view boundaries automatically calculated when the drawing is updated. Show Widths may also be set here but only applies to drawings. The foreground and background colors may be set in this dialog. drawings will be displayed in full color. full color or monochrome. Some of the features of the Drafting application are: D Views may be added to the drawing just by indicating their location with the cursor. Full color is the default setting. When Monochrome Display is toggled off. they will automatically be aligned with the parent view. D D D D D Drawing Display Drawings may be displayed two different ways. the views will also update. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and symbols with leaders) are placed directly on the drawing.

or projection angle. size. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-3 .Introduction to Drafting Editing a Drawing The Drawing"Edit option may be chosen to change the creation parameters of a current drawing such as name. units of measure. scale.

The following are things to be aware of: D The projection angle can only be changed if no projected views exist on the current drawing being modified. D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . However. The drawing may be edited to a larger or smaller size. if the drawing is edited to a size so small that a view falls entirely outside the boundary of the drawing. an error message will appear.Introduction to Drafting The current state of the displayed drawing affects the edit options available.

size and scale will be modified. the current drawing name. Step 1 Open the file pau_edit_1.Introduction to Drafting Activity 1 .Editing a Drawing In this activity. Step 2 Choose Drafting. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-5 . Step 3 Choose Drawing"Open and select 93A12345-5 from the listing as the drawing to open and choose OK.

- Change the values so that Height= 594. Length= 1100. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Introduction to Drafting Step 4 Rename the current drawing. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-6 Step 5 Change the current drawing size. Choose Apply and notice the drawing size update. - Change the drawing name in the Selection text field to 93A12345Ć6. Choose Apply and notice the drawing name update in the graphics area. - Choose Drawing"Edit.

- Enter a new drawing scale in the text fields (1/1) and choose OK. the part file must be saved. 93A12345–6 (DWG) WORK Multiple drawing edits may be performed before choosing Apply or OK. layer settings.Introduction to Drafting Step 6 Change the current drawing scale. it determines scale. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-7 . NOTE: In order to save the drawing information or edits. Once this view is added to the drawing. It also establishes the part orientation on the drawing. Adding a View to a Drawing The first view added is based on the view orientation selected from the list box in the upper portion of the Add View dialog. as well as the orthographic space and alignment of subsequent orthographic views. Step 7 Choose File"Close"All Parts.

View direction ZC YC XC Choosing Drawing"Add View displays the following dialog.Introduction to Drafting Any modeling view may be used as the first view placed on a drawing. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Introduction to Drafting View Type Icons View Creation Steps Viewpoint Selection List View Specific Options ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-9 .

this option automatically creates linear. all drafting objects or view modifications associated to that view are deleted. Removing Views From a Drawing You can use the Drawing"Remove View option to remove one or more views from a drawing. cylindrical.Introduction to Drafting Create Centerline When toggled ON. Once a view is removed from a drawing. and bolt circle centerlines (with a circular instance set) for views where the hole or pin axis is perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the drawing view. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Step 1 Add a view to the drawing. a view will be added to the drawing previously created. Choose Drawing→Edit. select B" size drawing. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-11 . - Choose Drafting.Introduction to Drafting Activity 2 .Adding a View to a Drawing In this activity. Choose OK. The Top viewpoint is the default view orientation. - Choose Add View to Drawing. Open the part ***_dwg_1 or open pau_drawing_1_assm and save as ***_drawing_1_assm. - Choose File→Options→Load Options and select As Saved. - Ensure that the Create Center Line option is toggled On. Any one of the listed viewpoints could be imported as the first view on the face of the drawing.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose the Orthographic View Icon. This flexibility assures that the drawing views necessary to depict the part may be placed on the drawing independent of the orientation of the part in model space. Note that the Top viewpoint of the part as it relates to model space is being placed on the drawing such that it depicts an orthographic front view of the part. then specify a new view center. View View Center View bounds are ghosted to assist in view placement DWG1 (DWG) WORK If there is a need to reposition the view after placement.Introduction to Drafting - Use the first mouse button to indicate a location near the lower left corner of the drawing as shown. Step 2 Place an orthographic View on the Drawing. choose the Move button from the dialog box. Notice the creation of the centerline.

do not close the part.Introduction to Drafting - Select the imported view as the parent view. The location of the cursor relative to the base view determines the Orthographic view projection from the parent view. Step 3 Choose File"Save. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-13 . View bounds are ghosted to assist in view placement Orthographic View Parent View DWG1 (DWG) WORK - Use the first mouse button to indicate a location above the parent view.

View Selection Box View Option Buttons Button Specific Options Global View Options ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The View Display dialog box may be used to define and edit the display of such things as hidden lines.. smooth edges.Introduction to Drafting Setting the View Display Preferences Choosing Preferences"View Display produces the View Display dialog box. etc. silhouettes.

Button Specific Options The Button Specific Options area of the dialog box varies to support the different View Option Buttons available. or this dialog box may be used to edit the settings of existing drawing views. When each View Option Button is selected the appropriate choices for the option are displayed in this area. and Width option menus. Font. Hidden Line removal is not performed and all hidden lines in the view will appear. select the view(s) from the drawing. View Option Buttons Hidden Lines If the Hidden Line option is toggled Off.Introduction to Drafting The View Display dialog box may be used to preset preferences for subsequent views added to the drawing. the color. or choose the view(s) from the selection box. Hidden Lines=Dashed Hidden Lines=Invisible ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved 10-15 . To edit the View Display preferences of an existing view. If the Hidden Line option is toggled On. font and width of the hidden line display is determined by the settings in the Color.

the Color. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and Width option menus.Introduction to Drafting Smooth Edges Smooth edges are those edges that their adjacent faces have the same surface tangent at the edge where they meet. Font. Smooth Edges=On Smooth Edges=Off Smooth Edges=Dashed Visible Lines The appearance of visible objects may be determined by using the Color. The End Gaps option may be used to vary the edge intersection appearance. If the Smooth Edges option is toggled to the On position. Font and Width option menus may be used to determine the appearance of the smooth edges.

and silhouettes are updated after changes are made to the model. or detail views made from section views. These views always automatically update after the model is changed. If the Virtual Intersections option is toggled to the On position. Automatic Update The Automatic Update option may be used to control whether a drawing view is updated after the model has been changed. no automatic update will occur during the return to the Drafting application. Edges are extracted at the component level and remain associative to the component. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-17 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . If Automatic Update is toggled off. NOTE: If the Preferences"Drafting"Suppress View Update option is turned On. the Color. If Automatic Update is turned on.Introduction to Drafting Virtual Intersections Virtual Intersections are the theoretical sharp intersections that occur where blended faces would intersect. where the display of smooth edges may cause confusion. these edges are not updated. The End Gaps option may be used to vary the edge intersection appearance. smooth edges. Font and Width option menus may be used to determine the appearance of the virtual intersection display. hidden lines. Virtual Intersections Extracted Edges The Extracted Edges option allows the edges of an assembly to be shown without loading all of the component parts. This option does not affect section views.

With the Smooth Edges View Option Button depressed. Step 1 Continue using the part ***_dwg_1 or ***_drawing_1_assm. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . whichever is applicable. toggle the Smooth Edges option off. With the Hidden Lines View Option Button depressed. Step 2 Change the view display preferences for the imported view added to the drawing. Choose OK. - Choose Preferences→View Display.Setting View Display Preferences In this activity. Set the Hidden Line Font to Dashed. - - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-18 Step 3 Save and close the part file. make sure Hidden Line is toggled on. Select the imported view.Introduction to Drafting Activity 3 . you will practice setting the view display preferences.

The Utility Symbols dialog box consists of four distinct areas: symbol icons. Symbol Display Parameters control the creation of each utility symbol as it is placed. symbol display parameters and preference options. target points. and intersection symbols. The utility symbol dialog is activated by choosing Insert→Utility Symbol in the Drafting application.Introduction to Drafting Creating Utility Symbols The Utility Symbols option creates various centerlines. position options. Symbol Icons Point Position Options Symbol Display Parameters Preference Options ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-19 . These parameters may also be used to modify existing drafting symbols. offset center points.

then a linear centerline is created for each hole. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Introduction to Drafting Automatic Centerline This option automatically creates centerlines in any existing view(s) where the hole or pin axis is perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the drawing view. The following views are not supported: D D D Faceted representation view Unfolded section view Revolved section view Associativity of Utility Symbols A utility symbol's placement is controlled by a position on an object. The symbols may be selected at any position. based upon the symbol display parameters. The system will automatically size the symbol components to the objects used to create it. Deleting a Utility Symbol A utility symbol may be deleted by choosing Edit→Delete and selecting the symbol to delete. If a series of holes in a circle (bolt hole circle) are not a circular instance set.

the centerline will conform to the Retain Annotations setting setting found under Preferences→Drafting. The following associativity rules apply to cylindrical centerlines: D D A cylindrical centerline must be associated to two point positions. arcs. The point position options allow a centerline associated to objects other than cylinders to be created. If one of the objects to which a cylindrical centerline is associated is deleted. or cylindrical faces.Introduction to Drafting Creating a Cylindrical Centerline A cylindrical centerline that conforms to ASME Y14. D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-21 . A cylindrical centerline is updated when the data to which it is associated is moved or reĆsized.5M-1994 standards may be created through points.

Introduction to Drafting Activity 4 . - Choose Drafting. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Step 3 Create a Cylindrical Centerline symbol. Choose Insert→Utility Symbol - Select the Cylindrical Centerline icon. Step 1 Open the part pau_symbols_1. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-22 - Set the Point Position option to Arc Center. cylindrical centerlines will be created using both the arc center and cylindrical face options. Step 2 Rename the part ***_symbols_1 where *** represent your initials.Creating a Cylindrical Centerline In this activity.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-23 . Select this pair of edges. Select this pair of edges. for placement of a single centerline symbol. confirming your selections if needed. indicated below. Repeat for the other two pairs of positions. Select this pair of edges.Introduction to Drafting - Select two positions.

Introduction to Drafting The resulting cylindrical centerlines are shown. - Continue using the Cylindrical Centerline icon. Step 4 Create a centerline symbol using the Cylindrical Face option. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Change the Point Position option to Cylindrical Face.

as well as in the adjacent view. and two drafting points are created that are associated to the selected face. using cursor locations as shown. the face selection will need to be confirmed. 1* *2 Step 5 Repeat the procedure for the two counterbored holes in the orthographic view. as the system will select the main. or outside face first. This face will highlight in the view that the face was selected. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-25 . - Toggle Multiple Centerlines to On. The indicated end points are projected to the axis of the cylindrical face. This time. - Indicate end points 1 and 2 of the cylindrical centerline.Introduction to Drafting - Place the cursor over the cylindrical face as shown and select the face using the first mouse button.

using cursor locations as shown.Introduction to Drafting - Use the numbers from the QuickPick window to select the inner cylindrical face. 1* *2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select this face - Indicate end points 1 and 2 of the cylindrical centerline.

this is because Multiple Centerlines was turned on. The completed centerlines are shown below. Select this face Notice how you did not have to select the endpoints for this centerline.Introduction to Drafting - Make a similar centerline through the lower counterbored hole by selecting the counter bored face shown below. Step 6 Create Automatic Centerlines. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-27 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . - Choose File"Close"Reopen Selected Parts.

- Step 7 Choose File"Save. Choose OK twice. Hold the Ctrl key down and select the following views from the list: FRONT@16 ORTHO@26 RIGHT@10 SX@25 Choose Apply.Introduction to Drafting - Choose ***_symbols_1. Choose Insert"Utility Symbol. do not close the part. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-28 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose Automatic Centerline. Dismiss the Information window.

The other way is by choosing the dimension from the customizable Dimension toolbar. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-29 . One way is by choosing Insert→Dimension and then selecting the desired dimension.Introduction to Drafting Creating Dimensions The various dimensions types may be accessed two different ways.

Introduction to Drafting Dimension Dialog Whenever a dimension type is selected a dimension dialog specific to that type of dimension is displayed. Second selection Fold Location Name of dimension type First selection Origin Line and point type definitions for Cylindrical dimensions Point type Vector definitions for Angular dimensions Annotation editor for appended text Local Preferences ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

The various options provide a means of defining the vectors Existing Line Two Points Extension Line Arc Center Enter Angle Horizontal Right Vertical Up Horizontal Left Vertical Down ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-31 . An angle dimension is the measurement between two vectors.Introduction to Drafting Vector Definition for Angular Dimensions The Vector Definitions options are only available when creating an angular dimension.

Existing Line Inferred Point Control Point Intersection Point Arc Center Tangent Point Baseline ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-32 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Introduction to Drafting Line and Point Definition for Cylindrical Dimensions These options are only available when creating a cylindrical dimension. The various options provide a means of defining the lines or points that the dimension measures.

Local Preferences ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-33 .Introduction to Drafting Dimension Local Preferences The Dimensions dialog box contains options that control the display and placement of dimensions. These local preference settings may be changed with each dimension created.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . In the annotation editor select the required position button. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-34 Before D After Above Below Enter the desired text for the different positions as required and choose OK.Introduction to Drafting Appended Text Controls Text or symbols may be added to dimensions via the Annotation Editor and toggling on Use Appended Text. Choose the Annotation Editor button. Annotation Editor To create appended text: D D D Select the desired dimension type. One or all four positions may be used on the same dimension.

X R 2. This pull down is active when using dual dimensions. Both single (Primary) and dual (Secondary) dimensional precision is supported.Introduction to Drafting NOTE: If the position arrow displays solid. If the dimension display format is set to fractional values (instead of decimal values) then the Dimension Precision dialog box will show fractional values for the nominal precision option.XXX R 2. select the position button and delete the text.2 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-35 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . Dimension the object. D D Toggle Use Appended Text on. OR For decimal precision For fractional precision Example: X. Any text entered in the appended text fields will continue to be added to any new dimensions created unless the Use Appended Text option is toggled off. that is an indicator that text is present and will be displayed in the dimension. If that text is not desired.195 Example: X. Precision Options The Precision button activates the Dimension Precision dialog box which is used to independently control the precision of both dimension values and tolerance values.

2 Lines +Limit.Introduction to Drafting Tolerance Type and Tolerance Value Options The display of tolerance values may be controlled using the Tolerance Types shown below. Click here Bilateral Unilateral+ UnilateralBilateral No tolerance +Limit. 2 Lines Tolerance Types -Limit. 1 Line Basic Reference Diameter Reference Not to Scale ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-36 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . 1 Line -Limit.

Inches or Millimeters. Any value entered in these fields will be interpreted as positive unless a negative (-) value is specified.Introduction to Drafting Tolerance Value Options The Tolerance Value fields are active in respect to the units button. Tolerance Values ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-37 . The units buttons are active depending on the dual dimension format that has been selected by Preferences →Annotation→Units. Use the Tolerance Value fields to enter upper and lower tolerance values for both Inch and SI units. that has been selected.

030 lower tolerance = -.00 * .49 Basic Displays a basic dimension enclosed in a rectangular box around the dimension.030 lower tolerance = -.030 lower tolerance = -.50 ".010 Unilateral The negative limit below (-TOL) will show value while the positive limit above (+. the lower value is ignored.50 inches upper tolerance = .Introduction to Drafting Some examples of different tolerance values and displays are shown below. 5.000) will be zero. 5.03 nominal size= 5. 5.50 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-38 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .53 – 5.010 Equal Bilateral Only the upper tolerance value is used.50 inches upper tolerance = .010 + Limit 1 Line Limits are calculated by adding the positive tolerance value to the dimension value for the upper limit of your dimension.50 ) .01 nominal size = 5. No tolerance values are displayed. and subtracting the negative value for the lower limit 5.50 inches upper tolerance = . nominal size= 5.

Auto placement also controls whether the leader lines come from left or right. the cursor is insensitive to the horizontal direction In Manual" placement the cursor is sensitive to cursor position ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-39 . Initial Position Cursor Movement cursor position Initial Position Cursor Movement Final Position ÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Final Position cross hairs ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ cursor position In Auto" placement. When using the Manual Placement. Arrows In or Arrows Out options. The leader line placement is controlled manually using the Leader From option. Arrows In Manual Placement. Auto Placement Manual Placement.Introduction to Drafting Placement Options Dimensions placement on the drawing may be controlled using the options shown below. or moves the text outside the extension lines if necessary. Arrows Out Auto placement automatically centers the dimension between the extension lines if space allows. the dimension is placed at the cursor location specified.

0000 Example: Arrow 1 & Extension 2 8.Introduction to Drafting Arrow Line and Extension Line Options The display of arrow lines and extension lines for dimensions may be controlled using the Arrow Line Display and Extension Line Display options shown below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-40 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Display Arrow on Side 1 Display Extension Line on Side 1 Display Arrow on Side 2 Display Extension Line on Side 2 Example: 2 Arrows & 2 Extension Lines 8.0000 NOTE: Side 1 refers to the first object selected and Side 2 refers to the second object selected.

The leader option may be set prior to creating the dimension or changed during placement of the dimension.000 Example: Right R 2. Example: Left Infer From Left From Right R 2.000 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-41 .Introduction to Drafting Leader Direction Options The dimension leader direction may be controlled by selecting one of the three leader options.

the dimension will remain centered between the arrows.000 12 Places Left/Top Justification Center/Middle Justification Right/Bottom Justification ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-42 The origin of the dimension may be changed simply by selecting it and dragging to the new position.Introduction to Drafting Text Justification Options Text justification may be controlled using the Horizontal and Vertical Justification options. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .000 12 Places 6.e. Vertical Justification Options Horizontal Justification Options 6. These are used when there is more than one line of dimension text and/or symbols. The dimension will drag within the constraints that it was created. if Automatic Placement was used during creation.000 12 Places 6. i. such as appended text or GD&T symbols.

Global Drafting Preferences ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-43 . there are Global Preferences governing drafting views and entities.Introduction to Drafting In addition to the Dimension Local Preferences. These are the Preferences found in the Preferences pullĆdown menu shown below.

Step 1 Continue using the part ***_symbols_1. and the Character Size to . Choose OK. Choose Insert"Dimension"Horizontal. - Choose Format→Layer Settings. several dimensions will be created using various local settings on the Dimensions dialog. Step 2 Set the work layer to 111 (category DIMS). - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-44 - Choose the Appended Text Below icon.Creating Dimensions In this activity. Choose Make Work and OK. NOTE: It will be necessary to set Dimension local preference settings and the Global preferences to create each of the following dimensions. Set the Lettering Types option menu to Dimension. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose Preferences→Annotation→Lettering.25. Step 3 Create a Horizontal dimension. Choose layer 111. In the Horizontal dialog window choose the Annotation Editor icon.Introduction to Drafting Activity 5 .

Introduction to Drafting - Enter 6 EQ SPACES in text field and choose OK. not the arc centers. Set the Placement option menu to Auto Placement. - Choose Insert"Dimension"Vertical. Select the two centerlines as shown in the figure below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-45 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . Select a cursor location to place the dimension on the drawing. Notice the extension lines are spaced from the linear centerlines. Notice that Use Appended Text was automatically toggled on. Step 4 Create a Vertical dimension. - Set the Precision for 2 decimal places. Set the alignment methods to Center and Middle.

Set the tolerance type to No Tolerance. Set the Precision to 1 decimal place. Set the tolerance type to Equal Bilateral Tolerance. - Place the dimension on the drawing.Introduction to Drafting - Toggle Use Appended Text off. Select the outer edges of the cylinder to dimension as shown below. Step 5 Create a Cylindrical dimension. Accept the default value in the Upper Tolerance field (. - Set the Precision to 3 decimal places. Select the objects shown below. - Choose Insert"Dimension"Cylindrical.005). Select this edge ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-46 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual Select this edge EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Set the Precision to 2 decimal places. Set the Placement Option to Manual Placement. Select the arc and place the dimension on the drawing as shown below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-47 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . Set the Precision to 3 decimal places. do not close the part. - Choose Insert"Dimension"Radius. - Choose Insert"Dimension"Hole. - Step 7 Create a Hole dimension. Select the arc and place the dimension on the drawing as shown below.Introduction to Drafting - Place the dimension on the drawing. Arrows Out. Step 8 Choose File"Save. Step 6 Create a Radius NOT to Center dimension.

Any of these symbols can be placed on the drawing with a leader or as a standalone note without a leader. GD&T symbols. labels. Tool Bar Text Entry Window Preview Window Symbol Display and Text Preference Options ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-48 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Placement Options Unigraphics NX .Introduction to Drafting Annotation Editor The Annotation Editor is used to place other information on the drawing such as notes. and User Defined Symbols.

the text and control characters appear within the Text Entry Window. In this window the formatting options available within the Tool Bar may be used to customize the appearance of the text. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-49 .Introduction to Drafting As text and symbols are entered. hold the cursor over the icon until the name of the button appears. Insert from File Reset Text and Dialog Preferences Clear Copy Delete Text Attribute Preview Save As Cut Paste Select Next Symbol Fit to Preview Window Font Bold Underline Superscript Text Justification Character Scale Factor Italic Overline Subscript TIP To reveal the function of any button. The Tool Bar The Tool Bar contains several buttons that allow various text formatting operations to be performed. The preview window displays the text as it will appear when it is placed on the drawing.

the Origin Tool dialog box is displayed.Introduction to Drafting Placing the Text Notes and labels may be placed on the drawing either with or without a leader line. This dialog box allows you to specify the placement and alignment method for the text. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-50 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Create with Leader Create without Leader Creating text Without a Leader When the Create without Leader option is selected. depending on the placement option chosen.

Extend to maximum.Introduction to Drafting Creating Text with a Leader To create text with a leader line.5M-1994 ASME 1994 / ISO 1983 Standards Datum Feature On Dimension Text Alignment Options Top Middle Bottom Datum on Annotation Datum on Stub Below Bottom. Extend to maximum Below Top. Extend to maximum. choose the button to display the Create Leader dialog box. Extend to maximum Below Bottom. This dialog box allows one or more leaders to be specified as well as the display characteristics of each leader. Underline Below Bottom Below Bottom. Underline Below Top Below Top. Plain Plain with All Around Symbol Plain with Aligned Arrow Plain with Aligned Arrow and All Around Symbol Extension Line ASME 1994 / ISO 1983 Datum Feature ASME 1994 / ISO 1983 Datum Feature With Extension Line Options Available For ASME Y14. Underline ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved 10-51 . Underline Below Top.

Text may also be aligned either horizontally or vertically with an existing drafting object using the Align Text option. Drafting objects may be created with more than one leader by selecting the New Leader button anytime during the leader creation process.Introduction to Drafting To create a leader. simply select the reference geometry for the leader end point. it is captured in the Text Entry Window so that changes may be made. arc center. Editing Existing Dimension Preferences The Annotation Preferences of existing dimensions may be edited simply by doubleĆclicking on the dimension. Editing Text Text may be edited in a previously created note or label by selecting it from the drawing. Once all selections are made for the Create Leader dialog box. leader side placement. or intersection point. simply choose the Apply button to accept and display the changes on the drawing. choosing OK will proceed to the Place Annotation dialog box discussed earlier. select the preferred leader type. D D D Dimension Line/Arrow Lettering Units Radial ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-52 D D Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . indicate up to seven intermediate leader points (if necessary). The Annotation Preferences dialog will appear and the following types of preferences may be edited. A horizontal and vertical distance is given as multiples of the current character size when using the Offset Character option. The Offset Distance option may be used to indicate an origin position offset from an existing drafting object. but the Point Constructor option may be used to tie the text location to a control point. When editing is completed. When a note or label is selected. and leader/text alignment. The default placement method is Drag.

Step 2 Make layer 101 the Work Layer. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-53 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . in the text entry area using the appropriate degree symbol. key in 101 for the work layer.Using the Annotation Editor In this activity. - Choose the Text Justification button from the Control Character Area. Step 1 Continue using the part ***_symbols_1. - Choose Insert→Annotation. Step 3 Create the Label Shown to define the chamfer. - Enter the text. - In the Utility tool bar. as shown in the illustration above. the Annotation Editor will be used to create a label. Ensure that Drafting Symbols is selected.Introduction to Drafting Activity 6 .

Select the edge shown to place the arrow leader. Locate the Label in the proper location. Left Justify Center Justify Right Justify - Choose the Create with Leader option.Introduction to Drafting - Choose Left Justify. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-54 Step 4 Choose File"Close"Save and Close. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select this edge - Choose OK to indicate that no intermediate points are required.

Added views to a drawing. Created Utility Symbols. Created Dimensions. In this lesson you: D D D D D D Modified a drawing. Added annotation to a drawing. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 10-55 . Views and dimensions that are placed on a drawing are associative to the solid model and update when changes are made to the model. Created Cylindrical Centerlines.Introduction to Drafting SUMMARY The Drafting Application provides for the creation of drawings.

Introduction to Drafting (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 10-56 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson.Datum Plane Reference Features Datum Plane Reference Features Lesson 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ PURPOSE This lesson will define datum plane reference features. Create a hole feature on a tangent datum plane. you will be able to: D D D Create a Datum Plane. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-1 . Move a hole feature location by changing a datum plane angle.

or as associative linear objects. but the display is limited to a size slightly larger than that of the solid model. This allows the hole to be placed on the tangent datum and be relative to both the cylinder and Plane 1A. normal to the axis of the cylinder. Reference Features may be created relative to an existing solid model or fixed in model space. These tools are needed because the hole feature requires a planar placement face for creation rather than the cylindrical face of the base solid. while Plane 2A defines a placement plane that is tangent to the cylindrical face and perpendicular to Plane 1A. Plane 1A Plane 3B Plane 1B Plane 2A Plane 2B parameter Example A Example B In example A above. Reference Features are theoretically infinite in size. In the case where a hole must pierce a cylinder to a certain depth from the outside of the cylinder. This lesson will only discuss relative datum planes.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ Reference Features ÏÏÏ 11 Reference features are construction tools that assist in the creation of features ÏÏÏ sketches in locations and orientations where planar placement faces do not ÏÏÏ and exist. 11-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The example on the right requires an additional datum plane to position the hole perpendicular to the slot. Datum Plane reference features are accessible by choosing Insert"Form Feature"Datum Plane from the menu bar while in the Modeling application. Plane 1A defines a position through the cylinder axis. construction tools are necessary. Two examples below show a hole in the side of a cylinder. The amount of control desired over placement of a feature sometimes dictates the number of reference features required.

boss. In assemblies. as mating TO or FROM object. whatever is necessary to describe the relationship of the plane to other objects determines the constraint type(s) to be used. as a hinge line for a section or auxiliary view. or three constraints may be necessary. Relative Datum Planes Relative datum planes are constrained (associated) to other geometric objects. or feature. One. To act as the planar placement face for the creation of form features (ie: hole. Generally. Many constraint combinations can be used to create relative datum planes. As a horizontal or vertical reference. To act as the 'trim to' face (extruded and revolved bodies). In Drafting. etc.). pad. face. For the mirror plane in Mirror Body and Mirror Feature. Simply selecting the objects will present the applicable constraint types. The constraint type is determined (inferred) by the objects selected. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-3 . To trim a body. slot. Creating Datum Planes by Inferred Selection Relative datum planes are created by selecting an existing object. two. As a target edge for positioning features. A constraint is a restriction on a datum that positions it relative to some existing plane. To help define a relative Datum Axis.Datum Plane Reference Features Datum Plane The datum plane option allows a planar reference feature to be created that may be used: D D D D D D D D D D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ To define a sketch plane. pocket.

The Datum Plane is associative to the body and constrained to the selected points.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ A Single Constraint associates the datum plane to the target solid using either one of the following creation methods: D D Offset From Face or Datum Plane (Select a face or Datum Plane) Through Face Axis (Select cylinder. 11-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Datum Plane User Interface Most of the datum planes created in this course can be created with the Static Datum Plane Dynamic Input Field by inferred methods. The Datum Plane Dialog may be used to create datum planes that are more specific than those you can create with the Inferred method. The Triple Constraint method is inferred by selecting three points on a single solid body. Only Endpoints and Midpoints on linear edges are selectable. cone or revolved feature) Using Dual Constraints means that the constraints must be specified in pairs to create the datum plane. The possible combinations of selections are shown on the next page.

0 90) Tangent to Face Through Point ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Through Point Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Angle to Face/Datum Plane Angle is 0 Angle is 0 or 90 Tangent to Face Through Curve EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-5 .Datum Plane Reference Features Dual Constraints First Constraint (selection) Offset From Face Second Constraint (selection) Offset From Face (Center Plane) Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Parallel to Face/Datum Plane Tangent to Face Tangent/Normal/Binormal to a Curve/Edge Through Point Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Angle to Face/Datum Plane Through Point Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Angle to Face/Datum Plane Through Point Through Edge Normal to Edge Normal to Datum Axis Through Datum Axis Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Angle to Face/Datum Plane Through Edge Through Datum Axis Through Point Through Cyl/Con/Rev Face Axis Tangent to Face Through Point Angle to Face/Datum Plane (Angle is 0.

and choose OK. press Enter. D D 11-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . drag the datum plane to the desired location and choose OK. Select the face to offset from. Select the base of the normal. Do one of the following: D Choose OK to accept a value of 0 (zero). Key in a value.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Datum Plane Types The following is a list of the datum planes that will be covered in this lesson: D D D D D D Offset Center Angle Tangent Through Control Points Point and Direction Offset Datum Plane To create an offset datum plane D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon.

Datum Plane Reference Features Center Datum Plane To create a center datum plane ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-7 . Choose OK. Select two parallel faces or datum planes.

Choose OK. 11-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select the cylindrical axis symbol.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Datum Plane Through Cylindrical Axis To create a datum plane through a cylindrical axis: D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-9 . Select the cylindrical axis symbol. an additional datum plane must be created. Select the rotation drag handle and drag the datum plane to the desired location and choose OK. Do one of the following: D D D D D D D Choose OK to accept the default value of 90.Datum Plane Reference Features Datum Plane at an Angle Through a Cylindrical Axis To create a datum plane at an angle through a cylindrical axis. Select the previously created datum plane. Choose OK. Select the cylindrical axis symbol. and choose OK. press Enter. Key in a value. Choose the Datum Plane icon.

Select the edge that the datum plane is to pass through. Do one of the following: D D Key in a value. do the following: D D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon. press Enter. Select the rotation drag handle and drag the datum plane to the desired angle and choose OK. and choose OK. 11-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Datum Plane at an Angle to a Face or Datum Plane Through an Edge To create a datum plane at an angle through an edge. Select the planar face or datum plane that the angle will reference.

an additional datum plane ÏÏÏ must be created. Choose the Datum Plane icon. Select the previously created datum plane. Select the cylindrical axis symbol. D D D D D Choose OK. Choose Alternate Solution from the Datum Plane toolbar until the correct tangent datum plane is previewed. Select the cylindrical face (not on the axis). Choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-11 . ÏÏÏ Datum Plane Tangent to a Cylindrical Face D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 To create a datum plane tangent to a cylindrical face.

do the following: D D D D Choose the Datum Plane icon. Select the control points as desired (edges or curves). 11-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose OK. Values between 0 (zero) and 1 define locations on the selected edge or curve. NOTE: The U Parameter is a value that indicates a position along a theoretical infinite curve. Values less than 0 (zero) or greater than 1 may also be used.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Datum Plane Through Three Points To create a datum plane through 3 points. Tab through and set the U Parameter as required.

Select a point through which the datum plane should pass. do the following: Choose the Datum Plane icon. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-13 . D Choose OK twice. Define the normal of the datum plane using Inferred Vector or Vector Constructor.Datum Plane Reference Features Datum Plane Defined by Point and Direction To create a datum plane defined by a point and direction. Choose Datum Plane from the Datum Plane toolbar. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D D D D Choose Point & Direction.

Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ Activity 1 . Select the top face of the block and confirm the selection if necessary. three relative datum planes will be created. Pick this top face. The datum planes 11 created are shown below. Step 3 Create a Datum Plane Offset at a distance of 1 inch above the upper face of the block. - Choose Datum Plane. 11-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Datum plane 1 Datum plane 2 Datum plane 3 Step 1 Open the part pau_ref_1. Step 2 Choose Modeling.Creating Relative Datum Planes ÏÏÏ In this activity.

Step 4 Create a second datum plane through three points.Datum Plane Reference Features The top face highlights and a direction vector points normal to the face. The second datum plane will be created diagonally through the block. - Choose Datum Plane. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-15 . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Key in 1 and press Enter. Datum plane Datum planes have infinite bounds even though they are displayed with visible boundaries. - Choose OK. the positive ZC direction. in this case. The vector displays the positive offset direction.

Third Point Second Point - Carefully select each of the two midpoints. - Choose OK. 11-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The datum plane is created and positioned through the three selected points. Step 5 Create the third datum plane midway between the left and right faces. The relationship of this datum plane through the points will remain if the block parameters are changed.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ First Point - Select the first point and confirm any of the edges. Any of the edges are acceptable because they share the end point. - Choose Datum Plane.

The datum plane is created and located at the center of the part and is parallel to the faces selected.Datum Plane Reference Features - Select the right planar face. Step 6 Edit the block to verify the parametric relationship of the datum planes to the block. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Right Face - Select the left planar face. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-17 . - Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters. Left Face - Choose OK.

Again a dialog box displays options to edit the feature. The feature may still be modified without updating the model. The revised values are displayed in the graphics area. there are no more edits desired.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Select BLOCK(6) and choose OK. - Choose OK in the dialog box. those features could be selected at this time. 11-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose OK in the Edit Parameters dialog box to complete the change. Change the Block Dimensions values to: X Length = Y Length = Z Length = 2 2 5 - Choose OK. Choose Feature Dialog. If there were more features that needed to be edited. In this case.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-19 . do not save. ÏÏÏ Fit the view.Datum Plane Reference Features - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 Notice that the constraints applied to the datum planes at the time of creation ÏÏÏ continue to control the positioning of the datum planes after the block is edited. Step 7 Close the part.

and with the cursor over the selection. the system will display a direction vector showing the side of the datum plane on which the feature will be created.Form Features created using datum planes for the planar placement face are created normal to the datum plane. Creating Features using Datum Planes . With the cursor over the selection click MB3 and choose Delete from the popĆup menu. These features are positioned in the center of the datum plane as a default if no positioning dimensions are specified. Choose Edit→Feature →Parameters and select the datum plane.When selecting a datum plane in the graphics area. the Flip the Default Side option must be selected. Editing Datum Planes Datum planes may be edited three different ways: D Select the datum plane. 11-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . one of its displayed boundaries must be selected. When a datum plane is selected for the planar placement face. DoubleĆclick on a datum plane. If it is desired that the feature be created in the opposite direction of the default vector. click MB3 and choose Edit Parameters. The side shown can be accepted by selecting the Accept Default Side option. D D Deleting Datum Planes D D Use Edit→ Feature →Delete Select the datum plane.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Selecting and Using Datums Selecting Datum Planes .

Step 1 Open the part pau_ref_2.Cylindrical Faces and Datum Planes This activity will demonstrate the creation of relative datum planes as they apply to a cylindrical face. centered in the feature. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ A hole is required through the cylindrical face at the bottom of the part. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-21 . Relative reference features are required to accomplish this task. Step 2 Save the part as ***_ref_2 where *** represent your initials.Datum Plane Reference Features Activity 2 .

Step 6 Create a datum plane tangent to the outside of the same cylindrical face to use as a placement face for the hole feature. Step 5 Create a Datum Plane through the feature axis. at an angle to the existing plane of 90 degrees. - Choose OK to accept the default value of 90. Step 4 Choose Datum Plane. - 11-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Select the existing Datum Plane.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 3 Start the Modeling Application. - Move the cursor over the outside cylindrical face of the feature at the bottom of the part. Choose Datum Plane. Select the cylindrical axis symbol.

Step 7 Create a center datum plane. - Choose Datum Plane.Datum Plane Reference Features - Select the original Datum Plane. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose Alternate Solution until the new tangent datum plane is in the orientation shown below. - Choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-23 . Select the cylindrical face of the feature at the bottom of the part.

Choose the cylindrical face of the hole through the center of the bottom of the part as the thru face.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Select the two faces shaded below. - 11-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose OK. Choose Simple. Ensure that the direction arrow is pointing into the part. Specify a diameter of 10. Select the tangent datum plane as the placement face. Choose Hole. Step 8 Create a hole feature.

- Choose Format"Move to Layer. Key in 62 and choose OK. Step 9 Move the datum planes to another layer. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Location Datum Placement Datum Thru Face Location Datum - Use Point onto Line positioning to locate the hole centered on the two datum planes shown above. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-25 . Select all the datum planes. Choose OK.Datum Plane Reference Features - Choose OK.

Step 10 Choose File"Close"Save and Close. 11-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ The newly created hole will remain centered in the part due to its relationship with the datum planes that are constrained to the solid body.

Design Intent Create a simple hole that will have its angle parametrically controlled. - Choose Modeling. and through a block. a relative datum plane will be created. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-27 .Feature on a Relative Datum Plane In this activity. which is to be used as a placement plane for a hole at an angle to. in the current Unigraphics session or previous sessions. Recently Opened Parts allows switching back and forth between parts opened recently.Datum Plane Reference Features Activity 3 . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 1 Choose File"Recently Opened Parts and select the part pau_ref_1. Step 2 Create a datum plane through an edge and at an angle to a face/plane. The Recently Opened Parts list may contain up to ten parts.

Face - In the Angle Dynamic Input Field. Edge - Select the top face. key in 20 and press Enter. 11-28 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - A datum plane is created at a 20 degree angle from the top of the block and passes through the selected edge.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose Datum Plane. Select the right edge (not the mid point) and confirm the selection if necessary. Choose OK. and confirm the selection if necessary.

The hole will be normal to the datum plane. Choose Simple for the hole type. - Bottom Face - Choose OK. but will pass through the block at an angle because the datum plane is angled to the block. Now a Simple Thru Hole will be created using the datum plane. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose Hole.5 for the diameter.Datum Plane Reference Features Step 3 Create the hole perpendicular to the datum plane. Select the bottom face of the block as the Thru Face. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-29 . Key in . Select the boundary of the newly created datum plane for the placement face.

11-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The Perpendicular icon dimension. the hole will stay in this position. Select Edge - Key in -. In this case the hole will be positioned to the front and right edge of the model.75 as the positional expression value. - is already selected for the first positioning Select the edge of the block shown as the target edge.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Features are initially positioned in the center of the datum plane. If no other positioning dimensions are specified.

Datum Plane Reference Features - Select the edge of the block shown as the target edge. - DoubleĆclick on the datum plane. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select edge - Accept the value of 2.0 by choosing OK. Change the angle from 20 degrees to 75 degrees. Step 4 Modify the angle parameter of the datum plane. The hole is positioned to the newly constrained location. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-31 .

Can you explain the results? Step 5 Close the part. 11-32 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . do not save. - Try 80 and 90 degrees.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose OK.

The intent is to create a hole feature that goes through one corner of a block and comes out the opposite corner and maintains associativity. where *** represent your initials.Datum Plane Reference Features Activity 4 . Step 5 Create a datum plane with the point and direction method. Step 2 Choose Modeling. Step 3 Create a block that is 200 x 100 x 100 on layer 1. you will create a relative datum plane using the Point and 11 ÏÏÏ Direction option.Creating a Hole Corner to Corner ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ In this activity. Choose Datum Plane Dialog from the toolbar. - Choose Datum Plane. Step 4 Change the work layer to layer 61. ÏÏÏ Step 1 Open the part file pau_seedpart_mm and save it as ***_hole_corners. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-33 .

- Set the Vector Method to Two Points. - Change the Inferred Vector to Vector Constructor.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose Point and Direction. Select this end point. Select the end point as shown to define a point on the datum plane. 11-34 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Key in a diameter value of 25. Step 6 Create a simple hole perpendicular to the datum plane. Select the end points shown below. - Choose Hole.Datum Plane Reference Features Select this end point. Choose Simple for the hole type. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select this end point. - Choose OK twice. through the block. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-35 .

- Point to Point 11-36 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select the far side of the block as the thru face and choose OK. choose Reverse Side.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Thru Face - Select the datum plane as the placement face. Choose Point onto Point as the positioning dimension. Placement Face - If the hole is not going into the block.

With the cursor on the block. - Select the block. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select this end point - Change the work layer to 1 and make layer 61 invisible. click MB3. Step 7 Modify the size of the block. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-37 .Datum Plane Reference Features - Select the end point as shown.

Key in 400. 11-38 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Fit the view and note the associativity of the features.000. - Click on p2=100. Step 8 Save and close the part. Choose OK twice.Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose Edit Parameters.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 11-39 .Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ SUMMARY Datum planes are reference features that are used as construction tools to assist in the creation of features and sketches in locations and orientations where planar placement faces do not exist. In this lesson you: D D D Created associative datum planes. Created a hole feature from an associative datum plane. Reference Features are theoretically infinite in size. but the display is limited to a size slightly larger than that of the solid model. Created an associative datum plane by defining a point and direction.

Datum Plane Reference Features ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 11 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 11-40 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

the ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. This lesson will define another type of reference feature. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-1 .Datum Axis Reference Feature Datum Axis Reference Feature Lesson 12 PURPOSE datum axis. Locate a hole feature using a datum axis. you will be able to: D D Create a Datum Axis.

Datum Axis Reference Feature Datum Axis This option allows a linear reference feature to be created that may be used as a(n): D D Axis of rotation for revolved features. ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D D 12-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Axis of rotation for circular arrays. Pivot axis for datum planes. Dimensional reference for feature position. Directional reference.

the Datum Axis static toolbar displays in the upper left corner of the graphics window. click its icon on the Datum Axis Static toolbar. The main Datum Axis dialog is used to create datum axes that are more complex than those you can create with the Inferred method. ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-3 . To open the main Datum Axis dialog. The static toolbar uses the Inferred method to let you quickly create a datum axis based on your object and constraint selections.Datum Axis Reference Feature User Interface When you first open the Datum Axis option.

Datum Axis Reference Feature Relative Datum Axis The four relative datum axis methods that will be covered in this lesson are: D D D Through Two Points Through Edge Through Cylindrical. 12-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Conical or Revolved Face Axis Intersection of Two Faces/Datum Planes ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D The important function of these Reference Features is that they are associative to existing geometry.

D ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ NOTE: The U Parameter is a value that indicates a position along a theoretical infinite curve. Tab through and set the U Parameter as required.Datum Axis Reference Feature Datum Axis Through Two Points To create a datum axis through 2 points. Select the control points as desired (edges or curves). Values between 0 (zero) and 1 define locations on the selected edge or curve. Choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-5 . do the following: D D D Choose the Datum Axis icon. Values less than 0 (zero) or greater than 1 may also be used.

ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D 12-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Datum Axis Reference Feature Datum Axis Through an Edge or Curve To create a datum axis through an edge or curve. Choose OK. do the following: D D Choose the Datum Axis icon. Select the edge or curve.

D ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-7 . do the following: D D Choose the Datum Axis icon. Select the face.Datum Axis Reference Feature Datum Axis Through a Cylindrical face To create a datum axis through a cylindrical face. Choose OK.

12-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . A datum plane may then be created through the axis using whatever other constraint that applies.Datum Axis Reference Feature Datum Axis Through the Intersection of two Faces To create a datum axis through the intersection of two faces. Select the faces. This requires creation of an associative linear reference feature (datum axis) at the desired intersection to serve as the pivot position. Choose OK. do the following: Choose the Datum Axis icon. D D ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D TIP There is no option to create a datum plane at the intersection of two faces/planes from the datum plane dialog box.

use any of the following methods: D Select a datum axis. Use Edit→Feature →Parameters. click MB3 and choose Edit Parameters. ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-9 . D D Deleting Datum Axes D D Use Edit→ Feature →Delete Select a datum axis. With the cursor over the selection. click MB3 and choose Delete. and with the cursor over the selection.Datum Axis Reference Feature Editing Datum Axes To edit datum axes parameters. Double-click a datum axis in the graphics window.

Datum Axis Reference Feature Activity 1 . - Choose File→Recently Opened Parts.Constraining Locations using Datums In this activity. The hole is to remain centered in the block along the YC axis. ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ZC YC XC A/2 A Step 1 Open the part file. Design Intent A 0. - Choose Datum Plane. a datum axis and datum planes will be added to constrain the pivot location of a hole feature. The origin of the hole will be on the top face and located from the right face. - Choose Modeling. - Change the work layer to 61. 12-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .5 inch diameter hole is to be located in a block. Step 2 Create the Reference Features. The angle of the hole shall be editable in a plane parallel to the front face. Select pau_ref_1.

Datum Axis Reference Feature - Select the right face on the block as shown. Select the back face of the block as shown and confirm. Choose OK. Choose OK. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-11 . ZC YC XC Right Face - In the Offset Dynamic Input Field key in -2 and press Enter. Back Face ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - - ZC YC XC Front Face - Select the front face of the block as shown and confirm. Choose Datum Plane.

Select the datum plane as shown below. - Choose Datum Axis.Datum Axis Reference Feature A center datum plane is created. A datum axis is created at the intersection of the top of the block and the associative datum plane. ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ZC YC XC Top Face Datum Plane - Choose OK. 12-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select the top face as shown below. - Choose Datum Plane.

ZC YC XC Right Face - ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select the Datum Axis.Datum Axis Reference Feature - Select the right face of the block as shown. In the Angle Dynamic Input Field key in 45 and press Enter. Choose OK. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-13 .

- ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Step 3 Create a Thru Hole. Choose OK. Select the newly created datum plane. - Choose the Simple icon. In the Offset Dynamic Input Field key in 1 and press Enter.Datum Axis Reference Feature - Choose Datum Plane. Fit the view. - Choose Hole. 12-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

confirm and choose OK. Select the edge of the datum plane as shown.5 for the Diameter. - Choose Point onto Line. The tool solid for the hole appears in the display. Select the datum axis as the target edge.Datum Axis Reference Feature - Enter . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-15 . Datum Plane ZC YC XC ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Bottom Face - Select the bottom face of the block as the Thru Face. - Choose the Point onto Line. A positioning dimension appears in the graphics area with a value of 0.

Datum Axis Reference Feature - Select the center datum plane as shown and choose OK. The hole will always remain on the datum axis and stay centered in the block. 12-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ZC YC XC Select this Datum Plane The hole is located.

The angle of the hole changes. ZC YC XC ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Change the angle from 45 degrees to 20 degrees.Datum Axis Reference Feature Step 4 Modify the angle parameter of the datum plane. but the point of entry remains the same. Choose OK. - DoubleĆclick on the datum plane indicated below. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-17 .

Datum Axis Reference Feature Step 5 Change the Location of the Datum Axis. Do not save the part file. ZC ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ YC XC - Change the Offset from -2 to -3 and choose OK. 12-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ZC YC XC Step 6 Choose File"Close"All Parts. - DoubleĆclick on the datum plane indicated below.

Step 1 Open the part pau_datumaxis_1 and start the Modeling application. - Use the third mouse button popĆup menu to change the Display Mode to Wireframe. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-19 . Choose Format"Layer Settings and make the display of ALL layers Selectable. ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 2 Investigate the model.Relative Datum Axes This activity will demonstrate the difference in positional associativity between Point Direction and Datum Axis when either is used to define the rotation axis of an instance array.Datum Axis Reference Feature Activity 2 .

Choose the Feature Dialog button. Select the BLOCK(0) feature and choose OK. The pattern on the right was created by specifying the relative datum axis to revolve the pattern about. Change the X Length to 5 and press Tab. The central hole in each pattern is located associatively to the relative datum planes in the part. - Choose Edit"Feature"Parameters from the main menu bar. Change the Y Length to 10 and choose OK.Datum Axis Reference Feature The model contains two identical hole patterns. ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 3 Modify the model. - 12-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose OK to dismiss the feature Edit Parameters dialog box. The hole pattern on the left in the graphic was created by specifying a point in space and a vector to revolve the pattern about.

Datum Axis Reference Feature - Choose OK to update the model. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-21 . ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ The model updates to reflect the change. Notice that the hole pattern on the left does not update as expected. This is due to this hole pattern being created with a nonĆassociative reference point and direction vector.

The hole pattern on the right that depends on the relative datum axis to define the rotation point and vector updates as expected. ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 4 Choose File"Close"All Parts. but the nonĆassociative specified point in space does not change.Datum Axis Reference Feature The left hole pattern maintained its relationship to the objects used to define it. Do not save the part file. 12-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

In this lesson you: D D Created a Datum Axis.Datum Axis Reference Feature SUMMARY A Datum Axis is a linear reference feature that is used as an aid in the construction of other features. ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 12-23 . Positioned features using a Datum Axis.

Datum Axis Reference Feature ÏÏÏ 12 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 12-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Apply geometric constraints to sketches. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-1 . Create sketch curves. Identify constraints. you will be able to: Create a sketch. Convert a sketch curve to reference. OBJECTIVES D D D D D D Upon completion of this lesson.Sketching Sketching Lesson 13 PURPOSE To introduce the method of creating a sketch and free hand sketching of curves. Apply dimensional constraints to sketches.

or none of the constraints required to fully capture the design intent. constitute the essence of constraint based modeling. or to define sections for free form features such as a swept feature or a through curves lofted surface. all. 13-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Dimensional and geometric constraints may be used to establish a design intent as well as provide the ability to perform parameter driven changes. A profile may contain some. Using a set of rules applied by the user. These rules. Profiles may be used to produce extruded or revolved features.Sketching What is a sketch? A sketch is a feature that is intended to contain a collection of two dimensional curves. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Geometric relations may be established between the curves within a profile as well as with curves in other profiles and model geometry such as edges or datums. called constraints. a sketch parametrically controls the two dimensional profile. a very powerful portion of Unigraphics solid modeling.

this approach is the quickest way to build features and still have a sufficient level of associativity.Sketching Why sketch? Sketched profiles possess a higher level of control over features. Since sketches do not require constraining. The inherent ability to solve a sketch in real time means that. as rules are applied. Another reason is when there is a need to iterate through a number of various solutions to validate a certain design intent. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-3 . the sketch objects change and move to reflect the effect that the assigned rule has on the geometry. The most obvious reason for sketching is when a design intent is well known and constraints can be quickly applied to capture that intent. it will automatically move when the position of the placement face/datum is changed. Once a sketch is placed on a face or datum plane. thus automating the propagation of changes. This gives the user the ability to quickly change profiles of features created using sketch curves.

but there would be no parametric control over the shape. The Unigraphics sketcher gives the user the ability to sketch shapes that are not available as standard form features.Sketching When should a sketch be used? Unigraphics users should sketch whenever they have a need for parametrically controlled curves. This could be accomplished with explicit curves. The user might also consider sketching when a combination of features used to create the desired shape makes the shape difficult to edit. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Most features of solid models can be created using combinations of form features.

Sketching When there is a commonly used shape that varies in size from part to part. Sketches may be used as base features of a model if the shape lends itself to extruded or revolved geometry. a sketch as part of a user defined feature should be considered. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-5 .

Consider them for guide paths for swept features.Sketching Sketches may be used in a number of different ways. 13-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . D As a general rule. or as section curves for free form features. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ The added advantage of being able to quickly and easily change the geometry based on rules that the designer applies should be a large part of the determination of when to sketch.Known design changes or iterations. Potential Areas for Change . and their effects on the part configuration. including engineering and design rules that determine the detail configuration of the part. An important aspect of modeling that helps the user decide when to use a sketch is defining the design intent of the model. the more likely there are benefits from sketching. The design intent consists of two items: D Design Considerations .The geometric requirements on the actual part. the more design considerations and potential areas for change.

they are listed in the Model Navigator and any edits supported by the Model Navigator that are germane to sketches are available. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-7 .Sketching Sketches and the Model Navigator Since sketches are features of the solid model.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The sketcher helps in this endeavor by automating layer control as sketches are activated and deactivated. the work layer is set to the layer assigned to the sketch. As the user subsequently activates the sketch. Unigraphics assigns the current work layer at creation to the sketch.Sketching Sketches and Layers Organizing part files is a very important part of modeling. This automated layer management is designed to ensure that the user does not accidentally construct objects in the active sketch across multiple layers.

Since our goal is to develop a parametric model. The Sketch Plane The first thing that needs to be defined is the plane that the sketch curves will be placed on. before this can be done you must consider the state of the model.Sketching Creating a New Sketch Choosing the Sketch icon starts the sketch function. Is the sketch going to define the base feature or has a base feature already been created? The tool bar shown below is used to define the sketch plane. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 1 Sketch Plane 2 XC-YC Plane 3 YC-ZC Plane 4 XC-ZC Plane 5 Datum Plane 6 Datum CSYS 7 OK 8 Cancel Sketch to Define the Base Feature If the sketch is going to define the base feature then you may define the plane of the sketch by choosing one of the following: D D D D XC-YC Plane ZC-YC Plane ZC-XC Plane Datum CSYS EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-9 . all of the features need to be associative. But.

Choose OK. Sketch Associative to Existing Base Feature If a base feature already exists. Define the horizontal or vertical reference Choose OK.Sketching After the plane is chosen the plane is highlighted in the graphic window. The datum plane may already exist or may be created on the fly. The sketch then chose OK plane is then oriented normal to the graphics screen. D D D 13-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Select the face or datum plane. If you are choosing a face or an existing datum plane: Choose the Sketch Plane icon. You to accept and enter the sketcher function. D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D D D If you are defining a datum plane on the fly: D D Choose the Datum Plane icon Select the required objects to define the datum plane. Define the horizontal or vertical reference Choose OK. then you will define the sketch plane on a planar face or a datum plane of the base feature.

The straight edge is projected to the sketch plane to define the new direction.Sketching Defining the Reference Direction The reference direction is used to specify the horizontal direction on the sketch plane. because vertical is by definition ninety degrees from horizontal. the normal of the sketch plane may be changed by doubleĆclicking on the ZC axis. There are times when no linear object is pointing in the desired horizontal direction. the system is able to interpret where the desired horizontal direction is when using a vertical reference. select the axis to redirect then select a straight edge. At these times a vertical reference may be defined. doubleĆclick on it. To specify a new direction. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-11 . Desired Horizontal Direction YC ZC XC Vertical Reference Planar Placement Face Resultant Sketch Orientation The direction of an axis may be changed as follows: D D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ To flip the direction of an axis. This only applies when the sketch plane is being defined by a datum plane. In addition.

This allows downstream users to understand the function of the sketch at a glance. and therefore will select the next available sketch name in the queue as the default.). SKETCH_001.Sketching Naming a Sketch The system requires a unique name for each sketch. A sketch name may be defined during or after the sketch has been created by clicking on the default sketch name and then typing in the new name. etc. The system default from Unigraphics is SKETCH_###" where the pound signs are replaced by the next available number counting up from 000 (SKETCH_000. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ The sketch can also be renamed by: D D Choosing Task→Sketch Properties Using the Model Navigator TIP It is highly recommended that sketches be named in a descriptive manner rather than accepting the default. 13-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Curves created while a sketch is active become associated with the active sketch. In the Model Navigator doubleĆclick on the sketch feature node. select the desired sketch. When using the sketcher. This sketch is called the active sketch. Choose Task→Finish. There are two ways to deactivate an active sketch as follows: D D Select the Finish icon. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-13 . Select the Sketch icon and from the Sketch Name pullĆdown. the sketch must be activated.Sketching The Active Sketch In any given part there may be numerous sketches of different features at different orientations. There are three ways to activate a sketch: D D D DoubleĆclicking on a sketch curve. only one sketch may be worked on at a time. When returning to a sketch to add to or modify a profile.

Choose OK. D Sketch on an Existing Face or Datum Plane D Choose the Sketch icon. Choose the Sketch icon. Choose the Sketch Plane icon. D D D D D 13-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Define the horizontal or vertical reference Name the sketch. Choose OK. Define the sketch plane by one of the following. D D D D D D XC-YC Plane ZC-YC Plane ZC-XC Plane Datum CSYS ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D Name the sketch. Select the face or datum plane.Sketching Sketch Creation Steps Sketch for a Base Feature D Set the work layer for the sketch.

Unigraphics created a fixed Datum Plane on the specified sketch plane and two fixed Datum Axes along its major axes to support the new sketch. key in base and press Enter. Step 2 Create a sketch for a base feature.Sketch Creation In this activity you will practice the creation of a sketch for a base feature. Choose Sketch. Choose OK. Step 3 Close the part do not save. Choose the YC-ZC Plane.Sketching Activity 1 . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-15 . Step 4 Open pau_skt_creation and start the modeling application. - - - The sketch is created. Step 5 Create a sketch on an existing face. The system has manipulated it so that XC is parallel to the horizontal direction and YC is vertical. - Make layer 21 the work layer. Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in and start the modeling application. Click on the sketch name. a sketch that is to be defined on an existing face and a sketch where the datum plane is created on the fly. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Choose Finish. Notice the WCS. - Make layer 21 the work layer.

Step 6 Create a curve on the sketch plane. Click on the sketch name.Sketching - Choose Sketch. Select the Face shown below. Select this face. - Choose OK. - Choose Line. key in skt1 and press Enter. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Horizontal Reference The 2D sketch plane indicator appears and the XĆAxis is active (highlighted). Select the horizontal reference at the location shown above. 13-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The Sketch Plane - icon is already selected.

and layer 1 selectable. Step 7 Change the orientation of the face that defines the sketch plane. - Replace the view with the TFRĆTRI view. . Change_Me=1. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-17 . - Choose Finish. Make layer 22 the work layer. layer 21 invisible.Sketching - Create the line as shown below.5. Rotate the part and notice how the line remained associative to the face. Click here . and change the value to 3. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Step 8 Create a sketch on a datum plane. . Choose Sketch. Choose OK. Select the expression. then Click here. - Choose Tools"Expression.

13-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Sketching - Choose Datum Plane. A center datum plane is created. Select the 2 shaded faces shown below. The 2D sketch plane indicator appears and the XĆAxis is active (highlighted). ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose OK.

- Choose OK.Sketching - Select the horizontal reference at the location shown below. key in skt2 and press Enter. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose Finish. Horizontal Reference - Click on the sketch name. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-19 .

DoubleĆclick on the sketch curve (1) shown below. Sketch SKT1 is activated and oriented in the graphic window.Sketching Step 9 Activate existing sketches. 1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Fit the view (MB3). 13-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . This step will demonstrate 2 ways of activating existing sketches. - Choose Finish. - Make layer 21 selectable.

Step 10 Close the part. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-21 . Sketch SKT2 is activated and oriented in the graphic window. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose Finish. Choose SKT2 from the sketch name pullĆdown.Sketching - Choose Sketch. do not save.

Sketching Sketch Curve Creation Sketch curves are created via the Sketch Curve tool bar. if any. Sketch Curve Tool Bar Profile Line Arc Circle ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Infer Constraints Setting Dialog Vertical Midpoint Horizontal Perpendicular Tangent Parallel Collinear Coincident Point on Curve Equal Radius Point on String Concentric Equal Length As you create the curves a symbol will appear near the curve being created to represent the constraint that will be applied. As curves are created geometric constraints are assigned to the curves relative to the Infer Constraint Settings. 13-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

snap angle is only applied when using inferred cursor location. Now as you move the cursor. is doing so parallel to the reference curve. you press MB2. Cursor Location is always available. Snap Angle ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ The Infer Point Tool Bar The Infer Point tool bar is displayed when creating most of the curve types in the sketcher. effectively creating a 6° tolerance zone by default. The default snap angle is set to 3° and is user definable between 0° and 20°. When the Infer Point toolbar is active. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-23 . For example. the new line that is rubber banding. you are creating a line and the parallel symbol appears. It is used to snap" a line to horizontal or vertical. Snap Angle The snap angle is a global preference set in the Sketch Preferences dialog box that is applied any time curves are being created. This angular tolerance is defined on either side of horizontal or vertical from the first specified location. so that you have more control over the selection of locations.Sketching Locking a Constraint When a constraint symbol appears during curve creation you may lock in that constraint by pressing MB2. When creating lines outside of the sketcher. regardless of the point types turned on.

Sketching Alignment Lines While Creating Curves In the process of creating a curve. The icons at the upper left corner of the graphics screen allow you to switch between lines and arcs. New curve being created. Profile is accessed by choosing the Profile icon on the Sketch Curve tool bar. and allow you to switch between entering X-Y locations and entering parameters. the system will display an alignment line. if you are horizontally or vertically opposite a control point. Existing Curve Alignment Lines ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Profile Tool The Profile tool allows creation of a string of lines and arcs. without having to specify a start for each curve after the first curve is created. Line Arc XY Parameters 13-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

You can also switch to arc creation by using press-drag-release with MB1. the system will revert to creating a line. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-25 .Sketching The default settings are: D D Line creation X-Y location Once you have created the first curve (line or arc). You can change this any time you wish. The circle-X" symbol controls the direction in which the arc will be created.

the string mode can be broken by clicking MB2. Circle-X Symbol Arc originating from top quadrant Arc originating from Left quadrant ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Arc originating from right quadrant Arc originating from bottom quadrant As you are creating curves with the profile tool. Creating Lines Line creation is accessed by choosing the Line icon tool bar. on the Sketch Curve 13-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and exit in a different quadrant of the symbol.Sketching If the desired arc is in the wrong direction. re-cross the end of the line (with the cursor).

and entering parameters. enter a radius value and press Enter. Locate the start. the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics screen give you two sets of options. For Arc by 3 Points: creating the arc: D D D there are several combinations of methods for Locate the start. the system will switch to the Parameters mode. and then locate a point on the arc. and the second is for the XY-Location/Parameters choice. The first is creation method. locate the end. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-27 . There are several combinations of methods for creating a line: D D D D Locate the start. and then locate the end. and then locate the end. But you can still give an end location without changing back to XY. Locate the start.Sketching Once in line creation. Enter the parameters and then locate the start. locate the end point and then determine which of the 4 options you wish to create. Locate the start. on the Sketch Curve ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Once in arc creation. Creating Arcs Arc creation is accessed by choosing the Arc icon tool bar. Once you indicate a start location. but before the point on arc. but enter the radius value after locating the end point. the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics screen give you two options: Location (by cursor location or entering an X-Y location). The same as the previous. enter one parameter. and then enter the length and angle parameters.

The circle is created.Sketching For Arc by Center and End Points: methods for creating the arc: D D D there are also several combinations of Locate the center. and press Enter. Creating Circles ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Circle creation is accessed by choosing the Circle icon Curve tool bar. enter radius and sweep angle values and press Enter. and you are in multiple circle creation mode. the system will switch to the Enter Parameters mode. Indicate another center. Press Enter. The circle is created.) Locate the center. and locate the direction for the sweep. enter a radius. on the Sketch Once in circle creation. enter a radius value and press Enter.just indicate another location for a circle center. drag the radius until you get the size you want. and locate the end point. locate the start point. locate the start of the sweep. For Circle by Center and Radius: circles: D D there are several methods for creating Locate the center. D 13-28 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . the icons in the upper left corner of the graphics screen give you two sets of options. locate the start point. Locate the center. Locate the center. (The start point location determines the radius. The first is creation method. You are then in multiple circle creation mode . and the second is for the location/parameters choice. Locate the center. and then locate a point on the circumference of the circle. Once you indicate a first location. locate the end point. But you can still give a location without changing back to XY.

then choose which of the two options you want by cursor location. Once you indicate a first location. Locate two points on the circumference of the circle. enter a radius value and press Enter. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-29 . But you can still give a location without changing back to XY. the system will switch to the enter Parameters mode.Sketching For Circle by 3 Points: D D there are also two methods for creating the circle: Locate three points on the circumference of the circle.

- Choose Infer Constraints Settings. - Start the Modeling application. 13-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose the Sketch icon. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose OK to accept the XC-YC Plane.Using the Sketch Profile Tool Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in and save it as ***_skt_profile_1 where *** represent your initials. Step 3 Create a sketch on the XC-YC plane. Step 4 Set the Infer Constraints Setting. Step 2 Change the Work Layer to 21.Sketching Activity 2. You are going to set the Infer Constraints Setting to make available only the constraints that you may want to apply during curve creation.

and then move the cursor into - Key in -4 for the XC value and press Tab. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-31 . - Choose OK. Step 5 Create a Profile. In this step you will create the sketch curves shown below using the Profile tool. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose the Profile tool the graphics window.Sketching - Set the dialog as shown below.

- Press MB2 to lock in the horizontal constraint. Horizontal Symbol Notice the horizontal symbol indicating the constraint that is going to be applied to the line. - Create the arc by indicating a location with MB1 as shown below. Now notice that as you move the cursor around the rubberĆbanding line remains horizontal. You are now in arc creation mode. Notice the alignment line that aligns the center point and end points. Move the cursor so that the rubberĆbanding line snaps to the horizontal orientation as shown below.Sketching - Key in -2 for the YC value and press Enter. you are going to create the first arc. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Move the cursor to a position that defines a Length of approximately 3 inches and click MB1. 13-32 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor straight up from the end point of the last line and then release. Next.

5 for the Radius and press Tab 2 times. but you will use a different method. Next you will create another arc just like the first one. Click in the graphic window to apply. - Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor up and to the right from the end point of the last line and then release. - Key in . Create a horizontal line approximately 1 inch long by indicating the end point with MB1. Key in 180 for the Sweep Angle and press Enter.Sketching - Create a horizontal line approximately 2 inches long by indicating the end point with MB1. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-33 .

Key in 145 for the Sweep Angle and press Enter.Sketching - Create the line as shown below. 13-34 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .875 for the Radius and press Tab 2 times. Click in the graphic window to apply. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Key in 1. drag and release. - Start the creation of an arc in the orientation shown below by holding MB1 down.

- Start the creation of an arc in the orientation shown below by holding MB1 down. The line should also be approximately 2 inches long. Click in the graphic window to apply. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-35 .5 for the Radius and press Tab 2 times. Key in 90 for the Sweep Angle and press Enter.Sketching - With MB1 indicate a cursor location. so that horizontal and tangent constraints will be applied to the line. The next line to be created is to have a perpendicular constraint relative to the 35° angle line. as shown below. drag and release. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Key in 1.

- With MB1 indicate a cursor location as shown below. Note the alignment lines and the perpendicular constraint symbol. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13-36 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Sketching - Move the cursor over the line indicated below. Move the cursor over this line.

Note the alignment line and the parallel constraint symbol.5 inches long as shown below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - With MB1 indicate a cursor location as shown below.Sketching - Create a horizontal line approximately 1. - Close the profile by selecting the end point of the first line. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-37 . - Move the cursor over the lines indicated below. Move the cursor over these lines.

Step 6 Save and close the part.Sketching - Choose Finish. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13-38 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Select one curve. Select two curves individually. and then drag the size and quadrant. and drag the size and quadrant. It is for controlling whether or not the original curves are trimmed. You can also create a fillet between two parallel lines. D D D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-39 . Drag (with MB1) across the two curves you want to fillet. and select the second curve. arcs or conics. on the Sketch Curve Once in fillet creation. Select two curves individually. enter a radius value. There are several methods for creating Fillets: D Select two curves with a single selection (at their intersection). The size of the fillet is governed by where the curves are selected. and the indicate the desired quadrant. You can create fillets between lines. enter a radius value.Sketching Creating Fillets Fillet creation is accessed by choosing the Fillet icon tool bar. there is a single icon in the upper left corner of the graphics screen.

by using the crayon" select method. by using ctrl-select to select the desired boundary curve. The system will preview the results in pre-selection color. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ You can also trim multiple curves at one time. You can also select more than one bounding curve using the ctrl-select method. 13-40 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Sketching Quick Trim and Quick Extend Quick Trim Quick Trim will trim any curve to the closest curve in the sketch. You can also select a specific curve to trim to. Hold down MB1 and drag across the portion of curves you want to trim away.

both the arc on the left and the spline on the right were control-selected as boundary curves. In the example above. If one of the boundary curves is later trimmed to the line. appropriate constraints are automatically created.Sketching In the example below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ If you trim an arc to a line that is tangent. . the Point on Curve constraint would change to Coincident. the center section is previewed as the portion to be removed. and one Colinear constraint would be added. (between the two boundary curves). With the cursor on the top line. . When a curve is trimmed. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-41 . two Point on Curve Constraints.

13-42 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The curve being extended must extend to an actual intersection with the boundary curve. You can extend multiple curves at one time. when you use Quick Extend. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Before After You can also select specific boundary curves by using the control-select method.Sketching the tangency constraint will be retained. As with Quick Trim. arcs and conics to the closest curve in the sketch. Quick Extend Quick Extend will extend lines. by using the crayon" select method. appropriate constraints are automatically created. The system will preview the results in pre-selection color. Hold down MB1 and drag across the ends of curves you want to extend.

Step 4 Make sure Trim Inputs is on (depressed). - Double-click with MB1 on any of the sketch curves. You will be using this sketch geometry to create fillets. - Enter 4 in the Radius field on the graphics screen. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 3 Choose the Fillet icon.0 millimeter fillets in the upper left and lower left corners of the sketch. Step 5 Create a 4 millimeter fillet using lines L16 and L20. You first want to create 4. and do it with a single select. Step 2 Activate the sketch.Creating Fillets Step 1 Open the part file pau_skt_fillet_1. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-43 .Sketching Activity 3 . trimming the lines. and start the Modeling application. and press Enter.

by selecting at their intersection. - Drag the cursor around the screen and notice that you can select which quadrant you want. with a single select. Select the two lines at their intersection. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 6 Create a four millimeter fillet using lines L16 and L17. and this time do not trim the lines being filleted. - Turn off Trim Inputs. Select in the lower right quadrant to place the fillet in the desired quadrant.Sketching - Select both lines at the same time. 13-44 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

The 4. - With MB1 held down. drag across the two lines as below: (This is another method of selecting the curves to be filleted. The curves crossed with the crayon" are the curves selected.Sketching - Select in the upper right quadrant. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-45 . Step 7 Create a 4 millimeter fillet between lines L17 and L18.) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Notice that the 4 millimeter radius was used. Select by dragging across the two lines.0 Radius value should still be in the text field on the graphics screen.

13-46 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . as shown below: ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ It used the selection location of the curves to determine the radius. Step 9 Create a fillet between lines L18 and L19. - Use Backspace to erase the 4 in the text field. - Drag (with MB1). and drag the size and quadrant. but his time do NOT use a radius value. - Individually select the lines L18 and L19.Sketching Step 8 Create another fillet between lines L18 and L20 by using the crayon". Drag the cursor around the screen.

Step 10 Close the part file. - Choose Finish.Sketching - Select a location to create an arc similar to the one shown below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-47 .

Step 2 Change the Work Layer to 21 so that the part file will be compliant with class standards. Click on the sketch name. - Choose Sketch. In this sketch we do not want to apply any constraints at this time.Sketching a Gasket Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in and save it as ***_gasket_1 where *** represent your initials. 13-48 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . key in s21_profile and press Enter. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose OK to accept the XC-YC Plane. Step 4 Set the Infer Constraints Setting. Step 3 Create a sketch. - Choose Infer Constraints Settings.Sketching Activity 4 . so you will toggle all constraints off. - Enter the Modeling application.

Sketching - Set the dialog as shown below. Step 5 Create the sketch curves to define the main profile. - Choose OK. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose Profile. Create the 4 lines as shown below. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-49 .

as shown below. 13-50 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The system also displays tangent symbols at the 2 tangent points. at positions 1. - Turn on Trim Inputs. 2. Select the lines. and then a cursor location at 3. 2 3 1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ A fillet is created and the lines are trimmed to the tangent points.Sketching - Choose Fillet.

Select the lines. and then a cursor location at 3. as shown below. 3 1 2 - Key in 1 for the Radius value and press Enter. 2.Sketching - Select the lines. as shown below. at positions 1 and 2. at positions 1. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 1 2 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-51 .

Sketching

The 1 inch radius fillet was created and the lines trimmed to the tangent points.

-

Select the lines, as shown below, at positions 1 and 2.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

2

1

Step 6 Define the holes of the gasket. Choose Infer Constraints Settings. Toggle Coincident Choose OK. on.

-

-

13-52

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching

-

Choose Circle. At the approximate center of the profile, click and drag to create a circle similar to the one shown below.

-

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ Move the cursor over and along the arc on the left side of the ÏÏÏ profile, until the arc center symbol (1) appears, then click
and drag to create a circle with a diameter of approximately 0.75.

1

The system now will infer a constraint of coincident between the arc and the circle.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-53

Sketching -

Create the circle for the opposite side using the same method.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

The sketch of the profile is now complete. The shape and design intent will be further refined in a later activity with the application of dimensional and geometric constraints.

-

Choose Finish.

Step 7 Move the reference features to the appropriate layer to conform with class standards.
-

Choose Format→Move to Layer from the main menu. Select the datum plane and 2 datum axes. Choose OK. Enter layer number 61 as the destination layer to move the objects to and choose OK.

Step 8 Choose File"Close"Save and Close.

13-54

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching

Activity 5 - Using Quick Trim and Quick Extend
Step 1 Open the part file pau_skt_quick_1, and start the Modeling application.

Step 2 Trim curves with Quick Trim.
-

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

DoubleĆclick on one of the sketch curves to activate the sketch.

-

Choose Quick Trim.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-55

Sketching -

Select the line where the arrow is pointing in the illustration below.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

-

Hold MB1 down and drag the cursor across the 2 curves as shown below.

13-56

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching -

CtrlĆSelect the curves labeled 1 and 2 for boundaries. Select on curves 3 and 4 to trim the center portion.

1

3 4 2

Step 3 Extending curves with Quick Extend.
-

Choose Quick Extend. Place the cursor on the arc at location 1 as labeled below.
1

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-57

Sketching

The status line informs you that the system cannot extend the curve. This is because there is no other curve that would intersect with the arc.
-

Place the cursor on the arc at location 2 as labeled below.

2

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

This time notice how the system provides a preview of the extension.
-

Select the arc at location 2 to create the extension.

Step 4 Continue to experiment with Quick Trim and Quick Extend until the instructor is ready to continue.

-

Choose Finish.

Step 5 Close the part file.

13-58

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching

Sketch Points
Sketch objects are defined by theoretical points. A line, for instance, is defined by two points. The sketcher attempts to mathematically solve for the location of the points by analyzing the constraints (rules) that are placed on objects. The points that the sketch solver analyzes are referred to as sketch points. By controlling the locations of these sketch points the line itself may be controlled. There are various ways to control these points. The sketch points associated with different types of curves are illustrated in the graphic below.

Line

Fillet Arc Circle

Spline

+ Point Ellipse

DegreeĆofĆFreedom Arrows (DOF)
Degree of freedom arrows occur at sketch points to indicate that the solver is unable to fully define where the sketch point exists on the sketch plane. DOF arrows are only displayed during the creation of dimensions or constraints; they are yellow, and their base emanates at the sketch point with arrowheads pointing in both the horizontal or vertical directions (when the sketch point has no constraints). An arrow pointing to the right means that the sketch point in question is free to move in the horizontal direction, both to the right and left. An arrow pointing up means that the sketch point in question is free to move in the vertical direction, both up and down. Should there be DOF arrows at a given point in both directions, the point is free to move in both directions.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-59

Sketching

These arrows provide visual feedback to the user while in the process of constraining the sketch.

(no display) Undefined in X and Y Directions Undefined in Y Direction only Undefined in X Direction only Defined in X and Y Directions

The system removes DOF arrows as rules are written that define the location of the sketch points.
D

Arc - Arcs have sketch points at the center and at either end. These sketch points as well as the radius of the arc may be defined if the user so desires. Circle - Circles may have the center point as well as a radius or diameter defined. Ellipse -An ellipse may have the location of its center defined; also, the parameters for the size and orientation of the ellipse are stored for future editing. Fillet - Fillets are a specialized case of arc; by definition a fillet is tangent to the objects with which it is associated. The system applies this rule as the fillet is created. Fillets may have the same information defined as other arcs, and in some cases the tangency that is assigned will define the endpoints. Line - Lines may have the sketch points at either end defined. Point - Points may be defined relative to other objects or at specific locations in space. Spline - Degree three splines may have their defining points located. Slopes of the spline at the defining points may also be defined. Splines that are of a degree other than three may be added to sketches; however, since their defining points are not located at their knot points, there is no way to locate their defining points using constraints.

D

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

D

D

D D

D

13-60

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching

Constraining Sketches
Design Intent
The power in sketching is derived from the ability to capture design intent. This is accomplished by setting up rules that dictate how sketch objects will react to changing input. These rules are called constraints. As many or as few constraints as necessary may be applied to cause the sketch profile to update in the manner desired. Unigraphics sketches are not required to be fully constrained. A group of these rules may be thought of as a constraint set. The constraint set is comprised of two types of constraints, dimensional and geometric and are accessed from the Sketch Constraints tool bar.

The Sketch Constraints Tool Bar

Create Constraints Dimensions

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Creating Dimensional Constraints
A dimensional constraint establishes the size of a sketch object (such as the length of a line or radius of an arc) or the scalar relationship between two objects (such as the distance between two points). Dimensional constraints appear in the graphics window. Unlike drafting dimensions, changing the value of the dimensional constraints changes the shape and or size of the sketch objects that are controlled by the sketch points. This changes the feature of the solid model that the sketch curves control.

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-61

Sketching

The Dimensions icon

accesses the Dimensions dialog.

You can use the dialog to create and edit dimensions, as well as change some of the preferences. There are nine icons located near the top of the dialog box. The top leftĆhand icon is the most useful as it infers the dimension type based on the objects that are selected and where their dimension text is located. It is also the default icon. The other eight icons are supplied for times when the system is unable to infer the desired dimension type. These different options are filters" that when selected will only allow a specific dimension type to be created. Because of this, certain types of geometry may not be selectable if they do not coincide with the dimension type selected. As dimensional constraints are being created, the dimension, its extension lines, and arrows are displayed as soon as the geometry has been selected. Drag the dimension to the desired location and place it by clicking the left mouse button. During some dimensioning the system infers a dimension type before all of the geometry has been selected. In these instances continue to select geometry until the correct dimension type is displayed, or select the icon for the dimension type desired and reselect the geometry.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

13-62

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching

As dimensional constraints are being created, the system creates an expression. This expression's name and value are displayed in the current expression fields of the Constraints dialog box. This places the value field in overstrike mode so the user may enter the desired dimensional constraint. A slider is also provided below the value text and may be used to change the value.
Enter new name Enter new statement or numeric value

Use slider bar to change value

Below the value slider are two option menus for manipulating the appearance of the dimensional constraint. The leftĆhand option menu is for defining how the text and arrows of the dimensional constraint will be displayed. Options are for automatic text placement where the system decides the appearance, manual text placement with the arrows inside the extension lines, or manual text placement with the arrows outside the extension lines.
Auto Placement

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Manual Placement, Arrows In Manual Placement, Arrows Out

The rightĆhand option menu is for defining whether the dimension's leader is attached to the right or left of the dimension text.
Leader From Left

Leader From Right

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-63

Sketching

Both of these option menus may be used before, during or after dimension creation.

Text Height
The display height of the dimension text is controlled by the text entry field at the bottom of the dialog box. This value may be changed any time the Dimensions dialog box is active. The default value is .150 inches. There are no limits to values for this field. Modifying this value changes all the dimensional constraints in the active sketch.

Dimensional Constraint Types

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

Inferred - Allows the system to select any of the dimension types listed below, (except perimeter) based on object selection and cursor location. Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, arcs, datum planes, and datum axes are selectable using this method. Horizontal - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint between two points with respect to the XĆaxis of the sketch coordinate system. Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, and arcs are selectable using this method.

YC ZC XC

.500

4.000

13-64

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

EDS All Rights Reserved

Unigraphics NX

Sketching

Vertical - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint between two points with respect to the YĆaxis of the sketch coordinate system. Points, points on sketch curves (including spline knot points), edges, lines, and arcs are selectable using this method.

YC

2.000

ZC

XC

.500

Parallel - Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint directly between two sketch entities. The parallel dimension is the shortest distance between the two points. All sketch objects are selectable using this method. The points selected will be inferred from the objects selected.
Arcs selected for 1.23 dimension

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ

1.23

.500

Line endpoints selected for .500 dimension

EDS All Rights Reserved

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual

13-65

8502 .507 13-66 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Used to filter the system to specify an angular dimensional constraint between two lines.6302 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Angular . the second will be a point inferred from the next object selected. p0=45. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the ends of the lines nearest the cursor upon selection.Used to filter the system to specify a distance constraint measured perpendicular to a selected line and a point or the normal distance. .Sketching Perpendicular . The first object selected using this method must be linear. Only linear objects may be selected with this method.

e.Sketching Radius . There is no graphical representation of this constraint on the graphics screen.The Perimeter constraint is used to constrain the collective lengths of lines and arcs to a desired value. i.250 Diameter. After the desired curves are selected the user chooses OK. Editing Dimensional Constraints` The editing of dimensional constraints may be achieved as follows: EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-67 .456. Perimeter_p7=6. a dimensional constraint is created and its name is prefixed with Perimeter. p1=2.Used to filter the system to specify a diametral size constraint for an arc or circle. Only arcs and circles may be selected with this method. Only arcs and circles may be selected with this method. R p4=0.568 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Perimeter.Used to filter the system to specify a radial size constraint for an arc or circle.

Value . Text height . As dimensional constraints are edited.Select a different option from the option menu. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ NOTE: The name and value of a dimensional constraint may also be edited by using the Expression Editor. Position . Additional editing that may be done with the Dimensions dialog as listed below: D D D D D D Name .Enter a new name in the text entry field. Delay Evaluation At times it is advantageous not to have the geometry change until all of the dimensional constraints have been modified.Sketching D D To edit the value. Update Model The Update Model icon located on the Sketch tool bar may be used to force the model to update without leaving the sketch function. simply double click on the dimension and edit the value in the text box and press Enter.Select a different option from the option menu. simply drag a dimension's location.Enter a new value in the text entry field or use the slider. Sketches are evaluated automatically when the Constraints dialog box is exited. Evaluate Sketch The Evaluate Sketch button is provided so that the user may control sketch evaluation when the Delay Evaluation toggle is on.Enter a new text size in the text entry field. The Delay Evaluation is a toggle on the Sketch tool bar that controls this condition.Click and hold the left mouse button to drag the dimension to its new position. Leader side . 13-68 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Text placement method . the constraints are evaluated and the geometry is modified. To edit the position.

). Then the icons for constraints will remain on the screen after you choose the first constraint. The Create Constraints icon There is no dialog. A toggle switch labeled Retain Dimension is supplied on the Sketch Preferences dialog box to enable the display should there be a need to display dimensions without an active sketch (such as to reference expression names between sketches. Geometric constraints have no editable numeric values. If you wish to assign multiple constraints at one time. etc.Sketching When a sketch is deactivated the display of the dimensional constraints is disabled. and then choosing the desired constraint icon from the upper left corner of the graphics screen. You can use MB2 to cancel creation of constraints . or that several arcs have the same radius). ÏÏÏ 13 activates the process of creating constraints. simply dictates that the line stay at the angle it is at when the constraint is applied. plotting. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-69 . Creating Geometric Constraints A geometric constraint establishes a geometric characteristic of a sketch object (such as defining a line as being horizontal) or the type of relationship between two or more objects (such as requiring that two lines be parallel or perpendicular. for instance. a constant angle constraint. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Constraints are created by selecting the geometry. you can control-select the objects. Only icons for constraints that are possible for the selected curves will be displayed.

the symbols may not be displayed. Symbols for Coincident. The Show All Constraints icon constraints in the active sketch. The other symbols are not displayed at all times. when the curves are very small on the screen (the view is zoomed out). The following is a definition of each of the available geometric constraints: Coincident .Defines two or more linear objects as lying on or passing through the same theoretical straight line. Tangent.Defines two or more points as having the same location. Point on Curve. 13-70 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Midpoint. will display the symbols for all the Sometimes. Collinear .Sketching Listed below are all the possible constraints and their respective icon. and Concentric are always displayed. You may need to zoom in to see them. Fixed Collinear Horizontal Vertical Parallel Perpendicular Equal Length Constant Angle Concentric Tangent Equal Radius Coincident Point on Curve Midpoint Point on String ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Constant Length Displaying Constraint Symbols Constraint symbols are displayed when a sketch is active.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-71 . Equal Radius . depending on the type of geometry selected. Spline .removes all of its rigid DOFs (it cannot be rigidly rotated or rigidly dragged).locates the centerpoint. circle center.locates the endpoint.Defines fixed characteristics for geometry.locates the control point.locates the centerpoint.locates the centerpoint and defines the radii. Elliptical arc . Equal Length . It cannot be created manually. Spline control point . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Horizontal . elliptical arc center. Ellipse center . Point .Defines the location of a sketch point as coincident with the midpoint of a curve.Defines two objects as being mirror images of each other.Sketching Concentric . NOTE: Mirror . select the curve anywhere other than at its end points.Defines a line as horizontal.Defines two or more arcs as having the same center. Constant Angle .Defines a line as having a constant angle. or ellipse center . Constant Length .Defines two or more arcs as having the same radius. Ellipse . as follows: D D D D D D D D D D Arc or circle .defines the location. Fix . Midpoint of Curve .locates the centerpoint and defines the radii.defines the angle and length. Arc center. This constraint is automatically created when the mirror function is used. Line . For the Midpoint of Curve constraint.Defines a line as having a constant length. Arc or elliptical arc endpoint .defines the radius and the location of the centerpoint.Defines two or more lines as being the same length.

Thus constrained. Scale. 13-72 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and another object as being tangent to each other at the selected point. Point on Curve . Tangent . a spline will scale in the horizontal direction while keeping the original dimensions in the vertical direction during modification.Defines two linear objects as being perpendicular to each other. selected at a defining point.A spline will scale proportionally in both the horizontal and vertical when the horizontal length changes.Defines two objects as being tangent to each other. NonĆUniform .Defines two or more linear objects as being parallel to each other.Sketching Parallel . Vertical .Defines a spline.Defines the location of a sketch point as lying on an extracted string. Point on String . Slope of Curve . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Scale.Defines the location of a sketch point as lying on a curve. Perpendicular . Uniform . A Scale constraint may not be mixed with fixing of an internal spline point as the uses of the two different constraint types are mutually exclusive.Defines a line as vertical.

Determines what category of constraints will be listed.Sketching Show/Remove Constraints The Show/Remove Constraints is a tool that aids you in the management of constraints. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-73 . Determines if the filtered constraint will be included or excluded in the list. Determines which objects will have their constraints listed. The constraints may be listed by object/s or all of the constraints of the active sketch may be listed at once. Determines what type of constraints will be listed. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Actions that can be taken on the listed constraints.

Explicit constraints are constraints that the user has created by assignment using the constraints dialog or by virtue of the creation method. 13-74 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . the sketch object will be preĆhighlighted as well as other sketch objects that share the constraint and the constraint marker will appear next to the sketch objects. Uniform Scale. Inferred constraints are the Coincident constraints that the system has inferred and assigned. Fix Concentric Coincident Colinear Point on Curve Point on String Midpoint on Curve Horizontal Vertical Parallel Perpendicular Tangent Equal Length Equal Radius Constant Length Constant Angle Mirror Slope of Curve Scale. NonĆUniform ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Constraint Categories There are two major categories of geometric constraints. The constraint types and their markers are shown in the figure below. The user has the option to list only the Explicit. or Inferred constraints. If the selection ball passes over an object which has no constraints associated with it.Sketching Constraint Interrogation One way to determine what geometric constraints are present is to pass the selection ball over a sketch object. Explicit and Inferred. or both may be listed at the same time. preĆhighlighting does not occur. If the object has a constraint associated with it.

and then choose the Delete icon. simply select the new object. the sketch object(s) that is associated with it is also highlighted in the graphics area. Turn on Select Constraints (on the Selection tool bar). To view constraints associated with a different sketch object. Listing Box Any time there are constraints listed in the list box they may be browsed by selecting the constraint to highlight it. They are: Selected Object Once an object is selected. are listed in the dialog box. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Removing Constraints Constraints may be deleted 3 ways: D Highlight them in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog List box and select Remove Highlighted Constraint(s). Objects may be deselected by holding the shift key down and selecting the object. select the constraint symbol on the graphics screen. the associated constraints.Sketching Constraint Listing The constraints may also be listed in the Show/Remove Constraints dialog by selecting one of the three options at the top of the dialog window. All in Active Sketch List all the constraints of the active sketch. Selected Objects Allows the selection of multiple objects. are listed in the dialog box. The Up and Down arrows on most keyboards will mimic this behavior. Turn on Select Constraints. D D EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-75 . depending on the selected constraint category. and then use MB3→Delete to delete selected constraint. depending on the selected constraint category. When the constraint is highlighted in the list box. select the constraint symbol on the graphics screen. the associated constraints. The Step Up the List and Step Down the List buttons allow easy navigation through the various constraints. depending on the selected constraint category.

Dragging Geometry UnderĆconstrained geometry can be dragged by simply holding down and dragging MB1 while on the selected curve(s) or point(s). the status line lists the constraint condition for the active sketch. Undo takes the creation procedure back one step at a time. allows selection of all objects in the sketch - Select Constraints screen. 13-76 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . A sketch may be fully constrained. When the sketch is under constrained the status line will indicate the number of constraints needed.Sketching Undo The user may access undo from the edit pulldown on the main menu. Selection When in the Sketcher Task Environment. the selection toolbar changes. Constraint Conditions When the Constraints dialog box is active. the third mouse button popĆup menu. or the accelerator keys. under constrained. It has two icons that are only available in the Sketcher. allows selection of constraint symbols on the graphics Deselect All deselects all objects that are currently selected. or over constrained. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select Sketch Objects curves and dimensions.

DegreeĆofĆfreedom arrows are displayed at each point that could not be solved to identify the direction in which that point remains free to move. A sketch is under constrained when there is insufficient information to completely locate each sketch point. The design intent has been captured sufficiently when the constraint set applied to the profile causes it to update in the intended manner. Each time a sketch is evaluated. the system attempts to solve the set of constraints that describe how the geometric objects are positioned and their relationships with each other. It is important to remember that there is no requirement to fully constrain a sketch. In order to completely capture the design intent of a particular profile. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-77 . it may be beneficial to fully constrain the sketch.Sketching A sketch is evaluated each time a constraint is placed upon the sketch. This occurs when the solver is able to completely define all sketch geometry.

The degreeĆofĆfreedom arrow at the top of line A now points in the Y axis direction.Sketching Constraining Example Lines constrained to be horizontal LINE A Lines constrained to be vertical In the profile above. Defining the location of an object may be accomplished in a number of ways. Fixing the location of a point fully defines the location of that point to the solver. or positioning dimensions. or to datum axes using geometric constraints. such as the 3 degree snap angle default for horizontal and vertical lines. For instance. some elements are partially constrained due to system applied constraints. Sketch objects may be located relative to edges of a solid model. until the location of at least one object is defined. It is important to remember that there is no numeric input in fixing an object. A sketch is over constrained when too much constraint information is supplied to the solver. The bottom point of line A has a fixed geometric constraint applied by the user. An object must be created in the proper location or be otherwise located prior to fixing in order for the fix constraint to be properly applied. datum planes. specifying a geometric constraint on two lines that identifies them as being equal in length. then placing a dimensional constraint on each to identify their length would cause the sketch to be over constrained. 13-78 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . dimensional constraints. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Line A has a system applied vertical geometric constraint. This indicates the point is constrained in the X axis direction but not in the Y axis direction. Degree of freedom arrows may assist in the constraining process. however. no degree of freedom arrows will be removed.

Constraints may need to be added or removed in order for the sketcher to be able to solve the constraint set. At times the system displays all geometry in gray and all dimensional constraints in pink. Dimensional constraints that are not related to the over constrained condition are displayed in green.Sketching The system highlights in yellow the geometry and dimensional constraints that are causing the over constrained condition in order to prompt for the over constrained situation to be corrected. Geometry that is not related to the over constrained condition is displayed in cyan. An unwanted constraint must be removed before the system will change the geometric configuration. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-79 . Dimensional constraints that are in conflict in the current configuration with the current constraint set are displayed in pink. The sketch is displayed in the last solved condition. This indicates that the constraint set that has been supplied is not solvable with the geometry in its current configuration. Geometry that is not solvable in the current configuration with the current constraint set is displayed in gray.

Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon. The width of the slot at the bottom of the angled lines is controlled by the radius at the bottom of the slot.Constraining a Profile Constrain the pipe vise profile sketch to satisfy the stated design intent. - 13-80 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Step 3 View the system applied constraints. The included angle of the angled lines. Design Intent Apply constraints to the curves so that the following may be controlled: The outside envelope of the part.Sketching Activity 6 . Step 1 Open pau_pipevise_1 and start the Modeling application. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 2 Activate the sketch S21_PROFILE. - DoubleĆclick on a sketch curve. The angled lines must remain centered in the part horizontally.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-81 . The dialog box should look similar to the graphic shown at right. Ensure that the Show Constraints category to Explicit. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose the first constraint in the list.Sketching The Show/Remove Constrains dialog box is displayed. - The system created constraints are now displayed in the list box. - Choose the radio button in the List Constraints For: area for All In Active Sketch.

- Step 4 View the degree of freedom arrows. Choose the Create Constraints icon. Step 5 Constrain the location of a point. - Use the UP and DOWN arrow buttons located to the right of the list box to browse through the constraint list. - Select the lower endpoint of the left vertical line. the sketch points are free to move in all directions. In the upper left corner of the screen choose the Point on Curve icon. There should be one horizontal line highlighted in the graphics window.Sketching The object referred to in the list is highlighted in the graphics area. This is because the system cannot locate any of the points relative to model space. Select the vertical datum axis. Even though most of the objects in the sketch have constraints associated with them. Cancel the Show/Remove Constraints dialog box. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Notice that there are degree of freedom arrows at each of the sketch points. Let the instructor know if this is not the case. 13-82 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Select the horizontal datum axis. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-83 . Choose the Point on Curve icon. The point at the bottom of the left vertical line is now constrained in the horizontal direction. - Select the left endpoint of the bottom horizontal line.Sketching The geometry now changes to follow the constraint.

Choose Format→Move to Layer Choose Type. Choose Datums and choose OK. 13-84 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . You will now move them to ease selection of objects and clean up the screen display. Step 7 Continue adding constraints to satisfy the stated design intent. - DoubleĆclick on a sketch curve to activate the sketch. and. Enter 61 in the dialog box layer field and press Enter. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 6 Move the datum planes and axes to layer 61. - Choose Finish. The datums have served their purpose of locating the sketch.Sketching The geometry now changes to follow the new constraint. The degree of freedom arrows go away at this point. due to the horizontal and vertical constraints on the lines that share the sketch point. one of the arrows on the opposite end of those lines has disappeared. Choose Select All and OK. The shared sketch point at the bottom of the left vertical line is now constrained in both the horizontal and vertical directions.

Sketching - Choose Create Constraints. Choose Point on Curve. Select the arc at the bottom of the slot taking note on which side you choose. Hold the Ctrl key down and select the two horizontal lines at the top of the profile. Choose Tangent. Choose Collinear and Equal Length. - Now Equal Length ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose Deselect All. Hold the Ctrl key down and select the bottom horizontal line and the lower endpoint of the line originating from the arc center. - - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-85 . Select the end of the short vertical line on the same side of the arc. Repeat the process for the other side of the slot.

With the constraint type set to infer. - Choose Deselect All.75. Drag the dimension to position it and select with MB1 to place it. Select the line between the midpoint and the arc center. Choose Vertical. Select the left vertical line and place the dimension for it. Change the value to 3. select the bottom horizontal line. - 13-86 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Type in a value of 5 and press Enter.Sketching - Choose Midpoint. Fit the view if necessary. Now vertical - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Adding dimensional constraints to satisfy the controlling portions of the design intent will allow the profile to be changed by modifying the numerical values. - Choose the Dimensions icon.

Fit the view if necessary. not endpoint) of the left angled line.5. avoiding its control points. Place the angular dimension and change its value to 45°. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-87 . Select the bottom end of the right angled line.25. Change its value to 1. Select the line connecting the arc center and the midpoint and place this vertical dimension. Place this angular dimension and change its value to the 'p' number assigned to the other angular dimension. - Select here first Select here second - Select the left end of the top right horizontal line.5 and choose OK. Change its value to .Sketching - Select the top left horizontal line and place the dimension. Select the lower end (over half way. Select the right end of the top left horizontal line. avoiding its control points. Place the radius dimension and change its value to . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Select the arc at the bottom of the slot.

Notice that the depth of the notch is unchanged as a result of this change.Sketching The Status line now informs you that the sketch is fully constrained. we would have to constrain the sketch in a different manner. 13-88 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Remember that there is no need to fully constrain the profile if it is updating in the manner desired. Step 8 Change the constraints on the sketch to alter the included angle in the notch. Should that have not been our intent. Choose Finish. - Step 9 Choose File "Close"All Parts. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Double click on the first angular dimensional constraint that was created and change it from a 45° to 30°.

DoubleĆclick on a sketch curve to activate the sketch.Constraining the Gasket In this activity you will fully constrain the sketch that was created earlier. Fit the view. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-89 . Step 1 Open ***_gasket_1 where *** represent your initials or open pau_gasket_1 and save as ***_gasket_1a. - Ensure that the Modeling application is active. Step 2 Make Layer 61 Selectable in order to view the reference features. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 3 Activate the sketch containing the profile.Sketching Activity 7 .

13-90 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 4 Review the existing constraints. Choose All in Active Sketch. - Choose Show/Remove Constraints.Sketching Use the steps on the following pages to constrain the profile as shown below. Set Show Constraints to Explicit.

- Select the circle on the other side and notice how the system indicates an arc to which it is coincident. Select one of the circles. - In the Show/Remove Constraints dialog. - - Toggle Show All Constraints on. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Set Show Constraints to Inferred. choose Selected Objects. Notice that there are no constraints listed. Choose Cancel. This is due to the creation method that was used. Notice how each curve in the profile is tangent to its adjacent curve. Now observe that a Coincident constraint is listed. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-91 .Sketching - Review the constraints by clicking on each one in the listing and observe which curves are highlighted in the graphic window. Notice the two Equal Radius symbols.

Sketching - Choose the Select Constraints icon toolbar. - Choose the Select Sketch Objects icon. - Select the center circle and the bottom arc. remember that these are supplied to give feedback on the constraint condition of the sketch. avoiding control points along the way. from the Selection - Place the cursor over one of the Equal Radius symbols. The arcs that share this constraint are highlighted. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 5 Constrain the sketch. Choose Create Constraints. 13-92 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . These markers will be removed from the display as the sketch points are explicitly located. The circle and arc that share that point of incidence are highlighted. - Place the cursor over one of the Coincident symbols. - Notice the Degree Of Freedom markers associated with the sketch points.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-93 . Choose Point on Curve. - Select the arc center of the center circle and the horizontal datum axis. Step 6 Locate the profile in space. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ The entire profile moves to follow the constraint just applied.Sketching - Choose Concentric.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 7 Apply Point on Curve design intent. this point is now explicitly located. Repeat the above actions for the right circle. constraining it to fall on the centerline" represented by the datum axis. - Note that the degree of freedom markers at the large arc center have been removed.Sketching - Select the arc center of the center circle again and the vertical datum axis. - 13-94 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose Point on Curve. The design intent is that the arc center of all three circles lie on the same horizontal centerline. Choose Point on Curve. - Select the arc center of the left circle and the horizontal datum axis.

points and curves have a different constraint set than those of two curves. The upper and lower center arcs are intended to be the same radius.Sketching Note how the profile changes shape to obey the constraints as they are applied. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select the upper and lower arcs of the profile. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-95 . Be sure not to include control points in the selection process. The circles on either end are intended to be the same size as shown by the dimension. Choose Equal Radius. Step 8 Applying equal radius design intent. These points has been constrained in the vertical direction but are still free to move in the horizontal direction. Also note that the Degree Of Freedom markers at the selected points have been removed in the vertical direction.

Location of the dimension is not as important as being able to read it. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 9 Apply dimensional constraints to define the size of the profile. - Change Auto Placement to Manual Placement. - Use the Inferred dimension type to create all of the dimensions shown below. 13-96 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Sketching - Repeat the process for the two small circles. Arrows In. - Change the value of the dimension to 2 and press Enter. Place the dimension. - Select the center circle and place the dimension. Create a horizontal dimension between the arc center of the left circle and the arc center of the center circle. Choose the Dimensions icon.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-97 .5.625. - Select one of the end circles and place the dimension. Change the value of the dimension to . Notice that we forgot to create a concentric constraint between the upper arc and the center circle.Sketching - Change the value of the dimension to 2.5. Change the value of the dimension to 5. Select one of the end arcs and place the dimension. Select the lower arc and place the dimension. Change the value of the dimension to 1. - The status line indicates that the sketch needs 5 constraints in order to be fully constrained.5. The status line indicates that the sketch needs 2 more constraints.25. Change the value of the dimension to . Create a horizontal dimension between the arc centers of the two smaller circles and place the dimension.

Sketching - Choose Create Constraints. - The status line now states that the Sketch is fully constrained. Choose Concentric.25. 13-98 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . avoiding control points. Select the center circle and the upper arc. - Double click on the dimension with the value 5. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose Create Constraints to exit that function. Step 10 Change the design intent by making the gasket longer.

Notice that the profile updates and the tangent condition is maintained.Sketching - Edit the value to 7. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 11 Choose File"Close"Save and Close. - Choose Finish. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-99 .25.

Reference curves are ignored during sweep operations. The Convert To/From Reference icon is located in the sketch management area of the Sketch Tools dialog box. sketch curves may need to be associated to other sketch curves that are not intended to represent a portion of the swept feature. Additionally. but it does not control the sketch geometry with which it is associated. Reference dimensional constraints are shown in white color and only the value portion of the expression is shown. Curve. An option menu is provided to filter for All (the default). ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ To change the status of the objects. or Dimension. These reference objects may be either curves or dimensional constraints. Unigraphics allows Reference objects within sketches. set the radio button to the status desired. Reference curves are displayed in gray color and phantom line font. select the object(s) and choose OK or Apply. 13-100 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . To support these needs. but adding a dimensional constraint to do this causes the sketch to be over constrained. The value for this reference dimension will be updated as the sketch is changed. regardless of the preference setting.Sketching Convert To/From Reference At times it is nice to be able to see what the effects of a change are numerically.

Constraint Conditions In this activity. - Start the Modeling application. you will constrain and edit a simple sketch to change the design intent. Step 2 Create a sketch on Layer 21. Width Length ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 1 Open pau_seedpart_in. This configuration is not one that you would likely sketch. Design Intent Apply constraints to control the length and width of the sketch. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-101 . - Choose Sketch.Sketching Activity 8 . but its simplicity allows the concept of over constrained to be easily shown. The shape of the sketch should remain rectangular. - Choose OK. Change the work layer to 21.

- - 13-102 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose Point on Curve. - Choose the Show/Remove Constraints icon. Choose the radio button for All In Active Sketch. Choose the Create Constraints icon. - Choose the Rectangle icon. Set the Show Constraints to Explicit. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - - Step 5 Apply constraints to locate the sketch on the sketch plane. Choose Cancel. Choose Cancel. then drag and select a second cursor location to create the rectangle. Select an endpoint of the left vertical line and the vertical datum axis. Select a cursor location. Select an endpoint of the bottom horizontal line and the horizontal datum axis. Highlight the top constraint in the list and use the down arrow button to browse through the constraints. - Step 4 Interrogate the constraints that currently exist on this sketch.Sketching Step 3 Create a rectangle.

With the dimension type set to Infer. Step 7 Apply dimensional constraints to control the length and width of the part as per the design intent. Choose Format→Move to Layer Select the reference objects and choose OK.500 - Choose the Dimensions icon. DoubleĆclick on a sketch curve.750 p2=4.5. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-103 . - Choose Finish. Change the value to 4. Type 61 in the destination layer field and choose OK. select the bottom horizontal line and place the dimension. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ p3=2.Sketching - Choose Point on Curve. Step 6 Move the reference features to the proper layer.

274 p4=31. along with the geometric constraints of horizontal and vertical that the system applied to the lines due to the manner of construction. Design Change Modify the sketch so that it can be controlled by the angle and length of a diagonal line.Sketching - Select the left hand vertical line and place the dimension. Select the lower left endpoint and the upper right endpoint to define the line.430 Step 8 Create a diagonal line in the sketch and convert it to reference.75. - As dimensional constraints are being created. Change the value to 2. and 13-104 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose the Line icon. Choose OK. The sketch is fully constrained using one vertical and one horizontal dimensional constraint. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ p5=5. - Choose the Convert To/From Reference icon ensure that Reference is toggled On. the degreeĆofĆfreedom arrows are eliminated.

In this case all of the active sketch curves and dimensional constraints are displayed in yellow. The system changes the color of the sketch objects that have constraints applied to them that are associated to the over constrained condition.Sketching - Select the diagonal line and choose OK. Notice that the sketch configuration does not change when the value is modified. Step 10 Apply a parallel dimensional constraint. Step 9 Apply an angular dimensional constraint. Choose the Dimensions icon. Select the right end of the lower horizontal line and the right end of the diagonal line. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-105 . The sketch is over constrained. Remember. and indicate a location for the angular dimension. At this point the system has more information than is required. one or more of the offending constraints must by removed. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select the diagonal line and place a parallel dimension. the new design intent is to drive the sketch with angular and diagonal length dimensions.5. - The angle will be applied to the ends of the lines closest to the cursor position in a counter clockwise manner. To correct the over constrained condition. The system leaves the geometry in its last solved state until the over constrained condition is resolved. Change the value of the dimension to 6.

Another method of resolving the over constrained condition would have been to delete the horizontal and vertical dimensions.500 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 11 Convert sketch dimensions to reference. 13-106 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .500 p3=2. Step 12 Choose File "Close"All Parts.Sketching - Choose Cancel. Reference dimensions do not apply rules to the geometry to which they are attached. The sketch is returned to a fully constrained condition. - Choose Finish. and choose OK.750 p4=35. p5=6. - Choose the Convert To/From Reference icon.000 p2=4. The reference dimensional constraints are shown to reflect the value only. Select the horizontal and vertical dimensions.

The level of constraint. Constrained Sketches Created Dimensional Constraints Edited Dimensional Constraints Created Geometric Constraints Created Inferred Geometric Constraints ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 13-107 . Freehand sketched curves in a sketch. In this lesson you: D D D D D D D D Created a sketch on a fixed datum plane. is determined by the design intent and what is necessary to capture it.Sketching SUMMARY This lesson introduced the concept of sketch creation. Created a sketch on an existing solid face. Sketches may be used to define a base feature. A sketch parametrically controls curves and captures design intent. guide paths. and additional associative features to the base feature. partial or full. To do this constraints are applied to sketch objects in order to capture the design intent.

Sketching (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 13-108 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Swept Features and Boolean Operations Swept Features and Boolean Operations Lesson 14 PURPOSE To introduce Swept Features and Boolean Operations. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. Create a Body of Revolution. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-1 . Create a solid by sweeping a profile along a guide curve. Extrude a body with offsets. you will be able to: D D D D Extrude a body.

revolving. Section string Resulting feature Direction A Body of Revolution is one that has been rotated around a specified axis. Section string Axis Resulting feature A Sweep Along Guide body is one that has been swept along a guide string. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Guide string Section string Resulting feature The features/bodies that are created will be associated with both the section string and the guide string. The section string may be composed of explicit curves. solid edges. solid faces. and sheet bodies. or sweeping a section string. An Extruded Body is one that is swept in a linear direction for a specified distance. sketch curves. 14-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Swept Features and Boolean Operations Types of Swept Features Swept features/bodies are created by extruding.

choose the Curve or Chain Curves option. and then select the desired curves. To select individual curves within a sketch .select any one curve belonging to the sketch. By default the system selects the entire sketch when any sketch curve is selected. When using a sketch to define the section string do one of the following: D To select all the curves in a sketch . D Sweeping a partial sketch is a technique that is used when one sketch may define multiple features. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-3 .Swept Features and Boolean Operations Creating Swept Features from Sketches When sweeping a sketch you may or may not want to sweep all of the sketch curves.

D Extrusion Options Direction & Distance option allows specification of the extrusion direction and the start and end distances of the extrusion relative to the plane of the selected section string. controls whether a solid body or a sheet body is created when extruding section string geometry. Trim to Face/Plane option allows the end distance of an extrusion to be associated to an existing solid face or datum plane. The extrusion starts at. Extruding a curve or set of planar connected curves which are not closed creates a sheet body unless extrude with offsets is used. the plane of the section string. Rules for Extruding Section String Objects The Body Type switch found under Preferences→Modeling. Extruding a set of closed planar connected curves with another closed set within the boundary of the first creates a solid with an interior hole. The extrusion does not need to start at the plane of the section string.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Extrude The Insert"Form Feature"Extrude option allows a solid body/feature to be created by sweeping planar. Trim Between Two Faces/Plane option allows the start and end of the extrusion to be associated with specified faces or planes of the same body regardless of the location of the section string geometry. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The extrusion will be normal to the plane of the section string. section string geometry in a linear direction for a specified distance. When set to Solid" the following rules will apply: D D Extruding a set of closed planar connected curves creates a solid body. and is normal to.

Select all of the curves and choose OK. Choose Direction & Distance. . you will continue to develop the draglink by applying those skills. Step 1 Open part file pau_draglink_2.5 0 0 0 - ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose OK. save as ***_draglink_2. Fit the View. . Step 3 Save the part. As you work through this lesson and learn new sweep skills. 0 152. Key in the following: Start Distance . and start the modeling application. End Distance . - Choose Extrude. . Second Offset . Taper Angle . . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-5 . Step 2 Extrude the curves. First Offset . .Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 1 .Swept Features In this activity you will start to create the draglink part. Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the vector points down and choose OK.

The new solid may be created as a separate solid using Create. or Intersect) may be performed on the two solids during creation to make one resultant solid. the following menu appears for the Boolean Operation. Subtract. The Boolean Operations may also be created as a separate feature using the Insert"Feature Operation options shown in the menu below. When using these operations. or a Boolean operation (Unite. a Target Solid and a Tool Solid need to be specified to perform the boolean operation.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Boolean Operations Boolean operations are used to create a single solid body out of two or more existing solid bodies. Unigraphics senses when a solid already exists in a file and another is being created. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Defining Target and Tool Solids The Target solid is the solid body on which operations are executed. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-7 . to unite the two cylinders to the block. The Tool solid is the solid body that operates upon the target solid. In the figure below. the block is chosen as the target solid.Swept Features and Boolean Operations NOTE: Creation of Booleans as separate features allows for future editing of the Boolean operations.

Swept Features and Boolean Operations NOTE: The target solid passes its attributes on to the Boolean operation result. of the Target Solid. Target solid Tool solids The Boolean Operations are described below. the resultant solid inherits the layer. etc. Therefore. Target solid Completed solid ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Tool solids Before After 14-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . material density. Unite This option allows two or more solid bodies to be combined into one.

Swept Features and Boolean Operations Subtract This option allows material to be removed from a solid body (Target Body) by using another solid body as the Tool Solid. The resultant solid will be that portion which is common to both of the selected solids. leaving empty space where the Tool body existed. Tool solid Target solid Before Tool solid After Intersect This Boolean allows a new solid to be created from two solids. Before After ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Target solid Tool solid EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-9 .

or intersect a tool solid with a target solid and the two solids do not touch. the system would warn you with the following message. the system would warn you with the following message. If you attempt to unite.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Swept Feature Errors If you attempt to unite a tool solid within a target solid and there is no change in topology. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ If you attempt to subtract a tool solid from a target solid and the operation would produce a zero thickness. Generator Curves Zero thickness 14-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . subtract. the system would warn you with the following message.

Positive Taper Angle Normal vector D D D Negative Taper Angle ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Plane of selected objects EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-11 .Swept Features and Boolean Operations Rules for Extruding With Taper D The Taper Start radio buttons determine if the taper starts At Defining String or At Start Distance when a taper is specified. the holes would be tapered in the opposite direction to the outside objects. A positive taper angle creates an inward taper. A negative angle creates an outward taper. If the section string included interior holes.

Swept Features and Boolean Operations Extruding With Offsets Once an extrusion method has been specified. Positive Extrusion Direction Positive Offset Direction ZC YC XC Using positive values in the First Offset or Second Offset field will offset the extrusion in the direction of the arrow. Using negative values in the First Offset or Second Offset field will offset the extrusion in the opposite direction of the dashed arrow.. indicating the direction that positive values will be extruded.) 14-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The arrow displayed in dashed font is the Offset Direction arrow. arrows are displayed in the graphics area to relay information. The arrow displayed in solid font is the Extrusion Direction arrow. one offset pos. indicating the direction that positive offset values will be applied. Offset Offset Examples Section Geometry ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Section Geometry Offset on arrow side (Positive) Offset on opposite side (Negative) Offset on both sides (One offset neg. The extrusion values as well as the offset values may be entered in the Parameters menu.

Choose OK to accept the default direction (vector pointing up).Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 2 .25 0 - ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ If the offset vector is pointing away from the center of the part. Step 2 Save the file as ***_extrude_1 where *** represent your initials. If it is pointing to the center use a positive value for the Second Offset. Select the inside.5 0 . - Choose Extrude. large circle as the section geometry. Choose Direction Distance.Extruding with Offsets In this activity. Step 1 Open the part pau_extrude_1. Enter the following values: Start Distance = End Distance = First Offset = Second Offset = Taper Angle = 0 2. additional extruded features will be added to complete the part. use a negative value for the Second Offset. Step 3 Create a tube by extruding with an offset. Choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-13 .

- 14-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . normal to its creation plane as was indicated by the solid arrow.25 units thick inside the generator curve. The solid feature created to this length is also defined as being . Choose Fit from the third mouse button PopĆUp Menu.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Press Enter. Select the tube as the tool body. Choose Extrude. Select the base as the target body. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 4 Create a flange at the top of the cylinder. Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite. Choose Create.5 units from the start distance. The selected curve is extruded from its origin. The current model should look like the figure below. to a distance 2. This thickness was defined by the value entered in the Second Offset field due to the direction of the dashed arrow. Choose OK.

ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-15 . Select this edge - Choose OK. Choose Direction Distance.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Select the top outer edge of the cylindrical extrusion. Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the vector points down and choose OK.

The selected edge is extruded from its origin.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Key in: Start Distance = End Distance = First Offset = Second Offset = Taper Angle = 0 . Select the feature that was just created as the tool body. Choose OK. The solid feature created to this length is also defined as being .25 units thick outside the generator edge. 14-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . to a distance . normal to its creation plane as was indicated by the solid arrow.25 0 . ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 5 Subtract an extrusion from the flange. This thickness was defined by the values entered in the First and Second Offset fields relative to dashed arrow. - Choose Extrude. Select the main body as the target body. Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite.25 units from the start distance.25 0 - Choose OK. Choose Create.

Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the vector points down and choose OK.075 . ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Key in: Start Distance = End Distance = First Offset = Second Offset = Taper Angle = 0 .Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Select the edge as shown to extrude. Choose Direction Distance. The edge must be extruded with the offsets in the proper direction to create the groove shown below.275 0 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-17 .15 . Select this edge - Choose OK.

Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Choose OK. Choose Subtract. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Step 6 Save and close the part.

D D D ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-19 . providing the Modeling Preferences Body Type is set to Solid. Rules for Sweeping Section String Objects Along a Guide D Just like other sweep types. open string or enclosed string). solid or sheet bodies are created based on the current Modeling Preferences Body Type setting and the closure condition of the curves (i. An open section string swept along a guide path that forms an enclosed loop will automatically cap the end faces.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Sweep along Guide The Insert"Form Feature"Sweep along Guide option allows features to be created by sweeping a section string along a guide string. Only one Section String and only one Guide String may be selected. Open section strings will always be swept into a solid body when using the sweep with offset option.e.

it is recommended that the section string be placed away from a sharp corner. Guide string Two separate line entities Section string here located on an endpoint Do not put Section string here ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Solid body 14-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Swept Features and Boolean Operations Guide Strings Containing Sharp Corners When using Sweep along Guide where the guide string contains sharp corners. The section string also needs to be located on an end point of one of the guide string objects.

Choose OK to accept the direction. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - The cue prompts to Specify Sweep offsets and a dialog box displays for First Offset and Second Offset. Select the orange curves and confirm the selections as necessary. Offsets work the same way as for extrusions. The curves are displayed in two colors. Sweep the section string along the guide string to create a shape that could be used as a base or platform. - Select the yellow guide string and confirm the selections as necessary. Guide string Section string - Choose Insert"Form Feature"Sweep along Guide. Choose OK. - The cue prompts to Select guide string. Step 1 Open part file pau_sweep_1 and start the Modeling application. The Cue prompts to Select section string. but they will not be used here.Sweeping Along a Guide In this activity.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 3 . use the third method of sweeping. Sweep along Guide to create a solid body. Choose OK. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-21 .

ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 2 Close the part.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Ensure that the First and Second Offsets are set to 0 (zero).Undo the solid and create it again. Shade the display if desired to better view the model. The Sweep along Guide function may be used to sweep any section string along a guide string. this time use a . The part should resemble the figure shown. - Optional Challenge .25 single offset toward the outside of the curves. The open section string was swept along the full length of the guide string and the system automatically caps the open ends to produce a solid body. The base is created. 14-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . do not save. Choose OK on the dialog box to create the solid body.

Noncontiguous closed loop made up of 4 curves. Geometry that provides more than one possible sweep area. Region 1 Region 2 ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Selecting these six curves produces two possible sweep regions. At these times you will be prompted by the system to define a region to sweep.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Defining a Sweep Region In some cases when sweep generator geometry is selected. The system will prompt you to define a region when the selected generator geometry is made up of one of the following: D D Noncontiguous geometry that makes up a closed loop. Example of noncontiguous curves. there is a possibility that multiple sweep areas may exist. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-23 .

Generator geometry. Notice that there is no top to the IĆBeam shape. - Make layer 42 the work layer and all other layers invisible. Step 1 Make ***_draglink_2 the active part.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 4 . 14-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Feature to be created.Defining a Sweep Region In this activity you will continue to develop the draglink part. Step 2 Create a feature by sweeping curves along a path.

Choose OK. Fit the view. .Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Make layer 41 selectable. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 3 Save the part. 0 - - - - Choose OK. Select the curves shown above for the section string and choose OK. Indicate the region by selecting inside the IĆBeam shape. Choose Create. 0 Second Offset . Key in the following: First Offset . . - Choose Insert"Form Feature"Sweep along Guide. . Fit the view. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-25 . Define the guide string by selecting the yellow curves and choose OK. Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite. Make layer 1 the work layer and layer 43 selectable. These curves will be used to define the sweep cross section. Select the first body created as the target body. Select the IĆBeam body as the tool body.

The plane of the selected curves is considered zero degrees.This option allows creation of a single feature by revolving the section curves about a specified axis. Entering a Start Angle which is greater than the End Angle causes the system to sweep in the direction of negative rotation.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Revolve The Insert"Form Feature"Revolve option allows you to create a feature by rotating a section string around an axis through a specified angle. a solid or sheet body is created based on the closure condition of the curves and current Body Type setting found under Preferences →Modeling.This option allows creation of a feature on the target solid by revolving section curves between two trimming faces or datum planes. the rotation must be a full 360° and the Modeling Preferences Body Type switch must be set to Solid. D ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D Trim To Face/Plane . 14-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .This option allows creation of a feature on the target solid by revolving the section geometry to a trimming face or datum plane. The total number of degrees cannot exceed 360. First Offset and Second Offset function in the same manner as the offsets discussed in extruded bodies. The Right Hand rule determines direction of swept. Trim Between Two Faces/Planes . Exceptions apply as follows: D Revolving open section strings will cause the system to automatically cap the end faces to produce a solid body however. D Body of Revolution Options Axis & Angle . Rules for Revolving Section String Objects Just like with extruded section strings. D The amount of rotation is determined by entering a Start Angle and End Angle. The angles entered determine the number of degrees the system revolves the selected curves about the selected axis.

The cue line will prompt you to Select Start Curve of Chain. If the loop is open as below. the entire string is then selected. Select the curves as shown below. The Chain Curves option is an easy way to select a group of contiguous curves. Choose Axis Angle.Creating a Body of Revolution In this activity. - Choose Revolve. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-27 . you will create revolved features using a variety of methods. the start of the chain must be defined as well as the chain direction. - Choose Chain Curves from the dialog box. Select this end of this object first Select this object second or choose OK . Step 1 Open part file pau_revolve_1. If the loop is closed.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 5 . Care must be taken to select the first object such that the system may chain toward the last object. Step 2 Select and Revolve the Section String. pick any one curve and choose OK. Chain Direction - Choose OK twice.

A solid revolved body has been created from an open section string. End Angle. 0 360 0 0 - Choose OK.K values to define vector - Select the Datum Axis and choose OK. . Now use the same section string as before to create a new revolved body using an offset and an angle to form a shell. and Offsets. if a solid body is desired through a sweep of less than 360° the section string must be closed. End Angle . . Second Offset . .J. or an open section string may be revolved with offsets to form a solid shell using any angle values.Swept Features and Boolean Operations The cue prompts you to Enter Direction . . . . - Choose Cancel and then Undo (third mouse button popĆup). - Key in the following: Start Angle . ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Shade the part to check the shape of the solid body. . . First Offset .Select object or enter I. Step 3 Revolve a closed section string with an Offset. A dialog box displays fields for the Start Angle. Remember. 14-28 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Step 4 Revolve a solid face using Axis and Angle option. Now close one end of the solid without creating any new section string geometry by revolving an existing face. Key in the following: Start Angle . End Angle . (Datum Axis). Second Offset . . . Select the Datum Axis and choose OK. . Plane of curves Notice that the revolution starts at the plane of the curves and revolves in a CCW direction with respect to the positive axis of rotation. . Choose Axis Angle as the method of revolution. . .Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Choose Revolve. The Right Hand Rule for Positive Rotation applies. The cue line should still be prompting to Select section string. . ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-29 .25 - Choose OK. First Offset . Select the section string again and confirm the selection. 0 180 0 . .

. . 0 -90 0 0 14-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Choose Solid Face from the dialog box. as shown below. . . Second Offset . as the rotation point. End Angle . First Offset . ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select left end of the top linear edge of the selected face - Key in the following: Start Angle . Select the solid face as shown and confirm the selection. . . Choose XC Axis and choose OK. Choose OK twice. . Select the far end point of the edge. . Select this face - Choose Axis Angle as the method of revolution.

The model should now appear as shown with one end enclosed. Target solid Tool solid - Choose OK.This shell is one of two molded parts that must fit together. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 5 Close the part do not save. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-31 . The cue line prompts to Choose boolean operation from the dialog box that is to be performed with the revolved feature. Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite. - Choose Create.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Choose OK. Add a lip to the outside edge of the part by extending the outside edges of the top planar face with an offset value and height value equal to half the shell thickness. Select the target and tool solids as shown below. - Optional Challenge .

Feature to be created. Step 1 Make ***_draglink_2 the active part and start the modeling application. 14-32 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Layer 1 will remain the work layer. Step 2 Create a body of revolution.Adding a Body of Revolution In this activity you will continue to develop the draglink part. - Make layer 44 selectable and all other layers invisible.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 6 . ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Generator geometry.

Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Choose Insert"Form Feature"Revolve. . Second Offset . Choose Create. Choose Reset and OK to define the revolution point. . . End Angle . ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 3 Save the part. . EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-33 . Choose Insert"Feature Operation"Unite. Section String - Choose Axis Angle. Choose OK. 0 360 0 0 - - Choose OK. . Key in the following: Start Angle . Select section string as shown below and choose OK. First Offset . . Select the main body as the target body. Define the axis direction by choosing ZC Axis and choose OK. . Select the last feature created as the tool body. .

it must be the portion that the boolean operation effects. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14-34 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Extend Trim Face option extends the face/Plane infinitely. This dialog controls how the trimming face/plane will interact with the cross section string. Do not Extend Trim Face option will only allow the operation to succeed if the cross section geometry or a portion of the cross section geometry intersects the trimming face/plane. If only a portion of the cross section geometry intersects the trimming face/plane. the following dialog will appear.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Trimming Face Options When using the Trim to Face/Plane or Trim Between Two Faces/Plane options.

Revolving and Trimming to a Face In this activity you will revolve a small area on the top of the face shown below. Filtering for specific object types may be accomplished by choosing an option from the dialog box. Choose Revolve. For the first part of the section string. to create a curved open shape on the top edge of the bracket. confirm the selection. Step 1 Open part file pau_revolve_2. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-35 . - Remember. or sheet bodies by selecting it in the graphics area. solid edges. curves. if necessary. a section string may be composed of any combination of solid faces. Select this edge.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 7 . - Choose Solid Edge to filter for solid edges. Step 2 Create the Body of Revolution. select the front top edge of the solid and.

resetting the filter to all types. select the orange line. Select this line. confirming the selections if necessary. confirming it if necessary. Without filtering. - Select the other two edges as indicated below. The region (area) to be revolved must be specified. 14-36 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Swept Features and Boolean Operations The entire edge will highlight. The Cue line prompts to Define Region Point for Cut Section. - Choose OK to complete the edge selection. Select these two edges. - ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose OK to confirm that all objects have been selected for the section string.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-37 . The Cue prompts to Choose revolution method. - Filter for Solid Face and choose the solid face as shown.Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Select the region surrounded by the highlighted objects. Now the defined region may be revolved and trimmed to a specified face. - Choose the Datum Axis and then choose OK. Ensure that the both Offset values are set to 0 and choose OK on the Revolved Body dialog box to create the revolution without offsets. - Choose the Trim To Face option. Select region : The rectangular region will highlight in a cyan color. Select face : ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ A datum axis has been created to use as the axis of rotation. choose OK.

- Choose Unite to unite the revolved feature to the solid model. The Cue prompts to Choose boolean operation from the dialog box (Unite.Intersect). Fit the view. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14-38 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . do not save. Subtract.Swept Features and Boolean Operations The rotation will occur around the specified axis. - Step 3 Close the part.

Generator geometry. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-39 . layer 1 selectable. and all other layers invisible. Step 1 Make ***_draglink_2 the active part and start the modeling application. - Make layer 45 the work layer. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose Extrude. Step 2 Extrude a section string to a face.Extruding to a Face In this activity you will complete the development of the draglink part.Swept Features and Boolean Operations Activity 8 .

Section String - Choose Trim to Face/Plane. .Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Select the section string as shown below and choose OK. 0 Second Offset . 0 aper Angle . Toggle Do not Extend Trim Face on. . 14-40 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . . - Select this face. Key in the following: First Offset . Choose Cycle Vector Direction so that the vector points down and choose OK. . . ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose OK. 0 - Choose OK. . Select the shaded face shown below.

ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 14-41 .Swept Features and Boolean Operations - Choose Subtract. Step 3 Save and close the part. Choose Cancel.

Extruded with offsets. Boolean operations are used to create a single solid body out of two or more existing solid bodies. Extruded to a face. solid faces. The section string may be composed of explicit curves. and sheet bodies. Created a Body of Revolution. Applied boolean operations. or sweeping a section string. ÏÏÏ 14 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 14-42 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . solid edges.Swept Features and Boolean Operations SUMMARY Swept features are created by extruding. sketch curves. In this lesson you: D D D D D D Extruded a body. revolving. Created a Swept Feature Along a Guide.

Suppress a feature. Edit feature parameters during playback. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. Edit a feature's parameters and position. Unsuppress a feature. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-1 . you will be able to: D D D D D D D D D Playback the construction of a model.Editing the Model Editing the Model Lesson 15 PURPOSE To manipulate solid body features by editing their parameters. Delete a Feature. Reattach a feature to a different face. Rename a feature. Move a Feature.

Edit Feature Toolbar ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual All icons not shown EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Some of the Edit options are outside the scope of this class. Those that are within the scope are documented here.Editing the Model Common Features of the Edit PullĆDown Menu The Edit pullĆdown menu offers common choices that relate to changing existing solid bodies and features.

the Delayed Update on Edit option allows the user to control when the system performs the display updates based on the edits performed. If Delayed Update on Edit is ON. feature updates are delayed while edits are made. followed by an edit to another feature may be accomplished without updating the model until after both edits are complete. This option is a toggle between ON and OFF.Editing the Model Delayed Update on Edit When enabled. the part is updated after the completion of each edit function. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-3 . Update This option allows the user to control when the solid model is recalculated and the display updated with the edits previously made when Delayed Update on Edit is enabled. NOTE: Delayed Update on Edit may not be used to delay a delete. Off is the default setting. Delayed Update on Edit If Delayed Update on Edit is OFF. a feature move. This saves time on complex models with many features. For example. suppress or unsuppress feature operation.

NOTE: The system will automatically update the model when the part file is saved. choose the Update icon in the Edit Feature toolbar or Edit"Update in the Menu bar and the feature updates are performed. The Status Line tracks and reports the update activity. Update ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Editing the Model To view the effects of edits on the model.

Edit Feature Toolbar Edit Parameters Edit Move Positioning Feature Suppress Unsuppress Playback All icons not shown Edit Feature PullĆDown Menu ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-5 .Editing the Model Editing Features Using the Edit Feature toolbar or the Edit→Feature option allows existing solid bodies and features to be altered and manipulated while maintaining any implied or predefined associativity.

For example: if there is a need to position a feature using an edge that has already been blended. After the Suppress Feature icon is selected.Editing the Model Suppress The Suppress Feature option simulates the temporary removal of one or more features from the solid body and its display. the associated features are also suppressed. a list of all features is displayed in the Suppress Feature dialog box. Creation of features in locations where conflicting geometry exists. and display time. making it easier to work with. Select the feature(s) to be suppressed then choose Apply or OK. from the model for other applications. Since the suppressed features still exist. The removal of nonĆcritical features. Suppressed features still actually exist within the math model. This speeds up the creation. When a feature that has associated features is suppressed. object selection. Suppress the blend. Unsuppress This option restores previously suppressed features. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . such as small holes and blends. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-6 After the Unsuppress Feature icon is selected. edit. Select the feature(s) to be unsuppressed then choose Apply or OK. Suppressing features facilitates: D D D Temporary reduction in the size of the model. a list of all suppressed features is displayed in the Unsuppress Feature dialog box. create and position the new feature. and then unsuppress the blend. When features are unsuppressed. but are temporarily removed from the model and display. their display may be restored using Unsuppress Feature. the blend need not be deleted. other features may also be unsuppressed by association.

Once you select a feature.Editing the Model Move Choosing Move Feature allows a feature that is not associatively positioned to be moved to a new position. ZC To a Point Rotate Between Two Axes CSYS to CSYS ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-7 . the Move Feature dialog box will appear. YC. When you select the Move Feature icon . Features whose position is determined via associative positioning methods must be moved using the Edit"Feature"Positioning option. a second Move Feature dialog box will present four methods available to move the feature: D D D D Delta XC. This option excludes all extruded and revolved features as well as features whose location has been constrained using positioning dimensions.

Z This option allows the feature to be moved by specifying a distance and direction using rectangular coordinates. Delta YC. The figure below is an example of this. Reference axis ZC YC XC Destination axis Before After CSYS to CSYS ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-8 This option allows the selected feature to be repositioned from its current coordinate system to the desired coordinate system. (Delta XC. Rotate Between Two Axes This option allows the selected feature to be moved by rotating that feature from a reference axis to a destination axis. based upon the Work Coordinate System.Editing the Model Delta X. and Delta ZC) To a Point This option allows the feature to be moved from a reference point to a destination point. Y. The Point Constructor will become available during the operation to assist in the move. where the negative X axis is the Reference axis and the negative Y axis is the Destination axis. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The current or Reference Coordinate System must be defined as well as the desired or Destination Coordinate System using the Coordinate System Subfunction dialog.

the Undo function may be used immediately after the deletion to restore the feature. not position. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-9 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . NOTE: Any features whose placement. Selecting the delete icon introduces the Class Selection dialog box. For example. if a hole has been created using a datum plane for its placement face. Selecting the Features button within the Class Selection dialog box option allows the selection of features of a solid model to be deleted. the hole will also be deleted. If a feature is mistakenly deleted. Allows the selection of Features When a feature is deleted from a body. the space it occupied or voided is filled in exactly as it was before the feature was created. is dependent on the deleted feature will also be deleted.Editing the Model The newly relocated feature will maintain the same relative position to the Destination Coordinate System as it had with the Reference Coordinate System. and the datum plane is deleted. Deleting Features Deleting features is accomplished through the use of the Delete icon in the Standard toolbar or Edit"Delete from the Menu bar.

The Message window shows any applicable error or warning messages. When the Playback Feature icon is chosen. Once a feature has been dealt with. the Edit during Update dialog appears and starts with the first feature created. Once the intended feature has been reached. its defining parameters may be interrogated or edited. At any time a trigger may be set to update the model starting at the current feature and continuing until the model is complete. a different feature may be browsed to. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The model may also be edited as it is reviewed. as well as whether the current feature updated successfully or failed.Editing the Model Playback Playback allows the creation of the model to be reviewed feature by feature. or until a feature fails to update. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-10 Features may be browsed through forward or backward.

may not appear in the current model until the last related feature is rebuilt. The first row of icons always appear. Pause lets the user choose other Edit during Update options. in order of creation. Update Tool Should the model fail to update after an edit. the Edit during Update dialog will be presented. Undo undoes the last modification made to the model before updating Step Back To allows backward navigation through the model to a selected feature that may be chosen from the Update Selection dialog.Editing the Model Show Failure Area temporarily displays failed geometry. The Post Recovery Update Status options specify what should happen when the icon option chosen is completed. such as instances in an array. but are grayed out if not applicable. Show Current Model displays the part of the model that has been successfully rebuilt. such as a tool body. The Edit during Update dialog also contains icons for the review and edit options that are available for the model.) ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-11 . is available for display. D D Continue restarts the automatic update process from where it left off. NOTE: Most options outside the Edit During Update dialog are disabled while the model is being reviewed or edited. (The dialog contains a list of the features created before the current one. NOTE: Some features. rather than automatically resuming update. This option is available only if an object involved in the failure. The possible options are: began. The remaining icons may or may not appear depending on the circumstances.

If Continue is chosen when a failure occurs. or to ignore a number of messages. the Update Selection dialog lists the features that have not yet been rebuilt. Suppress suppresses the feature currently being updated. Accept is used to acknowledge a single warning message about a failed feature (but not an error message) to allow the update to continue. This is useful for messages that will recur. listing out of date" features with either update or dependant failure reasons. In this case. which continues until the model is completely rebuilt or until a feature fails. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Step advances one feature at a time through the model. Editing the failed feature to resolve the problem automatically removes the out of date" mark from the Update Status Report. Continue triggers the update process.Editing the Model Step Back allows backward navigation through the model one feature at a time. is used to acknowledge multiple warning messages about failed features to allow the update to continue. Step To allows forward navigation through the model to a selected feature. similar to accept. The status of features may be viewed by choosing Information"Feature" Update Status Report. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-12 Delete allows deletion the of the feature that failed to update. The feature that fails is marked out of date". that feature is skipped. Accept Remaining.

See the Edit Parameters section of this lesson for more information about this option. Removed Unused References Edit Parameters Edit Position Edit Parameters allows modification of the parameters of the feature currently being updated. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-13 . Edit allows you to change the parameters of the feature currently being updated. A subĆmenu will display with the Edit Parameters.) Review the model cannot be used to review features that failed during update or that have not yet been rebuilt. but not editing. Review the model allows investigation. (The options available are the same as those in the Gateway application. NOTE: An editing option must be selected before any work may be performed outside the Edit during Update dialog. Remove Unused References and Edit Position options. of the rebuilt model with options from the menu bar or the third mouse button popĆup menu.Editing the Model Suppress Remaining suppresses the feature currently being updated and all subsequent features. Edit Position allows the selected or failed feature to be repositioned. See the Edit Positioning section of this lesson for more details about repositioning features.

the display does not change during update when an update method other than Show Current Model is used.Editing the Model If a failure occurs. the display is updated. When Playback is chosen. the edits will be lost. Step Back To. If Step is chosen to reĆcreate the model one feature at a time. the options that allow advance through the model (Step. or Edit Positioning Dimension is chosen on the same or an earlier feature. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Go To. choose Show Current Model. Edit Parameters. or Continue are chosen. Step Back. After the model update has finished. and then rethought. This may happen if Undo. or to the rebuilding of an earlier feature. If these options are being used. Step Back. and it is desirable to see what the model looks like at this stage of its rebuilding. NOTE: For performance reasons. NOTE: Edits are not permanent until the model is completely rebuilt. Step To. The display does not update if other options such as Step Back To. all of the solids in the model that will be updated disappear from the graphic window. If a feature is edited. the display updates each time a feature is rebuilt. making it necessary to return to the beginning of that feature's rebuilding. and Continue) are grayed out until the failure is resolved and the feature successfully updates.

This method of editing uses an Object/Action approach. Select Features Depending on which category the user has selected. the Type Filter may be used to narrow the band of selectable objects.Editing the Model Selection Toolbar The selection toolbar may be used anytime the selection of a feature for modification or the extraction of data is required. where the object needing editing is selected first from the graphic window and then the necessary action is defined. Reset All icons not shown Select All Deselect All Up One Level ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-15 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . This lesson will focus on the use of the Select Features option. Features The remaining options of the toolbar may be used to further discriminate in the selection of objects.

NOTE: When depressing MB3 the cursor must be on top of the selected object for the pop-up dialogs to appear. mouse button 3 (MB3) may be used to select an available operator for that object.Editing the Model Once an object has been selected. Various Feature options Sketch options NOTE: selected. Options may vary based upon application and feature ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Step 2 Review the model construction. the Playback function will be used to gain an understanding of how a model was constructed. The skills required to move a feature that is not located by positioning dimensions will also be demonstrated. Move & Delete Features In this activity.Editing the Model Activity 1 . from the Edit - All of the solid features are suppressed except the base solid feature which is BLOCK(2). Choose the Step icon. Step 1 Open part file pau_edit_feature_1 and start the Modeling application. Step 3 Move forward to the next feature.Playback. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved 15-17 . Choose the Feature Playback icon Feature toolbar.

is updated. - Choose the Edit icon box. Step 4 Examine the extruded feature. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-18 Each solid feature may be examined in a similar manner as it is updated. where the arrows begin. - Choose Back twice and then Cancel to return to the Edit During Update dialog. was extruded with an offset value to create this feature. in the Edit during Update dialog - Choose the Edit Parameters icon. The EXTRUDED(3) feature is highlighted in the graphic window because it is the current feature. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Examine the dialog box window and the graphic window to see that the edge of the BLOCK(2) feature.Editing the Model The next solid feature. The next set of actions will demonstrate how a feature may be examined to see how it was constructed. EXTRUDED(3). - Choose Feature Parameters.

in the View Most options outside the Edit During Update dialog are disabled while the model is being reviewed or edited. - Choose the Review the model icon. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-19 . T_SLOT(4). - Choose the Step icon. The next feature. Step 5 Move forward to the next feature.Editing the Model The defining parameters of the feature could also have been redefined using this option. is updated. The next action will allow the graphic window to be refreshed. - Try to Fit the view using the Fit icon toolbar.

Step 6 Move a feature relative to the WCS. The pad will be moved using the Move Feature function. Review the model allows view options to be accessed during the review/edit process. The pad illustrated below is a form feature that was not located with positioning dimensions. Continue to Step through until the model has been completely updated. Non-Positioned Pad ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual Z X Y EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose OK.Editing the Model - Fit the view using the Fit icon.

5 0 - Choose OK. All of the other features of the model are located associatively to the model using positioning dimensions and therefore not eligible for the Move Feature option. BLOCK(2) is the base solid on which all of the other features are constructed. and not listed. from the Edit Feature The dialog box window shows a partial list of the features of the model. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-21 . Enter the following parameters: DXC = DYC = DZC = .Editing the Model - Choose the Move Feature icon toolbar.75 -. - Choose RECTANGULAR_PAD(12). Choose OK. RECTANGULAR_PAD(12) is a feature located without positioning dimensions.

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose RECTANGULAR_PAD(12).75 in the positive X direction of the WCS and . Z X Y Mid Point - Choose XC Axis as the reference axis and choose OK.5 in the negative Y direction of the WCS. Step 7 Rotate a feature Between Two Axes. Choose OK. Choose Rotate Between Two Axes.Editing the Model The RECTANGULAR_PAD is moved a distance of . The Cue Line is prompting you to define a pivot point. Select the Mid Point of the Rectangular Pad edge as shown below. - Choose the Move Feature icon again.

Y Axis icon. Choose OK. - Choose the Move Feature icon again. Choose Csys to Csys. Choose RECTANGULAR_PAD(12). ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-23 .Editing the Model - Choose YC Axis as the destination axis and choose OK. The RECTANGULAR_PAD is rotated 90° about the specified point from the XC axis toward the YC axis. - Choose the X Axis. Step 8 Move a Feature from CSYS to CSYS.

- Choose the Offset from CSYS icon as the method to define the Destination coordinate system. Select the yellow Existing Coordinate System at its origin.Editing the Model - Select the edges as illustrated below to define the X axis and Y axis of the Reference coordinate system. Choose OK. Select X-Axis Here Z X Y Select Y-Axis Here - Choose OK. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-24 The RECTANGULAR_PAD is moved such that its relationship to the Reference coordinate system is maintained relative to the Destination coordinate system Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Editing the Model Step 9 Delete a Feature using the Object/Action approach. Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3. Select Delete from the Pop-Up window. - Verify the Selection toolbar has Select Features ON. turned Select Features - In the graphic window select the rectangular pad that was just moved and confirm if necessary. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-25 .

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Editing the Model The RECTANGULAR_PAD is removed from the model. Step 10 Do not save or close the part.

or Edit"Feature"Parameters D Select the feature from the graphic area or choose the feature name from the list in the Edit Parameters list dialog box and choose OK to confirm the selection.Editing the Model Parameters This option allows the redefinition of the parameter values of any parametric feature and causes the model to update to reflect the new values. Any of the valid parameter types may be selected from the Edit Parameters dialog box to display the original creation dialog box with the current parameter values. Parameters may be edited in the creation dialog boxes. D D D D D D D NOTE: The Select Features option in the Selection toolbar may also used to select features from the graphic window and edit parameters using MB3. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-27 . . Choose OK to complete editing at each of the creation dialog boxes. or . . Some parameters which may be edited will display on the screen where they can be selected and edited directly. Choose OK to complete the feature edit. To edit a feature's parameters: D Choose the Edit Parameters icon from the Menu bar. Choose OK again to complete the model edit. The Edit Parameters dialog box listing the different types of parameters valid for the selected feature is presented.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose the type of dimension edit (add. this option allows the addition of positioning dimensions to features that are either underspecified or were not given any positioning dimensions at the time of creation. Complete the edit. Once the feature to edit has been selected. edit. Select the dimension or dimension type.Editing the Model Positioning This option allows a feature to be moved by editing its positioning dimensions. NOTE: If the selected feature has no positioning dimension associated with it. or Edit"Feature"Positioning D D D D D ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-28 NOTE: The Select Features option in the Selection toolbar may also used to select features from the graphic window and edit positioning using MB3. or delete) as required. the Add Dimension option is automatically selected. To edit a feature's positioning: Choose the Edit Positioning icon from the Menu bar. then choose OK. In addition. Select the feature to be edited. the system will offer the following option choices based upon the positioning status of the selected feature.

it is defined by the boolean operation associated with the feature type being created. Select feature to be positioned Target solid This curve is the intersection between the feature and the target solid. any object that is the intersection between the feature being positioned and the target solid's face may not be selected as the dimensioning geometry. The boolean operation does not occur until after the position of the feature has been defined. When adding positioning dimensions. no edge will be selectable as the target edge because both edges are intersection curves. Identify Solid Face may be used to position to the center of the cylinder. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-29 . When adding positioning dimensions to a Thru hole. the intersection curve is not a valid selection to specify location. Target solid Valid target edges for positioning purposes must belong to features existing in the feature creation list of the model before the feature being positioned.Editing the Model Add Dimension This option may be used to add a positioning dimension to a feature. The intersection curve is a child product of the tool and target solid's face. Therefore.

Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Error Messages ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-30 If the new location of the feature causes it to miss the target solid. Feature #2 may not be positioned using any face or edge from feature #3. it is selected automatically). Once all the desired dimension values have been edited. Enter the new value. the Edit during Update dialog box will be presented. The feature will then remain in its current location as its position is no longer associated to the model. To use this option: D Select the dimension to edit (if there is only one positioning dimension.Editing the Model For example. 2 3 1 Edit Dimension Value Features may be moved by changing the values of the feature's positioning dimensions. choose OK. D Continue editing as many dimension values as desired. this dialog box provides several options for dealing with the failed update as discussed in the Playback section. Delete Dimension Use this option to delete a positioning dimension from a feature. in the figure below the features are numbered in the order in which they were created.

Choose MB2 to approve the parameter change. - Choose the Edit Parameters icon. Change the X Length to 2. - Continue to work with pau_edit_feature_1. Choose MB2 a final time to approve the change to the model. - Choose Feature Dialog from the Edit Parameters dialog box. The parametric values for the block are displayed on the graphic window. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-31 . Also. p8=3. Choose MB2 again to approve the change to the indicated feature.Edit Features and Positioning Dimensions In this activity. this will be used in the next few steps. Choose OK. note the expression that controls the width. Choose BLOCK(2).120.Editing the Model Activity 2 .75. you will edit the creation parameters of a feature and then capture one aspect of the design intent by editing a feature's positioning dimensions to be associative to the creation parameters of another feature. A parameter may be chosen by selecting an expression in the graphic screen or by choosing Feature Dialog. Step 1 Edit a Feature's Parameters.

Z Y X Y Z X Before After Step 2 Edit the Pad's Positioning Dimensions using the Object/Action approach. (Status line should read RECTANGULAR_PAD(7)) Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3. turned - - In the graphic window select the rectangular pad shown in the above figure and accept if necessary. the pad on the bottom is no longer in the center. Assume that the design intent is that the pad should always remain in the center of the part. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . This situation will be remedied in the next step. Select Edit Positioning from the Pop-Up window. Verify the Selection toolbar has Select Features ON. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-32 The positioning dimensions for the feature are displayed in the graphic window.Editing the Model Notice that after the part updated.

the view may need to be rotated and updated (MB3). entering a simple equation will capture this aspect of the design intent. - Enter p8/2. The expression p8 controls the width of the part. Choose MB2 again to signify the end of dimension editing for this feature. - - The part should update and the pad is now located in the center of the block. At this point another feature could have been selected for editing. To see the pad feature and expressions better. Since the pad should always stay in the center of the part. - Choose MB2 to approve the dimension edit. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-33 . In the graphic screen select the p39=1.560 expression.Editing the Model - Choose Edit Dimension Value. Choose MB2 again to signify the end of positioning editing for this feature. Choose MB2 a final time to signify the end of positioning editing for the model.

accept the feature with MB2. then select with MB1 and use Quick Pick to step through the multiple candidates. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Place cursor here and wait for the ellipsis to appear (+. - Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3.. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-34 - Choose the Fit icon. - In the graphic window select the base block feature as shown in the figure below. when it reads BLOCK(2). Watch the Status line. Notice that the pad feature remained in the center of the block.. Choose MB2 twice to complete the edit.)...Editing the Model Step 3 Edit the Block Width using the Object/Action approach. Select the p8=2. Change the value to 5.75 dimension from the graphic window. You will need to wait for the ellipsis (+.00 .) to appear. Select Edit Parameters from the Pop-Up window.

75 . you will rectify the problem and continue the modeling process. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-35 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual .Using the Update Tool In this activity. Using Edit during Update. - Choose the Edit Parameters icon. - Continue to work with pau_edit_feature_1. you will edit a feature that causes a feature to be positioned completely outside the target body. Select the p8=5.Editing the Model Activity 3 . - Choose BLOCK(2) and select MB2.00 dimension from the graphic window. Step 1 Edit a Feature's Parameters. Choose MB2 three times to complete the edit. Change the value to 1.

75 width value. The feature that has caused the failure to occur is shown in the graphic window.Editing the Model The Edit during Update dialog box appears. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Choose Edit Dimension Value. The reason for the failure may now be clearly seen. the hole falls outside the bounds of the body. - Choose Show Current Model. - Choose Show Failure Area. The model appears in the graphic window relative to the new 1. - Choose the Edit icon window in the Edit During Update ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-36 - Choose the Edit Position icon.

The model updates correctly.625 dimension from the graphic window. do not save.Editing the Model - Select the p45=1. Step 2 Close the part. The hole now falls within the solid model. Enter p8-1 and choose MB2 four times. correcting the failure. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-37 .

most of the options are not available if the Modeling application is not active. and what operation may be pending at the time. Holding down the third mouse button on a feature causes a feature specific popĆup menu to be displayed offering pertinent editing options. as well as actions to be performed on a feature. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-38 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Both. Also. are located vertically on the right side of the Unigraphics window. by default.Editing the Model Model Navigator The Model Navigator is a special window that allows investigation of. UNIX: Icon from Navigator toolbar Windows : Icon from Resource Bar The options on the popĆup menu may vary depending on what feature is selected. To access the Model Navigator in UNIX use the Navigator toolbar and to access the Model Navigator in Windows use the Resource bar.

Editing the Model The following options appear on this popĆup menu for Feature nodes: D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D Display Dimensions Show/Hide Select Make Current Feature Edit Parameters Edit Positioning Suppress/Unsuppress Reorder Before Reorder After Group Replace Rename Delete Object Dependency Browser Information Properties The following options appear on the popĆup menu for Work Part nodes: D D D Expand/Collapse All (with Quick Look listing only) List Interpart Children List Interpart Parents Work Part nodes are not discussed in this text. Display Dimensions Choosing Display Dimensions causes the feature's parameter values to be displayed (just as they are with Edit Parameters). ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-39 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . The temporary display remains until a Refresh is done. For more information about these topics consult the technical documentation.

This option may be used to make an existing feature the current feature of the solid body. This option also allows for all descendants/ancestors to be selected." which are produced directly from a curve feature operation. This option is not effective in showing or hiding "resulting curves. This function blanks/unblanks the object(s) and their display can be brought back by using the Show/Hide options or by using the blanking functions found under the Edit"Blank options in the Menu bar. Select Allows the parents or children of a feature to be selected in the Model Navigator. all of the features after it are marked inactive. such as from the Gateway application. the pad is a child of the block. Make Current Feature Provides a quick and easy method for inserting features into a part. and then add more features at that point in the model hierarchy. The ancestors of the hole are the pad and the block features. making it the current feature. such as with Offset Curve. If this option is used on a feature whose time stamp positions it in the middle of the build hierarchy. As new features are created they are inserted into the build hierarchy before the inactive features. then the hole becomes a direct child to the pad. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-40 NOTE: If feature creation is not currently applicable. the system will hide (blank) the parent curves which generated the swept feature. however the hole is also a descendant of the block.Editing the Model Show/Hide Allows the body or parents for the selected feature to be hidden or displayed. The Hide Parents option is more applicable to swept features. If a hole is placed on the pad feature. The Hide Body option blanks" the solid body that the feature is applied to. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . the Make Current Feature option is unavailable. For example. If the swept feature is derived by a solid edge(s) then the Hide Parents option will hide (blank) the parent solid body. If the Hide Parents option is used on a swept feature. if a pad feature is placed on a block feature.

When the feature is suppressed. Reorder Before/After Allows the construction order of the features in the model to be altered by positioning the selected feature before or after other features in the build hierarchy. which may be used to unsuppress the feature. the check is removed from the checkbox. Nodes may also be dragged and dropped in the Model Navigator window to perform a feature reorder.Editing the Model NOTE: When a pre-V16 part file is loaded. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-41 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . Edit Parameters Same as Edit Parameters as discussed previously in this lesson. Group Same as Format"Group Features (see technical documentation for more information). The option on the popĆup menu changes to Unsuppress . Choose the feature that the selected node is to be reordered relative to from the Reorder Before or Reorder After cascade menus. When the feature is unsuppressed the check is displayed in the checkbox. Multiple features may be selected by holding the Ctrl key down during selection. Suppress and Unsuppress Feature Choosing Suppress causes the feature to be suppressed and an immediate update to the model to be performed. Edit Positioning Same as Edit Positioning as discussed previously in this lesson. Double clicking on a feature name in the Model Navigator will bring up the Edit Parameters dialog box. the last feature in that part is the current feature. Suppress works with the checkbox associated with the feature node.

such as BLOCK(1). Delete Same as Edit→Delete as discussed previously in this lesson. delete and move feature operations. For example. Object Dependency Browser The Object Dependency Browser allows the parent and child relationships of a feature to be interrogated. The features included in the Feature Set can also be hidden so they do not show in the Model Navigator and can only be accessed under the Feature Set Name. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-42 Information Provides information about the selected feature in the Information window. For more information on replace see the technical documentation. a surface that is used as a trim face could be replaced for a different surface without having to delete or redefine several other features. Rename Features are named by the system on creation. Choosing Group causes the Sets of Features dialog box to appear. Members of a Feature Set can be controlled together during suppress. To delete a Feature Set without deleting its members.Editing the Model This option lets you group features into a special collection called a Feature Set. The rename option allows userĆdefined names to be assigned in place of the system assigned names. all of its member features are also deleted. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . NOTE: If you delete a Feature Set. Replace The replace option allows a feature's definition to be replaced or redefined" by another feature. first remove its members.

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-43 . For more information on feature attributes and Model Navigator columns see the technical documentation. which can be edited similarly to the Rename function.Editing the Model Properties The properties option provides access to General and Attribute information for the feature selected. Attributes can be added to any feature to include information which could be called out in a specified column of the Model Navigator. General properties include the feature name.

Windows ONLY: Choose the tack icon in the upper left hand corner to permanently display the Model Navigator. press and hold down MB1. Step 1 Open part file pau_edit_feature_2 and start the Modeling application. This should afford a better understanding of how the part was constructed. - - The block feature is suppressed as well as all of the other features.Reordering with the Model Navigator This activity will show how reordering a feature impacts the design of the part. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Step 3 Reorder the Hollow feature. drag the feature on top of EXTRUDED(3). Place the cursor over the node for HOLLOW(1). is by suppressing all the features and then unsuppressing each feature one at a time. Step 2 See how the part was constructed. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-44 - Select the Hollow feature in the Model Navigator.Editing the Model Activity 4 . Click on the checkmark to the left of BLOCK(0). Start with BLOCK(0) and work down. This is because the subsequent features possess a child relationship to the block. unsuppress each feature by clicking in the checkbox to restore the display. Another way of reviewing the construction of a model. - In the Model Navigator. - Choose the Model Navigator icon from the Navigator toolbar (UNIX) or from the Resource Bar (Windows) and size as required.

use the third mouse button popĆup menu to choose Rename. it can now be renamed with a description that is more meaningful to the user. Since the feature has been identified. Notice that the time stamp [(4)] was added. - Place the cursor over the node name BLEND(4). - Press and hold down MB1 on HOLLOW(2) and drag the feature on top of BLEND(5). - Select the node name BLEND(4) using the first mouse button. The Rename dialog box appears. Step 4 Identify and Rename a Feature. - Press and hold down MB1 on HOLLOW(5) and drag the feature on top of BLEND(6). Notice the sharp corners on the inside radii. The corresponding feature highlights in the graphic window. Now there is a radius on the inside corners. - Close the Model Navigator Window. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-45 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . The new name is reflected in the Model Navigator.Editing the Model The hollow feature is reordered after the extruded feature and the graphic window reflects the edit. (Windows users remember the tack) Step 5 Choose File"Close"All Parts. - Enter THROAT_BLEND and press Enter.

pockets. a thru face. pads. a slot feature is reattached from the original placement face to a new face.Editing the Model Reattaching a Feature One of the feature parameters available for editing under Edit Parameters is Reattach. In the figure below. and bosses). Reattach allows the feature references of the feature to be redefined. and linear instance sets of these features. trim faces of extruded and revolved features. Objects that may have their references redefined include most features (holes. an edge. the model must include a thru feature for either of the Specify Thru Face options to be enabled. Original slot feature Slot feature is reattached to a new placement face Using the Reattach Menu dialog box The Reattach Menu dialog box only enables the options pertaining to redefining the selected feature. grooves. and userĆdefined features (UDFs). or include a UDF for the Specify Tool Placement Face option to be enabled. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-46 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . For example. slots. A feature reference may be an attachment face. etc.

Editing the Model When an option icon is chosen. the system highlights the existing references of the type in question. the system highlights the current thru face for the selected feature. Current positioning dimensions Reference direction type Use to change direction of the normal direction Specify location of feature Use to change reference direction ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-47 . if the Specify First Thru Face icon is chosen. For example.

the following options on the Reattach Menu dialog box are available: Filter allows filtering of selectable object types. In addition. For example. Specify First Thru Face. only faces and datum planes are selectable. Specify Second Thru Face. Specify Second Thru Face allows the second through/ trim face of the feature being edited to be redefined. Specify Tool Placement Face allows the tool face of a User Defined Feature (UDF) to be redefined. The following object types are available: D D D D D All Types Face Datum Plane Edge Datum Axis ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-48 The above list of filter options is dependent on the specific Reattach option icon chosen. and datum axes are selectable. Specify Reference Direction allows a new horizontal reference to be specified for the feature being edited. for Specify Target Placement Face. For Specify Horizontal Reference. Specify First Thru Face allows the first through/trim face of the feature being edited to be redefined. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and Specify Tool Placement Face. edges. The default is All Types. faces. Redefine Positioning Dimensions allows new positioning dimensions to be specified for the feature being edited. while using any of these redefine feature options. datum planes.Editing the Model Reattach Menu dialog box Options The following options are available to redefine feature references: Specify Target Placement Face allows a new attachment face for the feature being edited to be specified.

Delete Positioning Dimension allows deletion of a selected positioning dimension. Reverse Direction allows the feature's reference direction to be reversed. allow the definition of a new horizontal or vertical feature reference. Since features are initially placed at the center of a plane. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-49 . The Direction Reference options. its available references are highlighted in the graphic window. This option is useful when reattaching features to datum planes. Reverse Side allows the feature's normal direction to be reversed when reattaching that feature to a datum plane.Editing the Model A list window displays the types of positioning dimensions currently on the selected feature. Specify Origin allows quick relocation of the reattached feature by moving it to a specified origin. the update may fail since the plane's center may not be near the feature's actual position. If a feature does not have any positioning dimensions. Horizontal and Vertical. The default is always set for the existing reference type. DoubleĆclicking with the first mouse button on a dimension in the list allows it to be redefined. If the first mouse button is used to select a dimension in this list. this option is grayed out. This option may be used with all features.

Choose Reattach from the Edit Parameters dialog box. Step 1 Open the part file pau_reattach_1 and start the Modeling application. - In the graphic window select the rectangular pad and accept if necessary. - ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-50 - A Reattach dialog box displays icons for the selection steps and other options for reattaching the feature. (Status line should read RECTANGULAR_PAD(7)) Place the cursor over the feature and select MB3. Select Edit Parameters from the Pop-Up window. you will move a feature from one face to another. Step 2 Reattach the extruded feature. Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Editing the Model Activity 5 .Reattaching a Feature In this activity.

Redefine Positioning Dimensions. Now the second icon. - Select the right face of the solid.500). Specify Reference Direction highlights. the current horizontal reference vector is displayed in the graphic window. and accept the selection. - Select the vertical positioning dimension (2. Target Face Horizontal Reference Now the third icon. Choose the lower front edge of the solid as the target object as shown below. notice that the current placement face for the Rectangular Pad feature is highlighted in the graphic window. The Cue Line prompts to select a Target face to define the new placement face for the feature. and accept the selection.Editing the Model The icon for Specify Target Placement Face is highlighted. - Select the lower edge of the face as the horizontal reference. Also. and the cue prompts you for selection of a new horizontal reference. highlights and the Cue Line prompts you to select a Dimension to Redefine. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-51 .

Select the right outside edge of the pad feature as the tool edge. Select the right vertical edge of the solid as the Target Object as shown below.000). Tool edge Target object - Select the horizontal positioning dimension (1. - Tool edge Target Object ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-52 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Editing the Model - Select the bottom outside edge of the pad feature as the tool edge.

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 15-53 . Step 3 Choose File"Close"All Parts.Editing the Model - Choose MB2 twice to complete the reattachment of the feature.

The good designer will possess good modeling skills that keep in mind downstream editing requirements. and function. form.Editing the Model SUMMARY The Edit Features functions in Unigraphics provides an efficient and robust capability to change design. This lesson introduced: D D D D D D D D D D D Delayed Update on Edit Suppress a Feature Unsuppress a Feature Move a Feature Delete a Feature Use the Playback Function Edit Feature Parameters Edit Feature Positioning Edit During Edit The Model Navigator Reattach a Feature to a Different Face ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 15-54 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Because parametric values can be accessed and edited. fit. investment of parametric design time is not wasted when the need for design changes occur.

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-1 . Create a Circular Array. OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this lesson. you will be able to: D D Create a Rectangular Array.Instance Arrays Instance Arrays Lesson 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ PURPOSE To introduce Instance Arrays.

16-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . duplicates existing features.Instance Arrays ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Instance Using Insert"Feature Operation"Instance from the main menu bar. eliminating repetitive efforts in the creation of models. Choosing Insert"Feature Operation"Instance yields the following dialog box which supports Rectangular and Circular Instance Arrays as well as the ability to Mirror Features or Mirror an entire solid Body.

using the Simple method may increase performance and in a worst case scenario the Identical method may be required. NOTE: Most Feature Operations may not be instanced. system performance may be affected. However. the parameters of the feature may be edited and those changes are reflected in every instance of the feature. The Instance not only duplicates the feature but preserves the parameters of the feature. In these cases. that is. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-3 . An instance is a shape linked feature. the parameters of the Instance Array itself may be edited. The instance itself is also a parametric feature. The following Instance options are available: D D D D D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Rectangular Circular Mirror Body (Not covered in this course) Mirror Feature (Not covered in this course) Pattern Face (Not covered in this course) There are three methods of creating Instance arrays: D D D General Simple Identical In most cases the General method is the best practice. similar to a copy. in very complex models.Instance Arrays Instance This option allows Instance arrays from an existing feature to be created. Since all instances of a feature are associated.

including the original feature to be Instanced.00 . All rectangular arrays will be created in a plane parallel to the XC Ć YC plane. XC Offset: The spacing between the instances in the XC direction. The total Number of Instances for both the XC and YC must be a whole number greater than zero. If the feature position is edited. YC Offset: The spacing between the instances in the YC direction. These arrays may be in either the XC or YC direction or both. the following parameters must be entered: D D D D Number Along XC: The total number of instances in the XC direction.75 Number Along YC =4 YC Offset = 1 Hole selected for Instance 1. The position of the rectangular array will remain relative to the location of the feature that the array is based on. including the original feature to be Instanced. Number Along YC: The total number of instances in the YC direction.75 Solid block 16-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Instance Arrays ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Rectangular Instance Array This function allows the creation of a linear array of instances from the selected feature(s). Parameter Settings: Number Along XC = 3 XC Offset = . The direction will be relative to the current orientation of the WCS. The Offset values can be either positive or negative. the array position will also update. After the feature(s) to be instanced is selected. The WCS can be redefined while in the process of creating arrays.

including the existing feature. NOTE: Defining a point and direction will not maintain positional associativity. Angle: The angular spacing between instances. A rotation axis may be defined by specifying a Point & Direction (Vector Constructor dialog box) or by specifying a Datum Axis. Defining the rotation axis by a datum axis will maintain positional associativity. The plane in which the circular instance array will be created will be normal to this rotation axis. after specifying the rotation axis. Hole selected for instance array Rotation axis +ZC Reference point Y 45_ Parameter Settings: Number =ĄĄĄ8 =Ą45_ =Ą+ZC = arc center Z X Angle Rotation Axis Reference Point EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-5 . the parameters for the circular array must be supplied. After selecting the feature to be instanced in a circular array. the circular array will not move with it. Once the feature is selected and the parameters specified. Parameters include the method for creating the instance array plus the following values: D D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Number: The number of instances to be created in the circular array. a rotation axis must be selected.Instance Arrays Circular Instance Array Allows a circular array of instances from selected features to be created. Using Point & Direction. relative to the rotation axis. about the reference point. regardless of WCS orientation. If the defined point moves. the following information must be entered: D Reference Point: Defines the location that the instanced feature will be rotated about.

Rectangular Instance Array ÏÏÏ In this activity. 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Design Intent The finished part will have six holes. a rectangular instance array will be created from a hole feature. and start the Modeling application. Save the part as ***_array_1. 16-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Before After Step 1 Open the part file. The figure below illustrates the model to be used for this activity and an illustration of the finished part.Instance Arrays ÏÏÏ Activity 1 . There will be two holes in the XC direction and 3 holes in the YC direction. - Open pau_array_1.

- Enter . Select that Planar Placement Face and the Thru Face as shown. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select the outside face as the Planar Placement Face.Instance Arrays Step 2 Create a hole feature. Select the inside face as the Thru Face. Use Simple Hole type. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-7 . - Choose Hole.257 as the diameter of the hole and choose OK.

16-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose XĆAxis.Instance Arrays ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Position the hole as shown below. Step 3 Manipulate the WCS. - Choose WCS→Orient. The WCS must be in the proper orientation in order to create the instance array. YĆAxis.

- Choose OK. Choose the SIMPLE_HOLE(14). Step 4 Create a rectangular array of the hole feature. The feature may be selected from the graphics area or from the Instance dialog. Select Rectangular Array. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-9 . ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Y-Axis X-Axis The proper WCS orientation is shown below. - Choose Instance.Instance Arrays - Select the Axes as shown.

Step 5 Choose File"Close"Save and Close. 16-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Enter the Parameters for the Instance as shown below: Method Number Along XC XC Offset Number Along YC YC Offset General 2 1. Choosing Yes will create the instance as it is shown in the graphics area. Choosing No will return to the Enter Parameters dialog box. A temporary display of the instance array will appear in the graphics area. - Choose Yes.Instance Arrays ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose OK.25 3 .687 - Choose OK.

Design Intent The finished part will have four legs that are identical and are to be equally spaced about center of the cylinder. - Choose Instance.Instance Arrays Activity 2 . Before After Step 2 Create the Instance Feature. and start the Modeling application. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Save the part as ***_array_2. Step 1 Open pau_array_2.Circular Instance Array In this activity. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-11 . The figure below illustrates the model to be used for this activity and an illustration of the finished part. a circular instance array will be created from multiple features.

Enter the Parameters for the Instance as shown below. 16-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Choose OK to confirm the selections. Using a Datum Axis maintains positional associativity. Select the following five features from the Instance dialog: EXTRUDED(5) BOSS(6) BOSS(7) EXTRUDED(9) SIMPLE_HOLE(13) NOTE: Multiple features may be selected by pressing MB1. The axis of rotation must be selected. Method General. Number 3 Angle 120 - Choose OK. dragging over their names in the Instance dialog box. and releasing MB1.Instance Arrays ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose Circular Array.

To speed up the display process.Instance Arrays - Make layer 61 selectable. only the first feature selected will be previewed. Select the Datum Axis as shown. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select this Datum Axis A temporary system display previews the arrangement of the instances to be created.5 and choose OK. Step 3 Add a chamfer to an instanced hole feature. Key in the Offset value of 1. - Choose Yes if the temporary display looks correct. Confirm the selection if necessary and choose OK. Select the circular edge of any one of the instanced holes. Choose the Single Offset option. Save the part file. Select the Datum Axis Method. - Choose the Chamfer. - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-13 .

- Choose Edit→Feature→Parameters. Select the first instanced feature from the Feature Selection dialog box list and choose OK.Instance Arrays ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Notice that there is a choice to apply the chamfer only to the selected feature or to apply it to all instances. 16-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Step 4 Edit the Instance array parameters. - Choose Chamfer all instances.

Instance Arrays All options available for editing the selected feature are displayed in the dialog box that appears. The options in the dialog box may vary depending on which feature is selected. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose Instance Array Dialog. Accept the default Method of General and enter the new parameters: Total Number = 4 Angle = 360/4 Radius = 75 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-15 .

Instance Arrays ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - Choose OK three times to complete the edit. Step 5 Choose File"Close"Save and Close. The part should now have four legs and appear as shown below. 16-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual 16-17 . Created a Circular Instance Array. eliminating repetitive efforts in the creation of models. In this lesson you: D D Created a Rectangular Instance Array.Instance Arrays ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ SUMMARY The Instance functionality duplicates existing features.

Instance Arrays ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ 16 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) 16-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects Additional Projects Appendix A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-1 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 1 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects Project 2 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-3 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 3 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-5 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 4 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-7 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) A-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects Project 5 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-9 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 6 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-11 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 7 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-13 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 8 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-15 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 9 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-17 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 10 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-19 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 11 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-21 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 12 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-23 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 13 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-25 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 14 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-27 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 15 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-28 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-29 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 16 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-31 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 17 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-32 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-33 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ Project 18 ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A-34 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual A-35 .

Additional Projects ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ A ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) A-36 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

or directly enter the X-Y-Z coordinates in the fields provided. icons at the top of the dialog box. When you use the Point Constructor in any other option. you are only specifying temporary locations. These locations are displayed as asterisks (*). the Point Constructor lets you create point objects. It allows the creation of point objects as well as the determination of locations in threeĆdimensional space.Point Constructor Options Point Constructor Options Appendix B This appendix describes the various Point Constructor methods that may be used. The Point Constructor dialog box provides a standard way to specify points throughout Unigraphics. ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Points may be specified in one of two ways: either choose one of the provided. Points appear on the screen as plus signs (+). Choose Refresh to remove the asterisks. Specifying Locations When you choose the Point icon. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-1 . Creating Points vs.

such as the title block on a drawing. Points may be used to locate other objects. Points may also be used to construct curves or surfaces. the icon block displays the name of the method. For example. This option does not require a selection of the particular point type for each selection. ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Icon Methods To Specify a Point The top of the Point Constructor dialog box displays icons representing various methods for specifying a point. existing point. B-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Point Constructor Options Points have many uses in Unigraphics. Locating positions with the Point Constructor dialog box is also valuable. mid point or arc center. end point. Inferred Point Depending on where you select when using this option. As the cursor is passed over these icons. one of the following single selection options will be used: cursor location. The positions of the control points of a curve may also be specified. The icon methods are described below. the end of a line or the center of a circle may be specified to locate objects in model space.

When Snap to Grid is on. The location defined lies on the WCS Work plane. if the smallest increment on the part is in eighths of an inch (. use a grid (see Preferences→Work Plane "Show Grid). ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Existing Point Use this option to specify a location by selecting an existing point. The grid spacing may be set as desired. points snap to the nearest grid position. Remember that the point constructor allows locations in model space to be specified. The spacing in the X-direction does not need to be the same as the spacing in the Y-direction. such as placement of a drawing border.125). A point at exactly one inch in X and two inches in Y could be created by counting over eight grid points in X and up sixteen in Y and indicating a screen position. then the grid spacing would be set to . To locate points quickly and precisely. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-3 . or the location of an object. For example.Point Constructor Options Cursor Location Use this option to construct points anywhere on the screen by positioning the cross hairs and indicating a location. In the instance where an existing point is being selected it is generally a case of using that point to aid in the construction of another object such as a the endpoint of a line.125.

arcs. Selection Position B-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . place the selection ball near the end point you wish to select. conics. and splines. such as complete circles. Closed curves. have only one endpoint because the two ends are at the same coordinate location.Point Constructor Options End Point Use this option to specify locations at the end points of existing lines. The point is located at the end of the curve nearest to where it was selected (see below). Lines Conics Arcs Splines ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ When selecting geometry.

Mid points and End points of lines. Open Arcs Lines ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Conics Circles Splines EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-5 . The system locates the control point nearest the position where the curve is selected. Since some objects have more than one control point. place the cross hairs near the control point desired. Center points of circles or arcs. The control points. which vary for each object type. and End points or Knot points of splines. End points of conics. End points and Mid points of open arcs. Use the cursor to select objects.Point Constructor Options Control Point Use this option to locate points at the control points of geometric objects. include: Existing points.

Projections are always done along the ZC-axis. Implied intersections may be located even if the objects do not actually touch (see below). The system calculates an apparent intersection by projecting the curve parallel to the ZC axis.Point Constructor Options Intersection Point Use this option to locate a position at the intersection of two curves or at the intersection of a curve and a surface or plane. an apparent intersection occurs and the system creates the point on the first curve selected. If the curves intersect more than once. the system creates the point nearest to where the second curve was selected. Two Possible Intersections 1 Select second curve nearest the intersection you want ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ 2 When the two selected curves are not coplanar with the XC-YC plane. Second Curve ZC YC XC First Curve Point Positions may be indicated at the intersection of any two nonĆparallel curves. and the point will be defined on the first object selected (see below). Intersection point of line and arc Implied intersection of two lines B-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

selecting with the circumference of the large circle within the selection ball defines the center point of the large circle. Selection Point Center Point EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-7 . In the example below.Point Constructor Options Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Use this option to specify a position at the center of an arc or ellipse by selecting the arc along its circumference. ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Selection Point Center Point Selecting near the center of the large circle (see below) will not select the center of the large circle since the selection ball touches the circumference of the small circle.

The angular position on the arc or ellipse may also be defined on the unconstructed portion (or extension) of an arc or ellipse (see below). The angle is referenced from the positive XC axis and is measured counterclockwise in the WCS. Position on Arc 105° ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ The angle value is entered in degrees. Position on Arc 225° B-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Point Constructor Options Angle on Arc/Ellipse Use this option to locate a position at an angular location on an arc or an ellipse.

Select Here Quadrant Point is Located ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Points may be located at the starting point of the arc or ellipse and then at quarterĆdistance intervals along the object. Select Here Quadrant Point is Located EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-9 .Point Constructor Options Quadrant Point Use this option to locate positions at the quarter points of an arc or an ellipse. The quadrant position may also be defined on the unconstructed portion (or extension) of an arc (see below). The point located is the quadrant point nearest to the position selected.

Offset allows a position to be specified away from a specified reference. The WCS may be moved to any location and placed in any orientation. ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Offset This option allows the specification of a position in model space offset from a reference position in model space. The default setting is None (no offset). The offset location may be specified relative to the reference position using either the absolute or the work coordinate system.Point Constructor Options Choosing a Coordinate System Choose WCS or Absolute to specify which coordinate system the system references when locating positions using the Base Point text entry fields. This is a useful tool if the desire is to specify many positions where each position is offset from the previous position. or when the position that is being specified is relative to another position most easily defined by selecting a preĆexisting point. it remains in effect until another offset method is selected. or base position in one of the five ways discussed below. The absolute coordinate system is a fixed coordinate system. The WCS (Work Coordinate System) is the default. Once an offset method has been specified. B-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

OK could then be chosen a number of times (7) to offset the remaining points from each previous point. then the next offset position based on the values. Offset 4 Offset 3 First Point Offset 2 Offset 1 ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Exiting the Point Constructor menu when using an offset requires the return of the offset setting to NONE. or by manually changing the offset type back. the offset would be set to rectangular and the values entered. If The NONE setting is not reset. The first point could be specified.Point Constructor Options In the example below. Each alternating OK specifies the next base position. This may be accomplished by choosing the RESET button. and to set the Offset option to None. the need is to specify a quick row of points. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-11 . the Point Constructor continues to offset positions from the last specified position. Reset Use the Reset button to quickly set the X-Y-Z coordinate fields to 0. offset in the X direction and Y direction.0.

ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ The origin of the coordinate system has no effect on the offset.0 Y = 0. and Z directions relative to the coordinate system specified from a reference point (see below). Y. Offset Offset Point X = 2.Point Constructor Options Rectangular Offset This option allows a position to be offset by entering values that represent the X.5 Z = 1. The direction of the offset is determined by the coordinate system selected and the orientation of that coordinate system.5 Reference Point Z Y X Coordinate System B-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

The radius and the angle always lie in the XĆY plane of the coordinate system specified.ZC) Angle EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-13 .Point Constructor Options Cylindrical Offset This option allows an offset position to be specified by entering cylindrical coordinates (see below). and DeltaĆZC are defined relative to the specified coordinate system and applied as illustrated below. The offset values for Radius. A cylindrical offset may reference either the absolute coordinate system or the work coordinate system. Offset ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Radius Angle Delta-ZC Radius Offset Point ZC YC XC Reference Point Distance Along ZC-axis (Delta . Angle.

Angle 1 always lies in the X-Y plane. Offset ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Radius Angle 1 Angle 2 Z Y X Offset Point Radius Angle 2 Reference Point Angle 1 Vector Offset This option allows specification of an offset position by indicating a direction and entering a distance in that direction (see below).Point Constructor Options Spherical Offset This option allows specification of an offset position using spherical coordinates. The direction is defined by selecting a line. The radius defines the distance between the base point and the offset point. and Angle 2 defines the elevation of the offset point from the X-Y plane. two angles and a radius (see below). The point is offset toward the end of the line that is closest to where the line was selected. Entered Distance Offset Point Direction of Offset Z Y X Reference Point Line Selected Here Line Selected to Define Vector B-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . A spherical offset may reference either the work coordinate system or the absolute coordinate system.

Reference Point Select Here .Point Constructor Options Offset Along Curve This option allows an offset position to be defined along a curve by a specified arc length distance or a percentage of the total curve path length (see below). Note that lines may also be used as the curves" for this offset. For this Offset Direction For this Offset Direction EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual B-15 . . . Offset Point Direction of Offset Reference Point Offset Point Direction of Offset Reference Point ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ How the curve is selected determines the direction in which the offset will occur. Select the curve away from the reference position on the side of the curve you want to specify the position (see below). . . Select Here .

Point Constructor Options ÉÉÉ B ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) B-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

D D D D D D D Transformation procedure Terminology Translate Scale Rotate about a point Mirror through a line Rotate about a line There are no activities. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-1 . The following topics are covered.Transformations Transformations Appendix C This appendix discusses the fundamentals of transformations.

Transformation Procedure D D Choose Edit→Transform. make multiple moves.Transformations Transformations The Edit→Transform option allows objects to be translated. layouts. drawings.. There are separate options from the main menu bar to deal with these items. etc. Select the objects for transformation. The Class Selection Subfunction dialog box may be used to select the objects. Choose a transformation type from the dialog box shown below. NOTE: Views. D ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . and scaled. rotated. Transformations may be used to create multiple copies of selected objects. scales. or the current WCS are not translatable objects.

Rotate. Transformation Options Terminology Destination Layer allows you to select a layer on which to place the transformed objects. or Reposition to create closed wireframe shapes. Keeps the transformed objects on their original layer. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Trace Status on creates connecting curves between the original objects end points and their transformed copies. Mirror.Transformations D Complete the additional selections and choices from dialog boxes. and choose OK. Trace curves are independent of the Destination Layer setting. Trace Status is not applicable to solid bodies. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-3 . connecting lines are not created between the original object and the transformed copies. Choose one of the following options: D D D Work Orig Specify Places the transformed objects on the current work layer. Original object Transformed Object Trace Curves Before After Trace Status may be used with Translate. Scale. surfaces. or boundary objects. When trace status is off. Then complete the choices on the dialog box shown below. and are always created on the current Work layer. Moves the transformed objects to the specified layer.

All associated datum planes and axes are also moved with their solid body. the distance is divided by the subdivision factor. scale via uniform method. while keeping the original intact in its initial position. When a solid body containing swept features is moved. its positioning features and their associated dimensions are moved. Undo Last remains available until you choose Reselect Objects. Use the Scale operation to accomplish this. After the number of subdivisions has been entered. The subdivision factor is equal to the number of these parts. Multiple Copies may be selected to enter a desired number of copies. Move allows transformation of an object from its original location to a new location.Transformations Subdivisions allows the transformation distance to be divided into a number of equal parts. The selection in this option is object based. In scale. All sketch features (when sketched on a face or datum plane) are moved with the solid body as well. the angle of rotation is divided by the subdivision factor. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . When a solid body is moved. In rotation. Use Subdivisions to translate. Copy allows an object to be duplicated at a new location. NOTE: A solid body cannot be moved with the transformation type set to scale. move as well. the subdivision distance is the nth root of the transformation. or Multiple Copies. A feature of a solid body may not be selected for this operation. or rotate an object. Undo Last cancels any immediately preceding transform operation. NOTE: Subdivisions only divides the transformation distance into equal parts. It does not display selected objects at each subdivided segment. the Transform Type dialog box redisplays. the sweep outlines. Copy. where n is equal to the subdivision factor. In translation. Use Undo Last after a transformation via Move. Other features or solid bodies sharing those sweep outlines are also moved. or paths. Multiple Copies allows duplication of objects a specified number of times during certain transform operations.

Destination Layer. Copy. but before it is undone. occur during the next transformation operation. or Multiple Copies selected immediately following Undo Last. Move. Trace Curves. regenerates the objects in a state that preceded Undo Last. Objects originally selected for transformation remain selected at the completion of the Undo Last.Transformations Changes in Transform Type. or Subdivisions made after a transformation. They will not affect the execution of Undo Last. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-5 . and ready for the next transformation operation.

ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . or by a distance of delta. Delta allows the selected objects to be translated by specifying a new location in terms of the work (delta XC. Translated objects maintain the original orientation. delta YC. and delta ZC) coordinates. To a Point allows the selected objects to be translated by indicating a reference and a destination point.Transformations Translate Objects may be Translated (moved) to a point.

The results of different reference point positions are illustrated below. Care must be exercised in choosing a reference point for the scale operation because the scale factor is applied to the geometry equally relative to the reference point.Transformations Scale This option affects the size of an object and the distance between the object and its reference point. Reference Point Reference Point ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Reference Point Reference Point Scale Factor=1/2 NOTE: A solid body may not be scaled by copying it without losing its parametric information.. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-7 . A nonĆuniform scale method may be specified with the values relative to the WCS. Scale allows the selected objects to be proportionately resized.

C-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . An example of where this option might be useful is to incorporate variable shrinkage factors in mold design. With the NonĆUniform Scale method. a block feature) cannot be nonĆuniform scaled via Copy. YC. The figure below illustrates an example of NonĆUniform Scale. Undo Last is available even if the rescaled object had been converted to a different kind of object.75 YC Scale = . and ZC axes.Transformations NonĆUniform Scale allows objects to be resized independently with respect to the XC.25 YC XC After ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Before NOTE: NonĆUniform Scale will not allow a Move operation on a solid body. Use Copy instead.5 ZC Scale = 1. analytic face geometry (for example. However. ZC ZC YC XC Scale Factors XC Scale = . first convert those sheet bodies into bĆsurfaces using the Convert function. then sew them together into a new solid body valid for nonĆuniform scaling. If you wish to nonĆuniform scale a solid body containing analytic surfaces.

00 ZC When an object is transformed into a different type.Transformations NOTE: Once an arc is converted into a spline.35 YC Scale = 1. it can no longer be restored to its original object type. dimensions. view modifications. Subdivisions may not be used in NonĆUniform Scale. and offset sheet bodies).(See figure below) YC ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉ XC Before Arc YC ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ XC After Spline ZC Scale Factors XC Scale = 1. attributes.02 ZC Scale = 1. some or all of the original object data may be lost (for example. drafting objects. tool paths. ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-9 .

Original Object Number of Copies: 3 Subdiv Factor: 4 Rotation Angle: 270_ Reference Point ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ZC YC XC Line Parallel To ZC C-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The figure below illustrates Rotation About a Point. with multiple copies.Transformations Rotate About a Point Use this option to move objects around a line parallel to the ZC axis. A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise. a rotation and angle dialog box displays. and passing through a specified reference point. After the reference point for rotation has been selected.

The figure below illustrates an example of Mirror Through a Line. Three options are available for line selection. Transformed Object YC ZC Original Object Reference Line XC ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-11 .Transformations Mirror Through a Line A mirror image of an object may be created on the opposite side of a reference line.

The figure below illustrates an example of Rotate About a Line. multiple copies. and Point and Vector. Original Hole Reference Point ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Z Y Number Of Copies: 7 Rotation Angle: 315_ Reference Point: Arc Center X C-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Three options are available for line selection: Two Points. A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise.Transformations Rotate About a Line This option allows objects to be moved around a reference line which is not necessarily parallel to the ZC axis. Existing Line.

except for the offset distance. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual C-13 . which shows a combination of Offset Curves and curves Mirrored Through a Line: Associative Offset Curves No Associativity ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Mirrored Curves Parent Curves (Not Mirrored) TIP Careful consideration of the curves used as parents for the Offset Curves is necessary. but the lines at the top were.Transformations Using Transformations for Symmetrical Geometry For swept solids using explicit curves that have common geometrical subsets. the use of Mirror Through a Line and Mirror Through a Plane can save users considerable creation time. editing of the Offset Curves is accomplished only by editing the parents. Remember. Consider the example below. The Offset Curves are handled as a complete set. Also. note that the circle and arc at the bottom were not mirrored.

Transformations (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ C-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

OBJECTIVES Upon completion of this appendix. you will be able to: D D D D D Create Lines Create Arcs Create Circles Create Fillets Trim Curves ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-1 .Curve Creation Curve Creation Appendix D PURPOSE To introduce Basic Curves.

NOTE: In Unigraphics. D-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . the orientation or direction can be based on the WCS. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ The Work Coordinate System When creating curves. a curve is considered to be a point. will be created on the XC-YC plane or a plane parallel to it. line. except the 2 curve fillet. arc. regardless of the work view or perspective on the screen. spline or conic. vertical is parallel to the YCĆaxis. The Curve creation options are brought up by choosing Insert→Curve. Any 2D curve.Curve Creation Explicit Curves The intent of this appendix is to teach 2D generator and guide geometry for the purposes of sweeping through space to create solid bodies. and normal is parallel to the ZCĆaxis. The term horizontal appearing in any dialog box or Cue line is meant as parallel to the XCĆaxis.

While creating these curves. there is also quick access to the Trim Curve and Edit Curve Parameters functions. The icons on this dialog box are displayed below. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-3 . The Basic Curves dialog box is used to create lines. arcs. and fillets.Curve Creation Basic Curves When the Basic Curves icon is chosen. the Basic Curves dialog box is displayed. Circle Fillet Edit Curve Parameters Line Arc Trim The portion of the Basic Curves dialog box below the icons is different for each of the options selected. circles.

radius. and <Enter> is pressed.XC. and ZC. For example. etc. or radius of an arc. These fields track the location of the cursor. D D In Preferences→User Interface the number of decimal places displayed in the fields may be controlled as well as whether or not the fields track the current location of the cursor. the <Tab> key may be used or click the first mouse button in the fields desired. The Dialog Bar Location Fields D Parameter Fields Location fields . arc. the location specified is accepted and an asterisk will appear in the graphics area indicating that point. When a parameter field (such as length. YC. Parameter fields . YC. or circle is finished being created. or select twice for overstrike mode. D-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . . the values in all parameter fields are accepted and applied to the curve being constructed.). The text fields in the Dialog Bar will vary depending on which type of curve is being created and which options have been selected. new values may be entered in the parameter text fields and the newlyĆcreated object will be updated accordingly (unless String Mode is turned on. Select once in the field to insert text in the existing string. such as length of a line. the Dialog Bar below is what will appear when creating lines. As soon as a line. or ZC field has focus. or they can be used to input a coordinate location in the WCS.Curve Creation The Dialog Bar The Dialog Bar is a series of text fields that appear at the bottom of the graphics window when in the Basic Curves function.These fields control parameters of the curve. D To give a text field focus. D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ When the XC.any field other than the three mentioned above) has focus and <Enter> is pressed.

Endpoint TIP The endpoints of a circle are at 0Ăand 360 degrees. and the Point Method is Infer. There are 2 endpoints at the same exact location. This includes all Control points (see below) of the highlighted objects. Control Points Each type of curve has its own unique set of control points (endpoints and midpoints). at the 3 0'clock position. This table shows the control points for some common curve types. The preselection color is determined by the setting in the Selection Preferences dialog window. regardless of the setting of the Preselection option in the Selection Preferences dialog box. Curve Line Arc Complete Circle Control Points Endpoints. midpoint Endpoints. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-5 . an object on which the Selection Ball is placed will always be preĆhighlighted. midpoint Center of circle.Curve Creation PreĆSelection Highlighting When the Basic Curves dialog box is active.

It will also display the type of line or arc being created. the position of the cursor or Selection Ball as geometry is selected is very important. the system infers the following: D Cursor Location (when a control point.Curve Creation Inferred Point Selection In line and arc creation. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . or object is not in the Selection Ball) Control points (when inside the Selection Ball) An entire curve (when an object is selected where a control point is not encircled) D D Status Line Feedback While Basic Curves are being created. as well as other useful information. It will tell what kind of point or object is highlighted. valuable feedback will be given in the Status line. When the Infer point method is being used. arc center.

or spline. but not one of its control points or A complete circle or ellipse. or spline An endpoint or midpoint of a line. conic. or partial ellipse A line. conic. arc. arc. (selection ball over the control point) A knot point of a spline (splines are covered in the Freeform Modeling Course) The circle or ellipse The center of the circle or ellipse The control point (end point) The knotĂpoint ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-7 .Curve Creation Inferred Selection Chart Contents of Selection Ball Nothing Selected Geometry A screen position Examples An existing point The existing point The control point The line. (selection ball not over a control point) An arc center of a circle or ellipse A complete circle or ellipse. arc.

The options on this menu (other than Inferred Point and Select Face) work similarly to those in the Point Constructor dialog box. Point Method. shown below. is simply projected onto the XC-YC plane. Control points are no longer highlighted. Point Method The Point Method option menu. and String Mode. sometimes called Screen Position. several things change: D D D The cursor location is no longer tracked in the Dialog Bar. Inferred Point Cursor Location Existing Point End Point Control Point Intersection Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Quadrant Point ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select Face Point Constructor (See page Appendix B for more information) When using a point method other than Infer. PreĆselection highlighting reverts to the Selection Preferences dialog box status. We will discuss Point Method and String Mode in this appendix. NOTE: A Cursor Location. D-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The ZC value of the point will be 0. The options include Delta. allows points to be specified relative to existing geometry by specifying a cursor location or by using the Point Subfunction.Curve Creation General Curve Creation Options This section discusses some of the options in the center of the Basic Curves dialog box which apply to many different curve creation situations.

When in any other curve creation mode (arc. To stop string mode. the Point Constructor dialog box is displayed.Curve Creation The Select Face option allows the selection of a face for use as the limiting object for a line. spline. turn the button OFF. choose Break String or press the middle mouse button. This option can also be used to create a line normal to a face. Existing Point Cursor Location End Point Control Point Intersection Point Inferred Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Angle on Arc/Ellipse Quadrant Point None Rectangular Restores Base Point values to zero and Offset to none Cylindrical Spherical Vector Along Curve String Mode When this option is ON. NOTE: When String Mode is turned on. If the Point Constructor method is chosen. When Back is chosen from that dialog box. circle. etc. To stop string mode and start it again with the next object created. the Basic Curve dialog box returns.) this option is not available. the entering of new values in the parameter text fields as soon as a line or arc is finished being created will not update the previously created curve. the end of one object becomes the beginning of the next. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-9 .

YC ZC XC Second point First point NOTE: If a screen position is specified as the second point. the line will snap to vertical or horizontal. and ZC fields in the Dialog Bar and pressing <Enter>. (The Snap Angle is controlled in the Sketch Preferences dialog box. The points may be a combination of screen positions and control points selected in the graphics area. YC. or values established by entering numbers in the XC. and this selection defines a line that is within the Snap Angle of being vertical or horizontal from the first point.Curve Creation Line Creation Methods Between Two Points Simply define the two points (see below). YC ZC XC ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Snap angle is set to 3_ First point 3° : 3° Second point : : 3° Second point 3° First point : D-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .) Snap Angle is only applicable when using the Inferred point method. the line will snap to the nearest increment of that angle. Through a Point and Horizontal or Vertical When the second point of a line is defined using a screen position. and the Angle Increment value is not zero.

A line at this angle or at this angle plus 180 degrees (depending on where the cursor is relative to the start point) will rubberĆband in the graphics area. D NOTE: Angles are measured counterĆclockwise from the XC axis. Establish the length by specifying a screen position. YC ZC XC Cursor location Angle from XC Axis Start location Angle from XC Axis plus 180 degrees ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Start location Cursor location EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-11 .Curve Creation Through a Point and at an Angle to the XC Axis D D Define the start point. See the illustration below. Enter the desired angle in the Angle text field in the Dialog Bar and press the <Tab> key. or entering a length value in the Dialog Bar. selecting geometry. The value in the Angle text field will also update to reflect the start/cursor locations.

the parallel. or at an Angle to an Existing Line D D Define the start point of the new line. selecting geometry. perpendicular. Depending on where the cursor is. establish the length by: specifying a screen position. Move the cursor around.Curve Creation Through a Point and Parallel. being careful not to select one of its control points. When the line is displayed. Parallel line Line at an angle Defined point Perpendicular line Selected line ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D If it is desired to create a line at an angle to the selected line. Select the existing line. or angled line (see below) may be previewed. Perpendicular. enter the desired value in the Angle text field in the Dialog Bar and press tab. D D-12 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . The Status line shows which mode is being previewed. NOTE: The first two steps may be completed in either order. entering a new value in the Dialog Bar. or immediately after the line is created.

each new line is created at the specified distance from the last line created.This option affects line creation when a series of parallel lines are being created. The direction of the offset is dependent on how the original line was selected. Enter the Offset Distance in the Dialog Bar. The new line is offset from the line selected and equal in length. Choose Apply. The Offset Distance value may be changed at any time. Select a line.Curve Creation Parallel to An Existing Line at a Distance Parallel at Distance From . The offset line is created on the side where the center of the selection ball is when the original line is selected. D D D D Make sure String Mode is Toggled to Off. Offset distance Selected line New line If Apply is continually chosen. each new line is created at the specified distance from the line that was originally selected. When it is set to New. When this option is set to Original. additional parallel lines will be created. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-13 .

Select the existing curve. then the point may be defined.) The same is true for the solid line and cursor. the point must be defined first.Curve Creation Through a Point and Tangent or Perpendicular to a Curve D D Define the start point of the new line. (Notice that the dashed line shows the line that would be created with the dashed cursor in that position. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Defined point (the endpoint of the arc) Tangent line Tangent line Perpendicular line Defined point Perpendicular line D-14 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . If a perpendicular line is being created. then outside the curve until the line snaps to the other side. There are times that the rubberĆbanding line is on the wrong side of the curve. The line rubberĆbands tangentially to the selected curve. D When the desired line is displayed. or by selecting the object in that position. NOTE: The curve may be selected first. select the highlighted geometry. Move the cursor inside. The example below shows two examples of creating a line through a point and tangent or perpendicular to an arc or circle. if a tangent line is being created. being careful not to select one of its control points.

D The illustration below shows the creation of 2 lines. D Select the second curve. When the desired line is displayed.Curve Creation Tangent to a Curve and Tangent or Perpendicular to Another Curve D Select the first curve. Tangent line Second curve Perpendicular line First curve ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-15 . depending on the cursor position. one is tangent to a circle and the other is perpendicular to a circle. The line rubberĆbands tangentially or perpendicularly to the selected curve. select the highlighted geometry. being careful not to select one of its control points. again being careful not to select one of its control points.

press the middle mouse button to choose Lock Mode. again being careful not to select one of its control points. Select the line. A specific length may also be established immediately after the line is created by entering the value in the Dialog Bar. establish the length by specifying a screen position or selecting geometry. D When the desired line is displayed. perpendicular.Curve Creation Tangent to a Curve and Parallel. the selected line. or at an angle to. The rubberĆbanding line will be shown parallel. Second object First object ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select the curve and line as shown The parallel. then select the limiting geometry. NOTE: If selecting geometry to specify the length of the line would result in the line type being changed. perpendicular. and angled lines will appear individually as the cursor is moved around D-16 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Perpendicular. being careful not to select one of its control points. or at an Angle to an Existing Line D D Select the curve.

then point] Line through a point and parallel. perpendicular. and define second point. or at an angle to the WCS Y 1 X S Define the first point S Define second point within the Snap Angle setting or S Enter the desired angle. S Define a point S Select a line S Select limiting point/object [Can also select line. vertical.Curve Creation Line Creation Chart Line between two points Select two points Line through a point and horizontal. press <Tab>. or at an angle to a line 1 2 1 2 Line through a point and tangent or normal to a curve 2 1 S Select a point S Select a curve S Select limiting point/object (if necessary) Line tangent or perpendicular to two curves Select two curves ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Line tangent to a curve and parallel or perpendicular to a line A bisector line 2 1 S Select two curves S Select limiting point/object Select two lines EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-17 .

Curve Creation Activity 1 . Therefore. Step 1 Open part file pau_curves_1 and start the Modeling application. Step 3 Choose Insert"Curve"Basic Curves. when cursor locations are specified within 3° of vertical or horizontal. Step 2 Save the part file as ***_curves_1. Step 4 Create Lines Between Two Cursor Locations. choosing the icon again will reset the line creation process. - Choose the Line icon if not already selected. Note the location and orientation of the WCS. There is no need to cancel out of the Basic Curve dialog box. Create the lines as described in the steps only. Additional curves will be created in subsequent activities to further increase understanding. - Toggle String Mode to Off. Create a horizontal and vertical line by clicking at two different screen positions each time as shown: ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ First selections here - Second selections here TIP If a start position was erroneously selected. The snap angle is set to the default of 3°. D-18 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . the line will snap to a truly vertical or horizontal orientation.Creating Lines In this activity lines will be created using the methods previously discussed.

Select here Select here Notice that the line remains highlighted. - Double click in the Length text box on the Dialog Bar in overstrike mode and enter 4. Turn Fit All before Displaying to On and choose OK. The line is edited to that angle. enter 45. and press Enter. Choose Refresh (third mouse button). The line is edited to that length. then press Enter.Curve Creation - Create a diagonal line as illustrated below. Step 5 Create Lines From Endpoints or Midpoints of One Line to Another. - Change the work layer to 2 and make layer 1 invisible. - Tab to the Angle text box on the Dialog Bar. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ - EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-19 .

Select this line here ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select this line here Before After Step 6 Create a Line Through a Point and Parallel to Another Line. A line will be created point to point regardless of the snap angle.the line could have been selected before the endpoint. - Select the bottom diagonal line with the cross hairs on the endpoint as shown below.Curve Creation - Select the two lines at their midpoints as shown. (The order does not matter . A line will be created point to point regardless of snap angle. The endpoint highlights before selection. Select the base line at the top as shown. avoiding control points. Select this line here Select this line here Before - After Select the same two lines at their endpoints on the right.) - D-20 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

A trim point or object now needs to be selected. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-21 . - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Change the work layer to 3 and make layer 2 invisible. Step 7 Create a Line Parallel to an Existing Line at a Distance. This line and the line being created define the intersection point to which the line being created is trimmed. relative to the cursor position. - Choose the line created on the right. avoiding its control points. Select this line as a base line Select this endpoint - Move the cursor to the right so the rubberĆband image is parallel to the base line and select the middle mouse button to lock in the construction mode of parallel.Curve Creation A line appears rubberĆbanding from the first point at 90° angles from the base line. Choosing this line causes the new line to be trimmed to a point that the two lines have in common (intersection point).

Step 8 Create a Line Through a Point at a Specified Angle. Notice that the line was created on the side of the base line that the selection ball was on at the time of line selection. The last line created is removed. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Insert→Curve→Basic Curves. This line will be started at the WCS origin and its angle defined relative to the WCS.Curve Creation - Select the line as illustrated below (avoid the line's control points). In the ZC text box. key in 0 (zero) and press Enter. key in 0 (zero) and press the Tab key. A line the same length as the existing line is created. D-22 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - In the Dialog Bar. - Select third mouse button→Cancel. Enter 0 (zero) and press the Tab key. In the YC text box. Choose third mouse button→Undo. key in an Offset Distance of 2 and press Enter. Put focus in the XC text box located in the Dialog Bar.

200° Theoretical trim line Step 9 Create a Line Through a Point and Tangent to an Existing Arc/Circle. A theoretical trim line was projected off of the current cursor position and perpendicular to the line created. not on a control point. - Position the cursor in the lower left to display the 200° line. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-23 . select a screen position. Select on the right side of the arc. type 200. and press the Tab key to lock in that value. Ensure that Unbounded is Off. Moving the cursor around displays the intended rubberĆbanded line (or a line at 20° if the cursor is in the upper right area). defining the endpoint of the line.Curve Creation - Double click in the Angle text box of the Dialog Bar. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Change the work layer to 5 and make layer 3 invisible. Select the left endpoint of the horizontal line. Instead of selecting a trim line as in Step 6.

Press Tab to lock in the angle value. the Status line will indicate Tangent. This defines the base line. both objects must be coplanar. In the Dialog Bar. Step 10 Create a Line at an Angle from a Line and Tangent to a Curve. Select the circle on the upper left side. - - - D-24 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Move the selection ball around until the status line reads Angle.Curve Creation As you do this. Select the horizontal line away from its control points. The angle is measured counterclockwise from the base line. double click in the Angle text box and key in 20. - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select the last line created avoiding its control points. To create a line at a specific angle from a base line and tangent to an existing curve. then use the middle mouse button to select Lock Mode.

Curve Creation A line is created tangent to the arc. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-25 . at an angle of 20° from the base curve and trimmed to the horizontal line. 20° Step 11 Save the part.

and start and end points.Curve Creation Creating Arcs and Circles Arcs and circles are created with different icons and minor differences in functionality. size. and an arc is a portion of a circle. As a matter of definition. Both provide immediate display feedback and rely on the simple definition of arc center. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D-26 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . circle means a complete circle.

then the start and endpoints of the arc are defined. If an arc is chosen such that one of its four control points lies within the Selection Ball. If an arc is chosen with none of its control points within the Selection Ball. there are several things to keep in mind: D Arcs have four control points: two endpoints. D Center. a midpoint.Curve Creation Creating Arcs When creating arcs. or which passes through two points and is tangent to a selected object. which can be adjusted by entering angle values in the Dialog Bar. an arc may be created that passes through three points. Start. D D Creation Method There are two methods for creating arcs: D Start. End With this method. Point on Arc With this method. the center point. and the arc center. Dialog Bar Fields Radius Diameter Start Angle End Angle ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-27 . inferring tangency or a trim location. its control point will be selected. End. the arc itself will be selected.

Define a second point. That information can be defined by numerical entry or selections from the screen. Center Point. Point on Circle D D Define a point. The circumference of the circle passes through this point. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Second point First point : D-28 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . This becomes the center of the circle. A value may be entered in the Dialog Bar to establish an exact radius or diameter.Curve Creation Creating Circles Circle creation simply requires the definition of a center location and a size.

Point on Arc Creation Method (if necessary). Step 1 Create an Arc through three points. Three points will be used to create an arc. different methods will be used to create arcs and circles. end at the second.Curve Creation Activity 2 . The arc will start at the first point. Choose the Start. Continue working with the ***_curves_1 file. Choose the Arc icon. Create an arc by selecting the screen positions in order as shown: First selection (for start point) - Third selection (for arc size) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Second selection (for end point) EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-29 . Choose Insert→Curve→Basic Curves. Turn String Mode Off. End. - Change the work layer to 7 and make layer 5 invisible. and pass through the third.Creating Arcs and Circles In this activity.

to see the entire arc. if necessary. An arc is created that is tangent to the first arc created. in the YC text box enter 0.Curve Creation - Zoom out. Double click in the XC text box on the Dialog Bar and enter 0. as shown below. press Enter Select the upper right endpoint of the 45° line again. - Choose the Center. Third selection (for arc size) First selection (for start point) Second selection (for end point) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Step 3 Create an Arc by defining the size and end angles. Step 2 Create an Arc through two points and tangent to another arc. Select the arc just created. press Tab. End method. Start. An arc displays in preview and the Cue Line prompts for an end point or object. - D-30 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Do not select on a control point. - Select the ends of the 45° line.

Curve Creation - Select the right endpoint of the horizontal line as shown: First selection (for start point) Second selection (for end point) - Choose Fit. The arc is created starting at the diagonal line endpoint and ending at a point that is in line with the arc center and the end of the horizontal line endpoint. Step 4 Save the part. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-31 .

tangent object 1 2 S Define point S Select tangent object D-32 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Curve Creation Arc/Circle Creation Chart Start point. end point. tangent object. tangent object 1 2 3 S Define first point S Define second point S Select tangent object S Define start point S Select tangent object S Define end point Start point. point on circle 2 1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ S Define first point S Define second point Circle center. end point 1 2 3 Arc center. end point 3 1 2 S Define first point S Define second point S Define third point Circle center. end point. point on arc 2 1 3 S Define first point S Define second point S Define third point Start point. start point.

you will find a summary of Fillet creation methods. When the Fillet icon is chosen on the Basic Curves dialog box. and 3 Curve. This section contains a brief explanation of Fillet creation functionality. There are three Fillet creation methods: Simple. meaning the tangent relationships will be maintained as the fillet radius or arc center is changed.Curve Creation Fillets Fillets are arcs that have tangent relationships with one or more curves. 2 Curve. They are editable as fillets. At the end of this section. the Curve Fillet dialog box is displayed. as shown below: ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-33 . the latter two methods allow manual trimming options.

Using the cursor location method in Point Constructor selects a position in the XĆY plane of the WCS. D D D When creating 2 and 3ĆCurve Fillets. Specify the approximate center of the fillet (two and three curve only). Undo may be selected to delete the fillet and restore the selected curves. If no trimming options are selected. trim options for each of the selected curves may be specified. none of the curves are trimmed. Select the objects. D-34 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . When creating 2 and 3ĆCurve Fillets the approximate center must be indicated. this is accomplished by using the cursor or the Point Constructor. Select from the following trim options: Trim First Curve Trim/Delete Second Curve Trim Third Curve The Delete Second Curve and Trim Third Curve options are applicable to the 3ĆCurve Fillet only.Curve Creation Procedure D D Choose the type of fillet desired. Enter the radius of the fillet. Indicate the desired trim methods for the objects (two and three curve only). ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ If a fillet is created other than desired.

The fillet that is created is directly related to where the lines were selected. it indicates the center of the arc. The size of the fillet is determined by entering a value for the radius first. Position the crosshairs in the quadrant formed by the lines to define the desired fillet center. If the Selection Ball contains only one line. NOTE: The trim options and Point Constructor are not available. The lines are automatically trimmed to the points of tangency. Crosshairs L1 L1 Selected quadrant L2 L2 BEFORE AFTER As both lines are selected.Curve Creation Simple Fillet Simple Fillet creates a fillet between two coplanar nonĆparallel lines. the crosshairs determine which fillet is created. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Before After EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-35 . The Selection Ball must be positioned in such a manner as to include both lines. Each line extends or trims to theĂarc. an error message displays.

A two curve fillet is generated in the counterclockwise direction from the first curve to the second. The plane is normal to the vectors that are normal to both tangents and is totally independent of the WCS.Curve Creation 2 Curve Fillet The 2 Curve Fillet constructs a fillet between two curves. including points.) Curve 1 Fillet plane ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Fillet Vectors normal to both tangents Curve 2 D-36 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . circles. the fillet plane is the plane containing the tangent of the first curve. (See below. lines. Curve 1 Curve 2 Approximate fillet center Curve 2 Curve 1 If the two selected curves are in different planes. conics or splines.

The system constructs the fillet in such a manner that the center of the arc is equidistant to all three curves. conics. which can be any combination of points. and splines. the system prompts for additional information to create the fillet: D D D Tangent Outside Fillet Within Circle Circle Within Fillet. A three curve fillet is a circular arc generated in a counterclockwise direction from the first curve to the third curve. Curve 3 Curve 1 Curve 2 Before After The system trims curves. arcs. to the tangent point of the fillet. lines. The Radius entry box is not available because it is determined by the geometry selected. The three curves do not have to lie in the same plane. based on the selected options. If any one of the curves selected is an arc.Curve Creation 3 Curve Fillet This option creates a fillet between three curves. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-37 .

Curve Creation Curve 1 Curve 1 Before After Fillet Curve 2 Curve 3 Curve 3 Tangent Outside Curve 1 Curve 1 Fillet ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Curve 2 Before Curve 3 After Curve 3 Fillet Within Circle D-38 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

where the fillet is contiguous with a selected curve.Curve Creation Curve 1 Curve 1 Curve 2 Fillet Curve 3 Before After Curve 3 Circle Within Fillet The Point Constructor selections may be used to create a cliff edge fillet. 1 : 2 3 : 2 1 ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-39 . but not tangent to it.

use the Edit "Curve"Fillet option. S Select first object S Select second object S Select third object 3 curve fillet 3 1 2 To edit a fillet. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ This concludes discussion of the creation functions found on the Basic Curves dialog box. Simple fillet (lines only) S Select both lines simultaneously (both must intersect the selection ball) 2 curve fillet 2 S Select first object S Select second object 3 1 If the objects extend beyond their intersection point.Curve Creation Fillet Creation Methods Chart Note: Numbered steps indicate this is not the only way the arc/circle can be created. you must also specify a quadrant for the center of the fillet. D-40 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

select the fillet lines in each of the four corners as shown below. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-41 .Curve Creation Activity 3 .75. Choose the Simple Fillet icon. Choose Insert"Curve"Basic Curves. Cursor placement is critical. Before After ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ To restore the lines to their original state.Creating Fillets Step 1 Create a Simple Fillet. choose Undo (using the third mouse button). Choose the Fillet icon. but trim just one of the curves. Step 2 Create a 2 Curve Fillet (Trimming Only One Curve). - Remember. Practice placing fillets in 4 different line configurations. - Open part file pau_fillet_1 and select the Modeling application. For this step create a fillet with two curves. - Enter a radius of . Keep both lines inside the Selection Ball when selecting. - In Area #1. only two lines are used to create a Simple Fillet.

D-42 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . select the cyan line. In this case trim the line but not the arc.75 for the radius. - Enter 1. select the yellow line (first object). (See below. Choose the Trim Second Curve button to turn the option off. Define which object will be trimmed. that more fillets may be created without reselecting any icons. - Select second Indicate here Select first ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Before After Step 3 Create a 2 Curve Fillet (and Use a Point for One of the Curves).5 for the radius. then select the arc (second object). Indicate the approximate center of the fillet as shown below. In area 2. Notice that the fillet process is modal. In area #2. Choose Point Constructor.) - Ensure that Trim First Curve is turned on.Curve Creation - Choose the 2 Curve Fillet icon. Ensure that the system retained .

Ensure that Trim First Curve is turned on. Choose the Delete Second Curve button to turn it on. Indicate the approximate center of the fillet as shown above.Curve Creation - Select the endpoint at the left end of the white line. Select first ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Select second Indicate here Select third Before After EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-43 . Trim the first and third curves and delete the second. Ensure that Trim Third Curve is turned on. Step 4 Create a 3 Curve Fillet. - Choose the 3 Curve Fillet icon. Indicate here Select point Select first Before - After Choose Back to return to the Create Fillet dialog box. Select the 3 curves in a counterclockwise order as shown.

Step 5 Close all part files and do not save.Curve Creation - Indicate the approximate center of the fillet as shown above. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D-44 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

To display the dialog box.Curve Creation Editing Curves The options on the Edit Curve option allows the modifications of existing curves. choose Insert→Curve→Basic Curves to display the Basic Curves dialog box. Edit Curve Parameters Trim ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-45 . then choose the Edit Curve Parameters icon.

ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ To change a line's parameters: D D Select the line. D D-46 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . avoiding its control points. the edit mode for that type of curve appears.Curve Creation Edit Curve Parameters When this icon is active and a curve is selected. Enter new values for the length and/or angle in the Dialog Bar. The line now rubberĆbands from the fixed end. then press <Enter>. D A line may also be Stretched to move its endpoint. To change a line's endpoint: D Select the line end to be modified. The direction that the line is extended is dependent on which side of the center control point selected. Specify a new position using any of the Point Method options on the dialog box. The following types of curve edits are discussed in this section: D D Editing a Line Editing an Arc or Circle Editing a Line A line may be edited by changing its endpoints or its parameters (length and angle).

Enter new values in the radius. ZC location in the Dialog Bar. as follows: D D Select the center of the arc or circle.Curve Creation Editing an Arc or Circle The two methods used to edit an arc or circle are Parameters and Dragging. YC. avoiding its control points. and/or end angle fields in the Dialog Bar and press <Enter>. Moving an Arc or Circle to a New Location An arc or circle may be moved to a new location. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-47 . diameter. regardless of the editing mode that is active. start angle. The arc's or circle's parameters may be changed by entering new values in the Dialog Bar. or enter a new XC. Drag the arc or circle to a new location. or changing them by dragging to a new location. Using Parameters Mode To change an arc or circle using Parameters mode: D D Select the arc or circle.

When it is the size desired. For example. select it at the desired endpoint and drag it. press the first mouse button. a line may be selected to make the arc tangent to it. press the first mouse button. A line may be selected to stop the arc at its intersection with the line. or an endpoint of another object may be selected. avoiding its control points.Curve Creation Using Dragging Mode There are two ways to change an arc or circle using Dragging mode: D To change the radius of the arc or circle. Other geometry may also be selected to control the size of the arc. or the endpoint of another arc may be selected to make the selected arc pass through it. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D-48 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . D To change the start or end angle of the arc or circle. Other geometry may also be selected to control the start and/or end angles of the arc. select it. and drag it. and that endpoint will be projected onto the arc to determine its start angle. When the angle is correct.

A bounding object can be a curve. The segment of the object that is selected is always removed or extended (see below). The portion of the curve being trimmed determines which end is trimmed. select near the desired intersection. it is trimmed to its intersection with one or two bounding objects. Caution must be taken when selecting the curve to trim. Define the type of trim to perform. Procedure D D D Select the bounding objects. Bounding Arc Bounding Arc Intersection Point If the line is selected here BEFORE TRIM Intersection Point The left part of the line is trimmed AFTER TRIM One bounding object must be specified. If there are multiple intersection points. face. or view point. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-49 . and not more than two.Curve Creation Trim When a curve is trimmed. the system will prompt for the selection of the desired intersection point to be used as the bounding point. plane. multiple curves may be specified and they will all be trimmed to the bounding objects. Select the curve to trim. Once the bounding objects have been specified. when trimming a curve. point.

Curve Creation Activity 4 . - Select the arc as the first bounding object. LINE1 Select the arc as the bounding object LINE2 LINE3 - ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ Click MB2. so the selection may be skipped by clicking MB2. Choose the Trim icon. In this case. Choose Insert"Curve"Basic Curves. Step 2 Trim the Three lines to an Arc. Select the Modeling application.Trimming Curves Step 1 Trim Curves to One Bounding Object. LINE1 LINE2 - Select the first line to be trimmed LINE3 D-50 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . - Open the part file pau_editcurve_1. it is not necessary to have a second bounding object. Select LINE1 as shown below as the curve to trim.

Step 3 Close the part. - Select the lower end of the third line. LINE1 LINE2 LINE3 The system will trim LINE3 by the combination of the side of the midpoint of LINE3 and the side of the bounding curve. LINE1 LINE2 LINE3 The second line is trimmed to the defined bounding line. ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual D-51 .Curve Creation The bounding curves don't change. - Select the lower end of the second line. so continue trimming.

Curve Creation (This Page Intentionally Left Blank) ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D ÏÏÏ ÏÏÏ D-52 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Existing Point Cursor Location Inferred Point Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Angle on Arc/Ellipse Quadrant Point None Rectangular Cylindrical Restores Base Point values to zero and Offset to none Spherical Vector Along Curve Point on Surface Point on Curve/Edge End Point Control Point Intersection Point ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ E ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ E-1 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual .WCS Options WCS Options Appendix E This appendix describes additional WCS manipulation options. Unigraphics offers a standard dialog box that provides multiple point methods to define location. Defining Points for Location To determine the location of the WCS. etc. endpoints. the definition of specific points in space is necessary. you can define origin points. and is a common function in any CAE system. WCS Origin: Allows the location of the WCS to be altered using the Point Constructor. start points. while the rotation of the axes remains unchanged. Using the Point Constructor dialog box. Primitives or any other geometry. based on existing geometry or coordinate values.

while the location of the axes remains unchanged. XC to YC". The top line of the following menu could be read Rotate about ZC. from the XC axis toward the YC axis 90_ After ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ E ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ E-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . see Appendix B. The figure below illustrates an example of Rotate about ZC: XC to YC Before About the ZC axis. Endpoint selected as new WCS origin Before After Rotate WCS: Allows the rotation of the WCS to be altered.WCS Options NOTE: For more information on Point types.

Object Display Format. Open File. Save Edit. Rotate (full menu) File. Object Edit. Modeling Hot Key CtrlĆN CtrlĆO CtrlĆP CtrlĆQ CtrlĆR CtrlĆS CtrlĆT CtrlĆU CtrlĆV CtrlĆW CtrlĆX CtrlĆY CtrlĆZ Function File. Operation. Undo EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual F-1 . Blank Copy Delete Tools.Hot Keys Hot Keys Appendix F ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ F ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ This appendix describes the various short cuts via Hot Keys Hot Key CtrlĆA CtrlĆB CtrlĆC CtrlĆD CtrlĆE CtrlĆF CtrlĆG CtrlĆH CtrlĆI CtrlĆJ CtrlĆK CtrlĆL CtrlĆM Function Assembly Navigator Edit. Gateway Cut Edit. Plot View. Layer Settings Application. Expression Fit View Grip Execute Information. New File. Transform Execute User Function Paste Application.

Save As CtrlĆShiftĆN Edit. Step Preferences. Layout. Record Toolsm Macro. Zoom (full menu) AltĆTab AltĆF4 F1 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Toggles Application Closes Active Window Help on Context View Current Dialog Information Window Refresh Quick Zoom Quick Rotate CtrlĆAltĆB CtrlĆAltĆC CtrlĆAltĆM CtrlĆAltĆN CtrlĆAltĆW CtrlĆAltĆX Tools. Layout.Hot Keys ÉÉÉ CtrlĆShiftĆA CtrlĆShiftĆB ÉÉÉ F ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ CtrlĆShiftĆC CtrlĆShiftĆD CtrlĆShiftĆE CtrlĆShiftĆF CtrlĆShiftĆG CtrlĆShiftĆH CtrlĆShiftĆI CtrlĆShiftĆJ CtrlĆShiftĆK File. CLSF Application ManufacturĆ ing Tools. New Format. Selection Edit. Unisim Application Assemblies Tools. Layout. Blank. Reverse Blank CtrlĆShiftĆO All View. Curvature Graph CtrlĆShiftĆP CtrlĆShiftĆQ CtrlĆShiftĆR Format. Object Edit. Visible In View Preferences. Unblank All Of Part Format. Blank. Operation. Lathe Cross-SecĆ tion F-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Macro. Playback Quick Shaded Image Tools. Macro. Blank. Fit All CtrlĆShiftĆS Views Debug Grip CtrlĆShiftĆT High Quality Image CtrlĆShiftĆU CtrlĆShiftĆV CtrlĆShiftĆW CtrlĆShiftĆX CtrlĆShiftĆY CtrlĆShiftĆZ Format. Unblank SeĆ lected CtrlĆShiftĆL CtrlĆShiftĆM Model Navigator View. Boundary Tools. Open Tools.

One of up to 49 views per layout in which you can directly work. In Unigraphics. active view .Glossary Glossary ABS . and other special symbols used in text representation and communications protocol." ASCII . an assembly is a part file which contains components.A collection of piece parts and subĆassemblies representing a product. ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual GL-1 . an angle measured on the XĆY plane of a coordinate system is positive if the direction that it is swept is counterclockwise as viewed from the positive Z axis side of the XĆY plane. Absolute Coordinate System . aspect ratio . assembly . punctuation. components and/or objects.American Standard Code for Information Interchange. It is a set of 8Ćbit binary numbers representing the alphabet.A Unigraphics part file which is a userĆdefined. arc . attributes . An angle swept in the opposite direction is said to be negative.An incomplete circle. associativity . numerals. and manufacture of parts in Unigraphics. angle . drafting.The ratio of length to height which represents the change in size of a symbol from its original.The ability to tie together (link) separate pieces of information to aid in automating the design. structured combination of subĆassemblies. sometimes used interchangeably with the term circle.Coordinate system in which all geometry is located from a fixed or absolute zero point. assembly part .In Unigraphics.Absolute coordinate system.Pieces of information that can be associated with Unigraphics geometry and parts such as assigning a name to an object.

component part . in an assembly part.Defines the base origin using the Point Subfunction. chaining .The part file or master" pointed to by a component within an assembly. or group of layers. cone direction . A separate Unigraphics part file that the system associates with a component object in the assembly part. cone origin ." component . similar to a group. layer . boundary .A method of selecting a sequence of curves which are joined endĆtoĆend.Class of objects containing sheets and solids (see solid body and sheet body).The half vertex angle defines the angle formed by the axis of the cone and its side. if descriptive of the type of data found on the layers to which it is assigned. All assemblies using the component are automatically updated when opened to reflect the geometric edits made at the piece part level.A set of geometric objects that describes the containment of a part from a vantage point. body .A Unigraphics character font which is the default font used for creating text in drafting objects and dimensions. lower level components. bottomĆup modeling .A collection of objects. A component may be a subĆassembly consisting of other.A complete and closed arc. A category. CAD/CAM . by the assembly.Computer Aided Design/Computer Aided Manufacturing. sometimes used interchangeably with the term arc.A name assigned to a layer. will assist the user in identifying and managing data in a part file. category. ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ GL-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Glossary block font . The actual geometry is stored in the component part and referenced. half angle . not copied.Defines the cone direction using the Vector Subfunction.Modeling technique where component parts are designed and edited in isolation of their usage within some higher level assembly. circle .

and DATA POINTS. defining points. a conic.Spline construction points.Glossary constraints . design in context . arc.ArrowĆlike indicators that show areas that require more information to fully constrain a sketch. A control point is a position on existing geometry. this may refer to a line. spline or bĆcurve.Points used to create a spline. Endpoints and midpoints of open arcs 4. If the thumb is aligned with the ZC axis and pointing in the positive direction. Any of the following points: 1.The rightĆhand rule determines the counterĆ clockwise direction.A system of axes used in specifying positions (CSYS).A method of creating a bĆcurve in which curves (lines. conic.A curve in Unigraphics is any line. Geometry from other components can be selected to aid in the modeling. counterclockwise . or data points. Coordinate System . A geometric object. current layout . See POLES. counterclockwise is defined as the direction the fingers would move from the positive XC axis to the positive YC axis. Existing Points 2. Endpoints of conics 3. curve . or a spline. arcs. Endpoints of splines.Represents a specific location on an existing object. A spline has a control point at each knot point. conics or splines) may be selected for conversion into a bĆcurve. while the control points for an open arc are its end and midpoints. Midpoints and endpoints of lines 6. The control point for a closed circle is its center. defaults .Refer to the methods you can use to refine and limit your sketch. convert curve . Layout data is kept in an intermediate storage area until it is saved. Splines created using defining points are forced to pass through the points. A line has three control points: both end points and the midpoint of the line. The methods of constraining a sketch are geometric and dimensional. DEFINING POINTS. Construction points may be used as poles (control vertices).Assumed values when they are not specifically defined.The layout currently displayed on the screen. These points are guaranteed to be on the spline. control point . degreeĆofĆfreedom arrows . construction points . an arc.The ability to directly edit component geometry as it is displayed in the assembly. defining points . Center points of circles 5. Also referred to as edit in place. ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual GL-3 .

the radius of an arc. file . directory . In Unigraphics. emphasize work part . feature .This is a scalar value or expression which limits the measure of some geometric object such as the length of a line.An endpoint of a curve or an existing point. and patterns are a few types of files.A color coding option which helps distinguish geometry in the work part from geometry in other parts within the same assembly. font.A rectangle or box" composed of dashed line objects.Various styles of lines and curves.An allĆencompassing term which refers to all solids. or the distance between two points.See object filtering.A set of characters designed at a certain size. displayed part . expression . filtering .An arithmetic or conditional statement that has a value. Expressions are used to control dimensions and the relationships between dimensions of a model. width and spacing of characters belonging to a particular font. line . endpoint .The part currently displayed in the graphics window.See design in context. face .A group or unit of logically related data which is labeled or named" and associated with a specified space.A hierarchical file organization structure which contains a list of filenames together with information for locating those files. such as solid. character . font. and primitives. dashed. GL-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . etc.Glossary dimensional constraint . bodies. ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ edit in place . font box . parts. The font box defines the size. width and spacing.A region on the outside of a body enclosed by edges.

geometric constraint . the user may create all geometry on one layer. in which views are displayed. The line segments must be nonĆparallel and coplanar.A body of zero thickness.A layer is a partition of a part. representing the endpoints of each spline segment. The standard layouts in Unigraphics include one.Isometric view orientation .A rectangular array of implied points used to accurately align locations which are entered by using the screen position" option. all text and dimensions on a second.A contiguous set of curves. isometric view (TfrĆISO) .Glossary free form feature . virtual intersection .Intersection formed by extending two line segments that do not touch to the position that they cross.An individual menu in a sequence of menus used in performing a Unigraphics function.one where equal distances along the coordinate axes are also equal to the view plane. either open or closed. and tool paths on a third.A set of contiguous curves that define a path for a sweep operation.A collection of viewports or window areas. layout . guide curve . (see body and sheet body) generator curve . interactive step . that can be swept or revolved to create a body. ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual GL-5 . For example. Points along a BĆspline.A relationship between one or more geometric objects that forces a limitation. One of the axes is vertical. knot points . inflection . grid . For example. or vice versa. two lines that are perpendicular or parallel specifies a geometric constraint. layer . Layers are analogous to the transparent material used by conventional designers. four or six viewports.The defining points of a spline.A point on a spline where the curve changes from concave to convex. two.

origin . GL-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .prt extension. L2 . Parts are loaded explicitly using the File→Open option and implicitly when they are used in an assembly being opened. This is also referred to as the absolute coordinate system. See expression. expression . Z = 0 for any particular coordinate system.A list of options from which the user makes a selection. parametric design .Standard layouts are available to the user.Two Views.Four Views. name. These include: L1 . L6 . It may be a piece part containing model geometry.All geometry within the Unigraphics environment.Six Views. model space .Glossary layouts . modes.A Unigraphics file containing a .Concept used to define and control the relationships between the features of a model.Two Views.The point X = 0. part .A Unigraphics surface type created by projecting (offsetting) points along all the normals of a selected surface at a specified distance to create a true" offset. etc.The window used in listing operations..Any part currently opened and in memory. or a topĆlevel assembly.The name of an expression is the single variable on the left hand side of the expression. All expression names must be unique in a part file. offset face .The coordinate system of a newly created part. L3 . ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ loaded part .) from among which the user can choose. Concept where the features of the model are defined by parameters.A number of various alternatives (functions. options . Each expression can have only one name. such as Info. a subĆassembly. L4 ." Any other coordinate system may be thought of as a rotation and/or translation of the absolute coordinate system.Single View. Y = 0. objects . menu . Information window . parameters.

rightĆhand rule.Glossary part or model .The rightĆhand rule is used to determine the orientation of a coordinate system. This removes temporary display items and fills in holes left by Blank or Delete. conventional .A marker on the screen which the user moves around using some position indicator device. with the back of the hand lying on a table. point set . etc. sheet .The rightĆhand rule for rotation is used to associate vectors with directions of rotation.A list of options (methods) by which positions can be specified in Unigraphics. A body of zeroĆthickness. screen cursor (cursor) . readĆonly part . selecting objects. zoom. when the curled fingers are held so as to indicate a given direction of rotation. the extended thumb determines the associated vector. the curled fingers determine the associated direction of rotation. the outward extension of the index finger corresponds to the positive Y axis.A part for which the user does not have write access privilege. and rotation of a part.) ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual GL-7 . has not been fully loaded. for performance reasons. Conversely. though placing great demand on the CPU.Produces smooth pan. When the thumb is extended and aligned with a given vector. real time dynamics . Also called sheet body. Only those portions of the component part necessary to render the higher level assembly are initially loaded (the reference set). Point Subfunction Menu .A component part which.A object consisting of one or more faces not enclosing a volume. Refresh . Takes the form of a fullĆscreen cross. the upward extension of the middle finger corresponds to the positive Z axis. partially loaded part .A distribution of points on a curve between two bounding points on that curve. Used for indicating positions.A collection of Unigraphics objects which together may represent some object or structure.A function which causes the system to refresh the display list on the viewing screen. rightĆhand rule for rotation . If the origin of the coordinate system is in the palm of the right fist. and the outward extension of the thumb corresponds to the positive X axis.

Sketch Coordinate System (SCS) . GL-8 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . trimetric view (TfrĆTri) . The measure along the XĆaxis is 7/8 of the measure along Z. string . The sketch can then be extruded or revolved to obtain a 3D object or feature.The SCS is a coordinate system which corresponds to the plane of the sketch. In Unigraphics II. topĆdown modeling . The underlying geometry used to define the shape of a face on a sheet.Modeling technique where component parts can be created and edited while working at the assembly level. A type of body (see Body). the trimetric view has the ZĆaxis vertical. temporary part . surface . Geometric changes made at the assembly level are automatically reflected in the individual component part when saved.The underlying geometry used to define a face on a sheet body.Glossary sketch .The last saved version of a view. subĆassembly .The Unigraphics System. spline . stored layout . A surface is always a sheet but a sheet is not necessarily a surface (see sheet body).An empty part which is optionally created for any component parts which cannot be found in the process of opening an assembly. stored view .An enclosed volume.A viewing orientation which provides you with an excellent view of the principal axes.The last saved version of a layout. system . and the measure along the YĆaxis is 3/4 of the measure along Z. trim .A contiguous series of lines and/or arcs connected at their end points.A part which both contains components and is itself used as a component in higherĆlevel assemblies. ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ solid body . You refine your sketch with dimensional and geometric constraints until you achieve a precise representation of your design.A collection of geometric objects that closely approximates the outline of a particular design. When a sketch is created the WCS is changed to the SCS of the new sketch.To shorten or extend a curve.A smooth freeĆform curve.

See WCS. work plane .The unit of measure in which you may work when constructing in Unigraphics.Glossary Unigraphics . Upon log on. Right. View parameters include view orientation matrix. drafting. WCS. YC. and TfrĆTri (topĆfrontĆright trimetric). Left. Eight standard views are available to the user: Top. font and width. etc. Bottom. TfrĆISO (topĆfrontĆright isometric). verification. view dependent modifications .Y and Z clipping bounds. ZC.A term which identifies the state of a part with respect to a series of modifications that have been made to the part since its creation.The WCS (Work Coordinate System) is the coordinate system singled out by the user for use in construction. work layer .A component which was originally created preĆV10 but has been opened in V10 and upgraded to remove the duplicate geometry. view . Work Coordinate System . view dependent geometry . you may define the unit of measure as inches or millimeters.A mode in which the user can edit a part in the current work view only. It will only be displayed in that view.A particular display of the model. center. Front. units . ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual GL-9 . upgraded component . perspective vector. version . and manufacturing. The coordinates of the WCS are called work coordinates and are denoted by XC. You may create objects on only one layer at a time.A computer based turnkey graphics system for computerĆaided design. produced by UGS. view dependent edit . Back. scale.Modifications to the display of geometry in a particular view. X. These include erase from view and modify color. The XCĆYC plane is called the work plane. drawing reference point and scale.The layer on which geometry is being constructed. WCS .Geometry created within a particular view.Work Coordinate System.

GL-10 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .Glossary work part . When the creation mode is view dependent. ZC axis . the work part is always the same as the displayed part. work view . When displaying a piece part. any construction and view dependent editing that is performed will occur only in the current work view.ZĆaxis of the work coordinate system.The view in which work is being performed.YĆaxis of the work coordinate system. YC axis . The work part can be your displayed part or any component part which is contained in your displayed assembly part. ÉÉÉ GL ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ XC axis .XĆaxis of the work coordinate system.The part in which you create and edit geometry.

13-64. 9-12 Chamfer Edges. 11-27 Exit Unigraphics. GL-2 Chaining. D-27 edit. 16-5 Class selection subfunction filter methods. D-47 ASCII. GL-1 Activities Blend Solid Edges. 14-9 Subtract.Index Index A ABS. 13-76 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ B Blend. 9-6. definition of. add existing part . 5-7 Manipulating the Work Coordinate System. GL-1 Annotation Editor editing text. GL-2 Constraints. 8-12 Cone Direction. 1-41 Form Feature Boss Creation. 13-69. 10-50 tool bar. 8-4 Components. 8-2 Associativity. GL-1 Attribute. Layer. GL-2 Bottom-Up modeling. point on circle. 16-11 Datum Plane . 3-33 Bottom-Up Modeling. 6-13 Circular Array. 1-37 type. during curve creation. GL-1 Active View. 6-10 Circle. 2-3. GL-2 Origin. 10-17 Body. 2-10 Opening an Existing Part File. 14-9 Unite. GL-2 Part. 1-38 Close. GL-1 Automatic Centerline. 2-2 Category. GL-1 Assemblies. GL-2 Component Object. 8-16 Assembly. 14-6 Intersect. GL-1 Absolute Coordinate System. 6-3 Block. 1-37 color. 14-8 Boss. 10-49 Apparent intersection point. GL-2 Chamfer.Dual Constraints. 1-41 Part File. 1-41 Component. GL-2 Boolean Operations. 1-37 features. 8-5 Boundary. GL-2 creation method. 5-5. 3-34 Hollow Solid. definition of. 1-37 up one level. B-6 Arc. D-9 C Cartesian. 2-18 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual IN-1 . 1-37 name. GL-1 bottom-up . GL-2 Break String. 8-5 Work Part. D-28. GL-1 Aspect Ratio. center point. 13-59. 8-6 designing in context. D-47 Circular Array. 8-3 Component Part. 1-39 Angle. 10-52 placing the text. definition of. GL-1 dialog bar fields. 1-16 Save Part As. D-28 edit. GL-3 Geometric. 10-20 Automatic Update.

10-40 extension line display. 4-3 Part. 12-4 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Creating Dimensions. 10-34 arrow line display. 10-33 Dimensions. D-49 Curve parameters. 6-12 Drafting Application. 2-2 moving of WCS. 10-39 precision options. 10-2 Drawing Operations modifying a drawing. 10-41 placement options. 10-14 automatic update. 10-3 removing drawing views . 10-42 Direction. GL-4 Displayed Part. Feature. 1-9 Create Centerline. C-2 Edit . GL-3 Control Point. 6-4 Edit Expressions. GL-3 Cursor. GL-3 E Edge Blends. GL-3 DegreeĆofĆfreedom Arrows. 13-73 removing. 2-4. 1-15. 15-30 Design in Context. Cone. 11-3 Dual Constraints. C-4 Counterclockwise. 10-10 Designing in Context. uses of. 13-73 Construction Points. 10-15 silhouettes. 10-29 local settings. GL-2 Directory. 12-4 Defaults. 15-2. 15-5 transform.Index geometric displaying. 12-2 Datum Plane. 10-10 Drawings adding a view. GL-3 Coordinate Systems. 10-17 uses of the drafting application. C-3 Dialog bar during arc creation. 10-33 appended text controls. 10-17 smooth edges. GL-3 Create Expressions. 4-3 Feature. 10-29 Creating Utility Symbols. C-3 original. 1-26 Edit curve. GL-7 Curve. 15-9 Delete positioning dimension. GL-4 Dimension Local Settings. GL-3 edit. 13-59. curve. D-4 Dimension Constraints. GL-8 Work. D-3 Cylinder. 10-17 hidden line removal. curve. 10-7 setting the view display preferences. D-45 trim. D-27 in curve creation. D-5 Convert. 2-2 reorienting of. line. 8-5 Destination layer. 10-40 leader direction options. 2-4 Sketch. D-46 Edit curve parameters. 2-2 Cartesian. 2-27 D Datum Axis. GL-3 Absolute. GL-4 Double Offset Chamfer. 10-19 Current Layout. 10-2 Dual Constraints. 8-13. 10-16. GL-3 Defining Points. 13-61 creating dimensions. C-3 specify. 2-16. Curves to BĆCurves. 10-35 text justification options. C-3 work. GL-3 Control points. basic. D-46 IN-2 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . 15-3 Delete. 2-24 Copy. D-46 Curves. edit.Undo. GL-3 Delayed Update. transform.

15-2. 1-41 New. GL-4 close. 3-21 Subtract. B-6 Introduction. GL-4 Expression Editor. 15-7 Editing Features. 14-9 Unite.Index Edit dimension value. 14-9 Intersection point apparent. GL-4 Character. 14-9 unsuppress. 16-3 Circular Array. D-6 Inflection. 1-39 Fillet create. 15-30 Edit in Place. GL-4 Endpoint. 14-6 Boss. positioning dimension. 3-14 Hollow Solid. 1-37 color. 3-14 Hollow Feature. D-36 feature. 15-2. 16-3 Pad. 15-5 Emphasize Work Part. GL-5 Geometric Constraint. GL-5 G Generator Curve. GL-4 Form Features. GL-5 Guide Curve. two curve fillet. -3 Implied intersection point. 1-41 Close Part. 2-27 Datum Axis. B-6 implied. 12-2 Hole. 4-3 Names. 1-17 Quit. GL-5 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual IN-3 . 5-3 I Implementation of Design Standards. 15-5 Hole. GL-4 Line. 2-17 Slot. 1-18 Filter methods. 5-3 Instance. B-6 Infer. 16-5 Rectangular Array. GL-4 Edit. D-35 three curve fillet. GL-2 Hidden Line Removal. GL-6 Filter Box. 3-30 Primitives. 15-27 Move Feature. GL-5 Instance. 1-42 Save Part As. GL-4 Feature Creation Block. 1-37 type. D-37 H Half Angle. 2-18 Boolean Operations. 14-8 Features. feature. 15-6 File. 1-9 Open. 5-3 Wall Thickness. 3-38 Pocket. 3-14 Intersect. create simple fillet. 10-15 Hole. 3-2 Free Form Feature. 6-10 Cylinder. -6 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ K Knot Points. -1 terminology. 3-33 Chamfer. GL-4 Edit Parameters. point method. GL-5 Grid. 1-37 Filtering. GL-4 Creating and Editing. class standards. 16-2. 4-4 Expressions. 16-4 Intersect. GL-5 F Face. GL-4 Font Box. types of.

GL-7 Partially Loaded Part. GL-7 Parts fully loaded. B-7 control point. 3-38 Parametric Design. B-12 spherical. Fillets. Chamfer. GL-6. D-5 Primitives. Line. 10-3 Move Feature. B-12 spherical. B-3 end point. B-3 cursor location. GL-6 List information. 15-1 Procedures Body of Revolution. 10-51 O Object. GL-5. 1-17 Origin. B-13 rectangular. GL-6 Modeling Operations. 1-9 Mirror through a line. B-2. B-11 using screen position with a grid. 3-30 Rectangular. D-10 Toolbox-Curve. 6-2 Modifying a Drawing. Part File Saved. popĆup menu options. C-4 N NonĆuniform scale. B-14 Offset Angle. B-4 existing point. Model Navigation Tool. B-14 vector. 14-37 Toolbox-Curve. 10-50 creating text with a leader. GL-6 Message. GL-6 Locking a Constraint. B-8 arc/ellipse center. 13-23 rectangular. 3-38 Point Set. Cone. B-10 along curve. List Information. GL-5 Layout. GL-6 Part. B-9 reset. B-15 cylindrical. 3-30. B-13 Q Quit Unigraphics. B-14 vector. 2-2. GL-7 Model Navigation Tool. 15-43 Model Space. B-5 copying a point to work layer. 6-12 Offset Surface. D-41 Toolbox-Curve. transform. 15-43 Listing Window. Trim Curve. C-4 Multiple copies. Trim to Face. GL-6 Loaded Part. 1-40 Millimeters. GL-7 Point subfunction angle on arc/ellipse. 15-7 transform. GL-6 Offset along curve. transform. D-50 M MB1. GL-7 Point Subfunction.Index L Layer. during basic curve creation. 1-24 MB3. B-6 offset. B-3 intersection point. B-3 Pre-selection highlighting. transform. 8-8 partially loaded. 10-52 placing the text. GL-6 Open. 1-24 MB2. 8-8 unloaded. 1-42 IN-4 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . 5-2. Part File. GL-2 P Pad. B-14 quadrant point. 1-24 Menu. C-11 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Model. C-8 Notes and Labels editing text. 8-9 Pocket. B-15 cylindrical.

13-22 Slot. 10-20 System. 13-23 Snap angle. C-6 delta. C-4 Subtract. 10-17 Simple fillet. C-4 destination layer. C-7 SCS. GL-8 Sub-assembly. D-35 Single Offset Chamfer. 8-18 rotate about a line. 3-22 EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual IN-5 . GL-7 Real Time Dynamics. 8-16. C-12 Rotate about a point reposition. 8-22 transform. C-6 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ S Save Part As. 15-27 Right Hand Rule. 14-7 Top-Down Modeling. C-3 Transform copy. 8-13. GL-8 String. GL-8 constraining of. GL-8 Specify. 8-5 Trace status. D-37 Tool Solid. GL-8 Top-Down modeling.Index R ReadĆOnly Part. 8-21. 14-7 Temporary Part. 8-2 Subdivisions. GL-7 Smooth Edges. 3-21 Rectangular. 15-15 Sheet. C-7 subdivisions. GL-8 Sketch Curve Creation. 3-30. C-4 trace status. C-4 multiple copies. GL-8 SubĆassembly. D-10 Solid Body. transform. C-3 translate. GL-7 Rectangular Pocket. 8-22 Respecify Parameters. 6-11 Sketch. C-11 move. GL-7 Removing Drawing Views . create. C-10 scale. transform. C-12 rotate about a point. 10-20 deleting a utility symbol. transform. GL-5 TfrĆTri. 1-27. create. 11-3 types of. GL-7 Rotate. C-8 rotate about a line. C-10 Rotation. 2-11 Rotate about a line reposition. GL-8 T Target Solid. 10-16. definition of. destination layer. C-3 Spline. 14-9 Surface. GL-7 Silhouettes. GL-8 Selection Toolbar. GL-8 Stored View. 8-23 transform. C-2 mirror through a line. 11-2 Refresh. 8-23 rotate about a point. 3-22 Reference Feature Datum Axis. 10-10 Reposition. creating utility symbols. 12-2 Datum Plane. 10-19 associativity of utility symbols. 13-61 Coordinate System. GL-8 Three curve fillet. C-3 edit. 3-38 Slot. GL-8 Stored Layout. 8-22 translate. 2-2. GL-8 TfrĆISO. 10-17 Snap Angle. 1-39 Scale. the WCS. GL-8 Symbols. C-4 nonĆuniform scale.

Component. GL-10 W WAVE. 3-3. C-4 Translate reposition. C-6 Trim. GL-9 Work Part. C-4 Unigraphics. C-6 undo last. 14-8 Units. GL-9 Inches. GL-8 Work. D-36 View. C-3 Work Layer. 15-6 X XCĆAxis. 2-4 Work. GL-9 Z ZCĆAxis. GL-10 V Vectors. GL-9 Unite. GL-10 U Undo. 2-10 Origin. destination layer. 1-26 Undo last. 2-3. 1-9 Millimeters. 8-21. 2-26 Version. transform.Index to a point. Defining of. create. transform. GL-9 Isometric. 15-10 Upgrade. definition of. GL-9 Dynamics. 15-3 edit during update. 8-16. 4-5 WCS Dynamics. GL-10 IN-6 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . GL-8 Trim curve. 1-9 Unsuppress feature. D-49 Two curve fillet. 1-15. 3-8 WCS. GL-10 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ IN ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ Update. GL-5 Trimetric. GL-9 Y YCĆAxis. 8-22 transform.

Reference Chart Tear Outs These tear out reference charts are provided for your convenience. EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual .

(This Page Intentionally Left Blank) Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

etc. none Wireframe Modeling Solid Modeling Parametric Modeling Drafting Assemblies Manufacturing novice intermediate advanced future use EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . If you have any additional comments please write them on the back of this form. modeling. What is the function of your CAD/CAM/CAE system (documentation. Are you currently using Unigraphics? _______ Version _______ Hours per week? 7.)? 8.)? Date 9. Please check the box that best describes your current skill level in the various Unigraphics disciplines listed below. Please list other completed CAD/CAM/CAE courses and the provider including Unigraphics CBT and CAST: Course Provider 10. etc. How long have you been working with CAD/CAM/CAE systems? Years ______ 5. What do you model in your Unigraphics part files (castings. Current responsibilities: 3. assemblies. translation interface.Student Profile Practical Applications of Unigraphics Name Employer U. citizen? Yes / No When is your planned departure time?________________am/pm Please answer the following questions as honestly as you can. floor plans. We are concerned about providing training that meets your needs. What other CAD/CAM/CAE systems are you familiar with? 6. Job title: 2.S. 1. analysis. How long have you held these responsibilities? Years ______ Months ______ 4.

Additional Comments Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

D Lesson 5. Edge Operations D Workbook Section 1 Project Description & Rear Differential Modeling Day 2 Tuesday Morning D Lesson 7. Intro to Drafting D Workbook Section 3 Rear Differential Drafting Day 3 Wednesday Morning D Lesson 11. and Drafting Afternoon D Lesson 13. Model Construction Query D Lesson 8. Sketching Day 4 Thursday Morning D Lesson 14. Master Model Afternoon D Lesson 10. Form Features Expressions Face Operations D Lesson 6. Assembly. and Drafting Rear Drive Gear Modeling EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . Assembly. Introduction to Assemblies D Workbook Section 2 Rear Differential Assembly D Lesson 9. Datum Axes D Workbook Section 4 Rear Axle Modeling.Practical Applications of Unigraphics Course Agenda Day 1 Monday Morning D Introduction & Overview D Lesson 1. D Lesson 4. Getting Started D Lesson 2. Datum Planes D Lesson 12. Introduction to Solid Modeling Afternoon D Lesson 3. Swept Features & Boolean Operations D Workbook Section 5 Power Pack Sketching Afternoon D Workbook Section 6 D Workbook Section 7 Left Pinion Modeling.

Instance Arrays Afternoon D Workbook Section 9 D Workbook Section 10 Rear Drive Gear Completion Assembly Completion Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Editing the Model D Workbook Section 8 Part and Assembly Editing D Lesson 16.Day 5 Friday Morning D Lesson 15.

Model Geometry Object Type Solid Geometry InterĆpart Modeling Sketch Geometry Curve Geometry Reference Geometry Sheet Bodies Layer Assignment 1-20 15-20 21-40 41-60 61-80 81-100 Category Name SOLIDS LINKED_OBJECTS SKETCHES CURVES DATUMS SHEETS Drafting Objects Object Type Drawing Borders Layer Assignment 101-110 Category Name FORMATS Engineering Disciplines Object Type Mechanism Tools Finite Element Meshes and Engr. Tools Manufacturing Quality Tools Layer Assignment 121-130 131-150 151-180 181-190 Category Name MECH CAE MFG QA EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual .Class Layers and Categories The following layer and category standards will be followed in this class.

(This Page Intentionally Left Blank) Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX .

Arc. this is usually not the only way the line may be created. Line between two points Select two points Line through a point and horizontal. or at an angle to a line 1 2 1 2 Line through a point and tangent or normal to a curve 2 1 S Select a point S Select a curve S Select limiting point/object (if necessary) Line tangent or perpendicular to two curves Select two curves Line tangent to a curve and parallel or perpendicular to a line A bisector line 2 1 S Select two curves S Select limiting point/object Select two lines EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual .Line. then point] Line through a point and parallel. vertical. S Define a point S Select a line S Select limiting point/object [May also select line. and Circle Creation Methods Line Creation Note: When numbered picks are shown. or at an angle to the WCS Y 1 X S Define the first point S Define second point within the Snap Angle setting or S Enter the desired angle and press <Tab>. perpendicular.

start point. tangent object. Start point. end point 1 2 3 Arc center. this is usually not the only way the arc or circle can be created. tangent object 1 2 S Define first point S Define second point S Select tangent object S Define start point S Select tangent object S Define end point Start point. end point. end point 3 1 2 S Define first point S Define second point S Define third point Circle center. point on arc 2 1 3 S Define first point S Define second point S Define third point 3 Start point. tangent object 1 2 S Define point S Select tangent object Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . end point.Arc and Circle Creation Note: When numbered picks are shown. point on circle 2 1 S Define first point S Define second point Circle center.

Object Edit.Hot Key Chart Hot Key CtrlĆA CtrlĆB CtrlĆC CtrlĆD CtrlĆE CtrlĆF CtrlĆG CtrlĆH CtrlĆI CtrlĆJ CtrlĆK CtrlĆL CtrlĆM Function Assembly Navigator Edit. Operation. Save Edit. Plot View. Undo EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . Rotate (full menu) File. Gateway Cut Edit. New File. Transform Execute User Function Paste Application. Layer Settings Application. Expression Fit View Grip Execute Information. Blank Copy Delete Tools. Modeling Hot Key CtrlĆN CtrlĆO CtrlĆP CtrlĆQ CtrlĆR CtrlĆS CtrlĆT CtrlĆU CtrlĆV CtrlĆW CtrlĆX CtrlĆY CtrlĆZ Function File. Object Display Format. Open File.

Reverse Blank CtrlĆShiftĆO All View. CLSF Application ManufacturĆ ing Tools. Open Tools. Lathe Cross-SecĆ tion Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Unblank SeĆ lected CtrlĆShiftĆL CtrlĆShiftĆM Model Navigator View. Visible In View Preferences. Blank. Layout. Fit All CtrlĆShiftĆS Views Debug Grip CtrlĆShiftĆT High Quality Image CtrlĆShiftĆU CtrlĆShiftĆV CtrlĆShiftĆW CtrlĆShiftĆX CtrlĆShiftĆY CtrlĆShiftĆZ Format. Save As CtrlĆShiftĆN Edit. Boundary Tools. Layout. Object Edit. Macro. Selection Edit. Macro. Zoom (full menu) AltĆTab AltĆF4 F1 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Toggles Application Closes Active Window Help on Context View Current Dialog Information Window Refresh Quick Zoom Quick Rotate CtrlĆAltĆB CtrlĆAltĆC CtrlĆAltĆM CtrlĆAltĆN CtrlĆAltĆW CtrlĆAltĆX Tools. Playback Quick Shaded Image Tools. New Format. Operation.CtrlĆShiftĆA CtrlĆShiftĆB CtrlĆShiftĆC CtrlĆShiftĆD CtrlĆShiftĆE CtrlĆShiftĆF CtrlĆShiftĆG CtrlĆShiftĆH CtrlĆShiftĆI CtrlĆShiftĆJ CtrlĆShiftĆK File. Unblank All Of Part Format. Unisim Application Assemblies Tools. Layout. Curvature Graph CtrlĆShiftĆP CtrlĆShiftĆQ CtrlĆShiftĆR Format. Step Preferences. Blank. Record Toolsm Macro. Blank.

Hotel Accommodations (if applicable) Hotel name What was your overall impression of this hotel? Facilities . Please check the box if you would like your comments. Were the course objectives clearly defined and were they met? Please explain: Yes No 2. featured in our training publications. Were concepts effectively communicated so that you understand how to apply the software? No Please explain: Yes 3.How would you rate the training facilities? Instruction . How well prepared do you now feel to use the functions covered in this course in your day to day activities? Please explain: 4. Provide additional comments on the reverse side of this evaluation form. Were the student activities effective in learning Unigraphics? Please explain: Yes No over EDS All Rights Reserved Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual . regarding the training you just received. We will contact you if more information is needed.Practical Applications of Unigraphics Training Course Evaluation Name (Optional) Instructor Location Date Unigraphics NX Please give your honest opinion about the training you have received during this class.How would you rate the instruction? Was the instructor knowledgeable of the subject? Comments Poor 2 Poor 2 Poor 2 Poor 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 1.

would you be willing to participate in this survey.) Course . Do you have any other suggestions on how the course could be improved? Please explain: Yes No 8. What additional topics related to parametric design would you like to see covered in this course? Please explain: 7.What was your overall impression? Additional Comments Poor 2 3 4 5 6 7 Practical Applications of Unigraphics Student Manual EDS All Rights Reserved Unigraphics NX . Was the workbook activity effective in reinforcing the concepts taught? Please explain: Yes No 6. make sure that your name is on this sheet.5. In order to continually improve our courseware a post class survey is conducted. j (If you checked this box.